Techenical Service Bulletin

HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING
AC002–00
Title:
A/C COMPRESSOR MAINTENANCE FOR
Technical Service STORED VEHICLES
BULLETIN Models:
July 21, 2000 All Models
Introduction When a vehicle is stored for a long period (more than one month), the volume of oil
in the A/C compressor may decrease due to oil flow into the condenser, pipes, etc.
If the A/C system is turned on at high engine RPM after a long storage period, A/C
compressor damage may result.
To minimize the possibility of damage to the A/C compressor while storing a vehicle,
perform the following recommended maintenance procedure at least once a month to
lubricate the compressor.
Maintenance Recommended Maintenance Procedure For A/C Compressor Lubrication:

Procedure
1. Turn off A/C and blower switches prior to starting engine.
2. Start and warm–up engine until engine speed drops below 1,000 RPM.
3. Turn on the A/C system (including the rear A/C) using the following settings:
S A/C switch: On
S Blower Speed: High
S Engine Speed: Below 1,000 RPM
4. Keep A/C on with engine idling for at least 30 seconds.
5. Turn off A/C system and stop engine.
Warranty OP CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
N/A Not Applicable to Warranty – – – –
Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 1

TSB
REVISED
AUDIO
Title:
AU001–97
CLEANING CASSETTE TAPE HEADS
AND CAPSTANS
Models:
May 16, 1997 All Models
Introduction The cassette tape head and capstan should be cleaned regularly to prevent poor sound
quality and/or cassettes from jamming.
Head
Pinch Roller
Capstan
Fig. 1
Conditions The following conditions can easily be avoided by regularly cleaning the head with a tape
cleaner and only using good quality cassettes.
Poor Sound Since the tape head contacts the cassette tape, the tape head accumulates metal oxides
Quality due to and dirt particles from the tape. In time, a layer of dirt forms on the tape head resulting in
Dirty Head poor transfer of information between the tape and the tape head. This typically causes a
reduction of the higher frequencies or a reduction of the brightness in sound quality.
Tape Speed Tape speed is controlled by the tape capstan and pinch rollers. If the capstan and pinch
rollers accumulate dirt, the tape may slip causing the music to play too fast or too slow.
Jamming Dirt can make the capstans sticky, causing the tape to become entangled in the cassette
mechanism. This can cause the cassette to become jammed in the player.
Cassette To reduce the occurrence of these conditions, the following approved cassette cleaners are
Tape Head available through the non–parts system (Material Distribution Center).
Cleaners
TOOLS & MATERIALS MATERIAL NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Allsop 3 Cassette Recorder Cleaner 00113–AS710–00 Cleaning Cassette and Cleaning

Solution with Instruction Sheet
NOTE:
Allow 15 minutes for the cleaning fluid to evaporate before playing a tape.
Page 1 of 2
CLEANING CASSETTE TAPE HEADSAND CAPSTANS – AU001–97 (Revised) May 16, 1997
Cassette The following precautions should be taken to keep cassettes in good condition:
Tape Care
Procedure 1. Remove the cassette from the player when the cassette is not in use.
2. Store the cassette in its case.
3. Store the cassette in a cool, dry area away from direct sunlight and magnetic
components such as speakers.
4. Avoid touching the tape itself. This could result in poor sound quality or sound drop out.
5. Keep the tape tightly wound as shown in
figure 2. Tape speed can be affected by
loosely wound tape. Use a pencil
to tighten up
loose tapes.
Fig. 2
6. Avoid inserting a cassette into the player if Peeling Label

the cassette label is loose or peeling as
shown in figure 3. This can cause a
cassette to become stuck in the player.
Fig. 3
7. Use cassettes that are 90 minutes or

Tape length
less in length. Cassettes over 90
in minutes
minutes use extremely thin tape that is
subject to stretch, resulting in poor
sound quality.
Fig. 4
Page 2 of 2
AUDIO
AU002–96
OCTOBER 25, 1996
ALL MODELS
AM STATIC NOISE ON VEHICLES WITH POWER ANTENNAS Page 1 of 2
Vehicles with power antennas may exhibit audible electrical noise on weak AM stations when
various electrical accessories (turn signals, rear defogger, cruise control, brakes, etc.) are operated.
Poor antenna grounding can cause this condition.
To eliminate or reduce the intensity of the noise, use the following repair procedure:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Tune the radio to a strong, static–free AM
station and slowly move the tip of the
antenna mast forward and back
approximately 2 inches (Fig. 1). If static
noise is not heard, go to Step 2. If static
noise is heard during antenna movement,
replace the antenna mast and go to Step 3.
Fig. 1
NOTE: Do not touch the antenna mast with

your bare hands. Use a glove or
Inspection
nonmetallic object to move the
Area
antenna. (If you touch the antenna
with your hands, you will change the
antenna sensitivity).
Fig. 2
2. Remove the antenna mast and inspect the
base of the mast for corrosion and damage
(Fig. 2). Clean with 1500 grit sandpaper.
3. Remove the antenna assembly and inspect
the inner fender around the antenna hole
for corrosion (Fig. 3). Clean with 1500 grit
sandpaper.
Fig. 3
AM STATIC NOISE ON VEHICLES WITH POWER ANTENNAS Page 2 of 2
REPAIR PROCEDURE (Cont’d):
4. Remove the antenna spacer grommet at the

top of the antenna assembly and inspect for
Inspection
corrosion (Fig. 4). Clean with 1500 grit
Area
sandpaper.
Fig. 4
5. Reinstall the antenna assembly. Be sure to

2
install the external antenna nut (escutcheon)
first. Then install the nut which holds the
assembly to the inner bracket (Fig. 5).
1
3
Push
Fig. 5
6. Check to make sure that the teeth on the

Antenna
antenna spacer grommet make good contact
with the inner fender well (Fig. 6).
Teeth
Fender
Fig. 6
7. Inspect the antenna cable connection and

clean as necessary (Fig. 7). Reconnect the
antenna cable, the wire harness and the drain
hose.
Inspection
Area
Fig. 7
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
OPCODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2
AU6001 Listed repair procedure 1.0 86300–XXXXX 76 73

(All items)
ACCESSORIES
AX001–00
Title:
TOYOTA DINGHY" TOWING GUIDE
Technical Service Models:
BULLETIN All Models

March 17, 2000
Introduction The chart on the next page indicates which Toyota vehicles can be Dinghy towed (towed
with four wheels on the ground) behind a Motorhome.
CAUTION:
Dinghy towing a vehicle behind a Motorhome requires special towing equipment
and accessories. Please see your Motorhome Manufacturer / Service Outlet for
recommended towing equipment.

Information

TOYOTA “DINGHY” TOWING GUIDE – AX001–00 March 17, 2000
Affected S All Models

Vehicles
DINGHY TOWABLE SPEED/DISTANCE

YEAR MODEL
M/T A/T LIMITS
1995 – 2000 Avalon Not Towable –

1992 – 2000 Camry Yes No None
1999 – 2000 Solara Yes No None
1994 – 1999 Celica Yes No None
2000 Celica GT Yes No None
Yes – None
2000 Celica GT–S
– Yes 55 MPH / 200 Miles
1993 – 2000 Corolla Yes No None
2000 ECHO Yes No None
1992 – 2000 Land Cruiser Not Towable –
2000 MR2 Spyder Yes N/A None
1996 – 1998 Paseo Yes No None
1992 – 1997 Previa 2WD Not Towable –
1992 – 1997 Previa 4WD Not Towable –
1998 – 2000 Sienna Not Towable –
1994 – 1999 Supra Not Towable –
1996 – 2000 RAV4 2WD Yes No None
1996 – 2000 RAV4 4WD Yes No None
1995 – 1998 Tercel Yes No None
1996 – 2000 4Runner 2WD Not Towable –
1996 – 2000 4Runner 4WD Not Towable –
1995 – 2000 Tacoma 2WD Not Towable –
1995 – 2000 Tacoma 4WD Not Towable –
1993 – 1999 T100 2WD Not Towable –
1993 – 1999 T100 4WD Not Towable –
2000 Tundra 2WD Not Towable –
2000 Tundra 4WD Not Towable –
NOTE:
After “Dinghy” Towing, or at the recommended distance limits, let the Engine idle for
more than 3 minutes before operating the vehicle or resuming towing.
NOTE:
Vehicles that are Dinghy towable will not sustain internal damage to the transmission
or transfer components, as long as speed/distance limits are observed. The
transmission must be placed in the “neutral” position when Dinghy towing. Dinghy
towing these vehicles does not eliminate the possibility of damage to other vehicle
systems (Body, Chassis, Electrical Systems, etc.).
Page 2 of 2
ACCESSORIES
Title:
AX001-01
RETRO-FIT INTERNAL TRUNK
Technical Service RELEASE KITS
Models:
BULLETIN All Applicable ’90 – ’00 Models
March 9, 2001
Introduction In order to respond to requests of our valued customers, we are offering Retro–Fit
Internal Trunk Release Kits. These kits allow the trunk to be opened from the inside in
case of entrapment.
Applicable MODEL MODEL CODE MODEL YEAR # CLAMPS

Vehicles
MCX10 1995 – 1999 4
Avalon
MCX20 2000 4
SXV10, MCV10, VCV10 1992 – 1996 4
Camry
SXV20, MCV20 1997 – 2000 4
Celica (Coupe) AT200, ST204 1994 – 1999 4
AE10# 1993 – 1997 4
Corolla (Sedan)
ZZE110 1998 – 2000 5
ECHO NCP12 2000 4
MR2 SW20, 21 1990 – 1995 2
EL44 1992 – 1995 4
Paseo
EL54 1996 – 1999 4
Solara SXV20, MCV20 1999 – 2000 4
EL42 1991 – 1994 4
Tercel
EL53 1995 – 1999 4
Parts PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME

Information
– 64640–33030 Trunk Release
– 64610–17040 Trunk Release (MR2 Only)
– 90464–00551 Clamp
– MDC 00107–00316–TR Installation Instructions
Installation Order the appropriate trunk release, at least as many clamps as listed above, and a set
Procedure of installation instructions. Follow the installation procedure detailed in the installation
instructions. Installation time is 0.7 hours.

Information

ACCESSORIES
AX003–00
Title:
PORT INSTALLED RS3000 TVIP TRUNK
Technical Service COURTESY CONNECTION
BULLETIN Models:
March 31, 2000 ’99 Camry
Introduction The trunk courtesy connection for 1999 model year Camry vehicles equipped with a Port
Installed Option RS3000 (V3) has been relocated from the luggage compartment light
switch to below the dash (lower finish panel) on the driver’s side in the Instrument Panel
J/B. (Refer to Illustrations A & B on page 2.)
S The location was changed to improve the installation process.

S A splicing connector is used for the new trunk courtesy wire installation (blue) to the
vehicle’s wire harness at Instrument Panel J/B (red/yellow).
S The previous location is the same as the dealer installed RS3000 trunk courtesy
connection to the luggage compartment light switch connection.
For service related purposes, this bulletin describes the procedures to locate the new
trunk courtesy connection at Instrument Panel J/B in vehicles equipped with PIO
RS3000.
LED
Microphone
Remote Control Status Monitor

S The remote transmitter has two S The status monitor has a Toyota label,
buttons, Top and Bottom. LED, and microphone.
Applicable S 1999 model year Camry vehicles equipped with PIO (V3) TVIP.
Vehicles
Information

PORT INSTALLED RS3000 TVIP TRUNK COURTESY CONNECTION – AX003–00 March 31, 2000
Locating New Location:

Procedure
These steps below are to be followed to
locate the new trunk courtesy connection
when servicing Camry vehicles equipped
with the PIO RS3000 TVIP.
1. Remove the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the driver’s step cover.
3. Remove the driver’s cowl cover (1
nut).
4. Locate the Connector Junction Block Connector
in the driver’s cowl area. You will Junction Block
notice a RED/YELLOW wire routed to
the Blue 10P connector which
terminates at an adjacent splicing
connector. This is the TVIP Trunk 10P
Connector
Courtesy Wire.
(Blue)
Illustration A
5. Disconnect the Blue 10P connector

from the Connector Junction Block. Wire Side View
With the tab of the Blue 10P TVIP Trunk
Courtesy Wire
connector facing up, look at the back (Yellow/Red)
(wire side) and locate the wire in the
bottom row, second space from the
right, which has the splicing connector
attached to it. This is the Vehicle’s
Trunk Courtesy Signal Wire.
6. After completing the parts inspection
and repairs if applicable, reconnect Splicing
the Blue 10P connector and install all Connector
previously removed parts.
10P
Previous Location: Connector
(Blue)
The White 1P connector for the Vehicle’s Illustration B
Trunk Courtesy Signal is located at the
trunk courtesy lamp switch near the trunk
latch in the vehicle’s trunk.
Page 2 of 2
ACCESSORIES
AX004–99
Title:
TOYOTA DINGHY" TOWING GUIDE
BULLETIN All Models

March 19, 1999
Introduction The following chart indicates which Toyota vehicles can be Dinghy towed (towed with four
wheels on the ground) behind a Motorhome.
CAUTION:
Dinghy towing a vehicle behind a Motorhome requires special towing equipment and
accessories. Please see your Motorhome Manufacturer / Service Outlet for
recommended towing equipment.

Vehicles
DINGHY TOWABLE
YEAR MODEL SPEED/DISTANCE
M/T A/T LIMITS
1995–1999 Avalon Not Towable –
1992–1999 Camry Yes No None
1993–1999 Corolla Yes No None
1995–1998 Tercel Yes No None
1996–1998 Paseo Yes No None
1994–1999 Celica Yes No None
1994–1998 Supra Not Towable –
1996–1999 RAV4 2WD Yes No None
1996–1999 RAV4 4WD Yes No None
1995–1999 Tacoma 2WD Not Towable –
1995–1999 Tacoma 4WD Not Towable –
1996–1999 4Runner 2WD Not Towable –
1996–1999 4Runner 4WD Not Towable –
1993–1998 T100 2WD Not Towable –
1993–1998 T100 4WD Not Towable –
1992–1999 Land Cruiser Not Towable –
1992–1999 Previa 2WD Not Towable –
1992–1999 Previa 4WD Not Towable –
1998–1999 Sienna Not Towable –
NOTE:
Vehicles that are Dinghy towable will not sustain internal damage to the transmission
or transfer components. The transmission must be placed in the “neutral” position
when Dinghy towing. Dinghy towing these vehicles does not eliminate the possibility
of damage to other vehicle systems (Body, Chassis, Electrical Systems, etc.)

Information

TSB
ACCESSORY
Title:
AX005-97
1997 CAMRY REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION
Models:
‘97 Camry
April 25, 1997
Introduction Upon installation of the rear spoiler, as outlined in the Dealer Installation Instruction sheet
enclosed with the spoiler, please follow the outlined procedure for verification of the trunk
lid operation:
Affected 1997 Model Year Camry.

Vehicles
Procedure 1. Reinstall the carpet trim panel on the

inside of the trunk lid with the
appropriate fasteners. Upper Slot
2. The trunk lid must remain open and

hold its position, up to approximately
45 degrees from horizontal as shown.
3. If the trunk lid does not hold its open

position and the trunk lid closes:
a. Move the end of one of the torsion

rods to the next upper open slot.
b. Verify that the trunk lid functions

as outlined above.
c. If the condition is not corrected,

adjust the other torsion bar to
the next upper open slot position.
4. If the trunk lid does not hold its open

position and the trunk lid opens fully
forcibly: Lower Slot
a. Move the end of one of the torsion

rods to the next lower open slot
position.
b. Verify that the trunk lid functions NOTE:

as outlined above. Upon completion of the procedure
described in this bulletin, please refer
c. If the condition is not corrected, to the Dealer Installation Instructions
please adjust the other torsion for final checks.
bar to the next lower open slot
position.
Page 1 of 1
ACCESSORIES
AX005–99
Title:
TOYOTA VIP RS3000 PROGRAMMING
BULLETIN All Models

April 9, 1999
Introduction This bulletin describes the procedures that are used to program the two–button remote
control for vehicles that are equipped with the dealer or port installed option (PIO), not
the factory security system. For factory security system remote control programming,
refer to the appropriate vehicle repair manual.
Verification of the dealer or PIO Toyota VIP can easily be performed by identifying the
status monitor or remote transmitter.
LED
Microphone
S The remote transmitter has two S The status monitor has a Toyota
buttons, Top and Bottom. label, LED, and microphone.
Starting with 1998 MY, the remote controls for the RS3000 System were revised with new
coding logics. The color of the remote control cases was changed from Black to Gray to
help identify the new remote controls. The new (Gray) remote controls will not work with
the RS3000 ECU’s produced prior to 1998 MY. The old (Black) remote controls are still
available for Service Parts.
NOTE:
The TVIP is programmed to operate with the two remote controls that come with the
vehicle. The ECU (computer) can be programmed to operate with up to four different
remote controls. For customer satisfaction, request that any existing remote be
furnished when programming a new or replacement unit.
Affected S All models with dealer or PIO equipped Toyota VIP (RS3000)
Vehicles
Warranty CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
N/A Not applicable to warranty – – – –

TOYOTA VIP RS3000 PROGRAMMING – ALL MODELS – AX005–99 April 9, 1999
Programming For location of the RS3000 ECU, refer to ECU Mounting Locations, Page 4.
Procedure
I. To program (add) a REMOTE CONTROL to the system:

1. Insert the key into ignition switch,
and turn it to “ON”.
2. Press and hold the ECU’s
PROGRAMMING SWITCH for 3
seconds.
Press and Hold

for 3 Seconds
The STATUS MONITOR LED

turns on for 5 seconds.
NOTE:
Lights Up
YOU MUST PERFORM THE NEXT
STEP WITHIN 5 SECONDS.
3. Press and release a REMOTE

CONTROL’s top or bottom Press Once
button.*

turns off.
The Piezo “chirper” chirps once.
The exterior lights flash once.
4. Turn off the ignition. The ECU will
now operate with the REMOTE
CONTROL just programmed.
* Either button on your REMOTE CONTROL can be programmed to operate the system. The bottom
button can be programmed to operate a second vehicle with the Toyota VIP.
Page 2 of 4
Programming II. To erase all REMOTE CONTROL codes from the system:
Procedure
(Continued) 1. Insert key into the ignition switch,
and turn it to “ON”.
PROGRAMMING SWITCH for 3
seconds.
Press and Hold

for 3 Seconds

turns on for 5 seconds.
NOTE:
Lights Up
YOU MUST PERFORM THE NEXT
STEP WITHIN 5 SECONDS.

PROGRAMMING SWITCH for
over 2 seconds again.

turns off, then flashes 3 times.
The Piezo “chirper” chirps three
times and the exterior lights flash Press and Hold Again, for 2
3 times. Seconds
4. Turn off the ignition. The ECU has cleared all REMOTE CONTROL codes; until
another REMOTE CONTROL is programmed, the system will not work with any
REMOTE CONTROL.
Page 3 of 4
ECU MOUNTING LOCATIONS
1. ’98 Model and prior has ECU located beneath the driver’s seat.
2. ’97 Model and prior has ECU located beneath the driver’s seat.
Page 4 of 4
ACCESSORIES
AX005–00
Title:
RS3000 TVIP AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK
Technical Service FEATURE PROGRAMMING
BULLETIN Models:
April 14, 2000 All Models
Introduction As a convenience feature, the RS3000 TVIP system is programmed to automatically lock
all of the vehicle’s doors (for vehicles equipped with power door locks) when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” or “START”, and unlock them when the key is turned back to “ACC”
or “LOCK”. The initial factory setting of this programmable feature is “ON”. For some
customers however, this feature is not desirable due to instances of passenger lockout
when the driver enters the vehicle first and starts the ignition.
For vehicles equipped with RS3000 TVIP, this bulletin advises the dealers to
communicate the following information to the customers at vehicle delivery:
1. Inform the customers of the RS3000 system’s automatic (ignition controlled) door
lock/unlock feature.
2. Inquire about the customers’ preference for it to be set “ON” or “OFF”.
3. Reprogram the feature’s setting according to the customer’s preference.
To change the feature’s operation mode, follow the programming procedures on page 2.
Verification of the Dealer–Installed Option (DIO) or Port–Installed Option (PIO) RS3000

TVIP System can easily be performed by identifying the status monitor and remote
transmitter.
LED
Microphone

S The remote transmitter has two S The status monitor has a Toyota label,
buttons, Top and Bottom. LED, and microphone.
Applicable S All models equipped with DIO or PIO RS3000 TVIP.

Vehicles
Information

RS30000 TVIP AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK FEATURE PROGRAMMING – AX005–00 April 14, 2000
Programming AUTOMATIC (IGNITION–CONTROLLED) DOOR LOCKING/UNLOCKING FUNCTION

Procedure
The factory setting for the Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Function is “ON”.
To change this feature’s operation, follow the steps below:
1. Sit in the driver’s seat with driver’s door open.
2. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn it to “ON” position (not “ACC”)
5 times (ON > LOCK > ON > LOCK > ON > LOCK > ON > LOCK > ON) within a
10 second period.
System Response: The STATUS MONITOR’s LED turns on, and the PIEZO
BUZZER sounds once.
NOTE:
You must perform the next steps within 30 seconds.
3. Select the customer’s preferred operating mode.
Mode Programming Step Programming Completion

Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
AUTOMATIC DOOR System Response:
Close the driver’s door.
LOCKING/UNLOCKING “ON” The PIEZO BUZZER sounds
once, and the exterior lights
flash once.
Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
Close the driver’s door,
AUTOMATIC DOOR System Response:
then open and close it
LOCKING/UNLOCKING “OFF” The PIEZO BUZZER sounds
one more time.
twice, and the exterior lights
flash twice.
Page 2 of 2
ACCESSORIES
AX006–99
Title:
RS3000 TVIP PROGRAMMING CHANGES
Technical Service FOR GBS
BULLETIN Models:
April 23, 1999 All Models
Introduction Starting with 1999 MY, the programming in the RS3000 ECU for the Glass Breakage
Sensor (GBS) to trigger the alarm has been changed to improve the Toyota Vehicle
Intrusion Protection (TVIP) system’s theft warning feature when glass breakage or impact
to the glass is detected.
Previous operation of GBS (for 1998 MY and prior):
S Upon (first) detection of breakage of the vehicle’s glass, the GBS will sound the
security system for 5 seconds (3 horn honks).
S If there is a second detection of glass breakage, within 5 seconds of the first
detection, the security system will sound for the full duration of 59 seconds.
Improved operation of GBS (from 1999 MY):
S Upon (first) detection of breakage of the vehicle’s glass, the GBS will sound the
security system for 20 seconds.
S If there is a second detection of glass breakage, the security system will sound for the
full duration of 59 seconds, regardless of time between the first and second
detections.
S After the first detection, any subsequent detection will trigger the alarm for the full
duration of 59 seconds as long as the security system is armed. The GBS trigger
cycle will reset once the security system is disarmed and then rearmed.
This improvement is intended to enhance the previous trigger cycle of the security
system and ward off an intruder.
The color of the previous (1998 MY and prior) RS3000 ECU was black. The new
RS3000 ECU color is gray.

Vehicles

Information
08585–00921 SAME RS3000 Base Kit

Information

RS3000 TVIP PROGRAMMING CHANGES FOR GBS – AX006–99 April 23, 1999
Repair When performing the RS3000 System Test, check the Glass Breakage Sensor sensitivity
Procedure as follows:
1. Press and release the Remote Control’s top button to arm the system.
2. Wait two seconds.
3. With the tip of the ignition key (or striker tool), softly tap the center of the driver’s door
window glass.
S If the system is triggered (horn sounds for 20 seconds), the sensitivity must be
adjusted. Turn the Glass Breakage Sensor ECU’s adjustment screw clockwise
one notch, and repeat this step again.
4. If the system is not triggered, repeat the glass tapping with moderate force.
S The system should trigger when the glass is tapped with moderate force. If it is
not triggered, turn the Glass Breakage Sensor ECU’s adjustment screw clockwise
one notch, and repeat this step again.
CAUTION:
Use caution when performing the step above. Do not tap the window glass with too
much force, or the glass may crack or break. Use extra caution when the temperature
is extremely cold.
NOTE:
The Owner’s Guide included in the RS3000 Base Kit is changed to reflect the
(GBS logic) improvement. There is no change to the GBS ECU itself.
Page 2 of 2
ACCESSORIES
AX007–00
Title:
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF ACCESSORY
Technical Service ALLOY WHEELS
BULLETIN Models:
September 22, 2000 ’99 – ’01 Avalon, Camry, Solara & Sienna
Introduction This bulletin introduces a new accessory alloy wheel for 1999 through 2001 model year
Avalon, Camry, Solara and Sienna vehicles. This new wheel is similar in appearance to
an existing alloy wheel. This bulletin points out that the two wheels are not
interchangeable.
Applicable S 1999 – 2001 model year Avalon, Camry, Solara & Sienna.
Vehicles
Parts WHEEL WHEEL PART NUMBER REMARK
Information Style 1, Split 5 Spoke PT351–00990 Conical (Tapered) Seat Lug Nut
Style 2, Split 5 Spoke PT351–00991 Flat Seat Lug Nut
Flat Seat Lug Nut Conical (Tapered)

Seat Lug Nut
Every applicable vehicle must be installed with all four wheels of the same part number.
In cases where replacement of one wheel is necessitated, it must be replaced by a wheel
of the same part number. Replacement of one part number with the other is permitted
only as a set of four wheels.
The service part numbers for the lug nuts are not interchangeable.
WHEEL PART NUMBER LUG NUT PART NUMBER LUG NUT DESCRIPTION
PT351–00990 PT351–00990–LN Conical (Tapered) Seat
PT351–00991 PT351–12009–01 Flat Seat
The service part numbers for the center caps are not interchangeable.
WHEEL PART NUMBER CENTER CAP PART NUMBER
PT351–00990 PT351–00991–WC
PT351–00991 PT351–00991–CC

Information

BODY
BO002–00
Title:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER
BULLETIN ’98 – ’00 Model Year

January 21, 2000
Introduction Toyota customers who find it necessary to

increase the length of their seat belts may
obtain Seat Belt Extenders at no cost Seat Belt
through their local Toyota dealer.
S The extender is available in 6 inch, 9 inch,

12 inch, 15 inch and 18 inch lengths.
S The extender is available only in black.

Extender
S Owners are informed of the seat belt

extender availability through the Toyota
Owner’s Manual included in each vehicle.
The customer (individual requiring the extender) must visit a Toyota dealership to have
the required measurements made and to complete the seat belt extender worksheet.
The worksheet will allow the proper fitting and selection of a seat belt extender for the
customer. The dealership personnel should then determine the applicable part number
and place a Critical Order through the TDN Parts Network.
The dealership service department should complete the affixed Seat Belt Extender Label
and review the “owner instruction sheet” with the customer. The dealership should give a
copy of the completed worksheet to the customer and keep the original in the customer’s
file.
To assure utmost owner satisfaction, it is recommended that a dealership designate one
person to coordinate all activities related to the seat belt extender issue.
From past sales history, it is recommended that dealerships do not stock Seat belt
extenders due to low demand and the need for customer fitting.
This bulletin contains the following information:
Procedure and Sample Label.................Page 2
Application Charts .................................Page 3–4
Part Number Information........................Page 5
Owner Instructions..................................Page 6
Seat Belt Extender Worksheet............... Page 7
Applicable S All Toyota models, 1998 through 2000 model years.

Vehicles

Information

SEAT BELT EXTENDER: ’98 – ’00 – BO002–00 January 21, 2000
Procedure 1. Owner requests a seat belt extender from dealer.

2. Dealer verifies the need for a seat belt extender and obtains a current copy of this
TSB and copies the worksheet.
3. Dealer measures the customer and completes the worksheet. Dealer determines the
correct part number and places a Critical Order for the part through the TDN Parts
Network.
4. Dealer receives seat belt extender and calls the customer in to check fit of the part.
5. If the seat belt extender fit is good, dealership personnel completes the customer
information label on the part, explains usage of the part, and gives the customer a
copy of the completed worksheet.
6. Dealer places a copy of the completed worksheet in the customer’s records.
PARTS DEALER OWNER

DEALER
SUPPLY
MEASURE PLACE SHIP SEAT RECEIVE

COMPLETE
CUSTOMER CRITICAL BELT TEST FIT COPY OF
LABEL AND
& ORDER EXTENDER CUSTOMER WORKSHEET
ADVISE
COMPLETE THROUGH TO WITH PART & USE
OWNER
WORKSHEET TDN DEALER EXTENDER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN
CUSTOMER
RECORDS
Sample Seat
Belt Extender
Customer CAUTION
Information
Label
Page 2 of 7
Front Seat Belt FRONT SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION

Extender MODEL TYPE ’00 ’99 ’98
Applications
RAV4 — R–5 R–5 R–5
RAV4 EV — R–5 R–5 R–5
RH
TERCEL — R–5 R–5
LH
COUPE (RH)
— R–5 R–5
PASEO COUPE (LH)
CONVERTIBLE — N–6 N–6
ECHO — K–5 — —
TMMC PRODUCTION
COROLLA Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
NUMMI PRODUCTION
MR2 — N–6 — —
LIFTBACK & COUPE N–6
CELICA N–6 N–6
CONVERTIBLE —
TMC PRODUCTION
CAMRY Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
TMMK PRODUCTION
CAMRY COUPE Q–4 Q–4 —
SOLARA COVERTIBLE Q–4 — —
SUPRA — — — R–3
AVALON *1 — T–1 Q–2 Q–2
SIENNA — Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
TACOMA *1 — S–1 S–1 S–1
4RUNNER — K–5 K–5 K–5
LAND CRUISER — K–5 K–5 K–5
T100 *1 — — — R–5
TUNDRA *1 — Q–4 — —
*1 The extender must not be used for the center seat belt of Avalon, Tacoma, T100 and Tundra which have
bench seats.
Page 3 of 7
Rear Seat Belt REAR SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION

Applications
W/TOKAI RIKA R–5*1 R–5*1 R–5*1
RAV4
W/QSS Q–4*2 Q–4*2 Q–4*2
RAV4 EV — Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
W/TOKAI RIKA — R–5*1 R–5*1
TERCEL
W/QSS — Q–4*2 Q–4*2
COUPE — R–5 R–5
N–1*3,
CONVERTIBLE (RH) — N–3
PASEO N–3*4
N–5*3,
CONVERTIBLE (LH) — N–6
N–6*4
ECHO — R–5 — —
TMMC PRODUCTION Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
COROLLA
NUMMI PRODUCTION T–1 T–1 T–1
LIFTBACK & COUPE N–6 N–6 N–6
CELICA CONVERTIBLE (RH) — N–1 N–1
CONVERTIBLE (LH) — N–5 N–5
TMC PRODUCTION
TMMK PRODUCTION
CAMRY COUPE Q–4 Q–4 —
SOLARA CONVERTIBLE Q–4 — —
SUPRA — — — R–3
AVALON — T–1 Q–2 Q–2
TACOMA XTRACAB A–2 A–2 A–2
4RUNNER — R–5 R–5 R–5
T100 XTRACAB — — K–4
TUNDRA ACCESS CAB Q–4 — —
*1 This seat belt was supplied by TOKAI RIKA.

Make sure that the I/D mark on the back side of
the seat belt buckle is the same as shown.
*2 This seat belt was supplied by QSS. Make sure

that the I/D mark on the back side of the seat belt
buckle is the same as shown.
*3 N–1 and N–5 are applied to PASEO convertible from September 1997 to November 1997 production.
*4 N–3 and N–6 are applied to PASEO convertible from December 1997 production.
Page 4 of 7
Parts PART NUMBER PREFIX: 73399–

Information LENGTH
SERIES
6 INCH 9 INCH 12 INCH 15 INCH 18 INCH
R–1 –12010 –12020 –12030 –12040 –12050
R–2 –12160 –12170 –12180 –12190 –12200
R–3 –50010 –50020 –50030 –50040 –50050
R–4 –16010 –16020 –16030 –16040 –16050
R–5 –16060 –16070 –16080 –16090 –16100
N–1 –12060 –12070 –12080 –12090 –12100
N–3 –20011 –20021 –20031 –20041 –20051
N–4 –20060 –20070 –20080 –20090 –20100
N–5 –20110 –20120 –20130 –20140 –20150
N–6 –20160 –20170 –20180 –20190 –20200
K–1 –12110 –12120 –12130 –12140 –12150
K–2 –22010 –22020 –22030 –22040 –22050
K–3 –22060 –22070 –22080 –22090 –22100
K–4 –33010 –33020 –33030 –33040 –33050
K–5 –35010 –35020 –35030 –35040 –35050
A–1 –02010 –02020 –02030 –02040 –020050
A–2 –01060*1 –01070 –01080 –01090 –01100
Q–1 –02060 –02070 –02080 –02090 –02100
Q–2 –06010 –06020 –06030 –06040 –06050
Q–3 –06060 –06070 –06080 –06090 –06100
Q–4 –0W010 –0W020 –0W030 –0W040 –0W050
S–1 –04010 –04020 –04030 –04040 –04050
T–1 –01110 –01120 –01130 –01140 –01150
*1 Length: 7 1/4”
Page 5 of 7
Owner Failure to follow the recommendations indicated below could result in less effectiveness
Instructions of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle collision, causing personal injury.
The Seat Belt Extender must not be used:
A. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
B. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was provided.
C. When the Seat Belt Extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
locking retractor), make sure the retractor is locked when in use.
If your seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough, a
personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required
length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper
measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Toyota dealer.
CAUTION:
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in less effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case
of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.
S Never use the Seat Belt Extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt
without it.
S The Seat Belt Extender must never be used with any child safety seats.
S Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a
different vehicle, or for another person or at a different seating position than the
one originally intended for.
To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle–release buttons of the
extender and the seat belt are both
facing outward as shown. Seat Belt Release
You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle–release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt. This helps
prevent damage to the vehicle interior
and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 6 of 7
SEAT BELT EXTENDER WORKSHEET

PLEASE COPY THIS ORIGINAL WORKSHEET FOR EACH EXTENDER NEEDED
CAUTIONS:
S To minimize the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident, the seat belt
extender must only be used:
1 By the person for whom it was provided
2 In the seat position for which it was provided
S The seat belt extender must never be used with any child safety seats.
S When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
locking retractor), make sure the retractor is locked when extender belt is in use.
DEALER SEAT BELT EXTENDER APPLICATION APPLICANT

DEALER CODE DEALER NAME APPLICANT NAME
ADDRESS ADDRESS
CITY & STATE ZIP CITY & STATE ZIP PHONE
EMPLOYEE NAME MODEL YEAR BODY TYPE SEATING POSITION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
DIRECTIONS FOR DETERMINING PROPER EXTENDER LENGTH

1. Place the seat in the position the applicant normally uses
2. With applicant in the seat, wearing thickest coat expected to be worn, pull belt all the way out and try to buckle
belt
S If the belt latches into buckle and feels comfortable against upper chest area, an extender is not needed.
S If belt does not buckle continue with step 3
S If buckle latches but belt has no slack remaining, continue with step 3
3. Measure distance between applicant’s navel and seat belt buckle (dimension A) and enter on worksheet
4. With belt all the way out, measure distance between latch tip and buckle tip (dimension B) and enter on
worksheet
NOTE: If belt latches but there is no slack enter zero as dimension B
5. Subtract dimension B from dimension A and record number in check number box on worksheet
6. Seat belt extender length is dimension B rounded up to next extender length (without exceeding check number)
NOTE: If extender length exceeds check number, an extender can not be provided to the
customer
Dimension A: Dimension B:
NAVEL TO BUCKLE LATCH TO BUCKLE
Latch
Navel
Buckle
A B
Buckle
SEAT BELT EXTENDER CALCULATION

DIMENSION A: DIMENSION B: CHECK NUMBER:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER AUTHORIZATION

S The same seat belt extender can be used for right and left seating applications. Each seat belt extender will have
a label identifying the owner, VIN and seating position. Seat belt extenders are available only in black.
S Applicant’s Signature: _________________________________________ Date: ______________________
(Actual user of seat belt extender)
Page 7 of 7
BODY
BO002-01
Title:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER

January 26, 2001
TSB UPDATE NOTICE:

The information contained in this TSB updates BO020–00 dated August 11, 2000.
Revised text is red and underlined.

increase the length of their seat belts may obtain Seat Belt
Seat Belt Extenders at no cost through their local
Toyota dealer.
S The extender is available in 6 inch,
9 inch, 12 inch, 15 inch and 18 inch lengths.
Extender
S Owners are informed of the Seat Belt Extender
availability through the Toyota Owner’s Manual
included in each vehicle.
the required measurements made and to complete the Seat Belt Extender worksheet.
The worksheet will allow the proper fitting and selection of a Seat Belt Extender for the
The dealership service department should complete the affixed Seat Belt Extender
Customer Information Label and review the “Owner Instruction Sheet” with the customer.
The dealership should give a copy of the completed worksheet to the customer and keep
the original in the customer’s file.
person to coordinate all activities related to the Seat Belt Extender issue.
It is recommended that dealerships do not stock Seat Belt Extenders due to the need
for proper fitting to individual customers.
Procedure and Sample Label . . . . . . . . . . Page 2
Application Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 3–4
Part Number Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
Owner Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6
Seat Belt Extender Worksheet . . . . . . . . . Page 7
Applicable S 1999 through 2001 model year Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles
Information

SEAT BELT EXTENDER: ’99–’01 MODEL YEAR – BO002-01 January 26, 2001
Procedure 1. Owner requests a Seat Belt Extender from dealer.

2. Dealer verifies the need for a Seat Belt Extender and obtains a current copy of this
TSB and copies the Worksheet.
3. Dealer measures the customer and completes the Worksheet. Dealer determines the
Network.
4. Dealer receives Seat Belt Extender and calls the customer in to check fit of the part.
5. If the Seat Belt Extender fit is good, dealership personnel completes the Customer
Information Label on the part, explains usage of the part, and gives the customer a
copy of the completed Worksheet.
6. Dealer places copy of the completed Worksheet in the customer’s records.
DEALER PARTS DEALER DEALER

SUPPLY
MEASURE PLACE SHIP SEAT TEST FIT COMPLETE RECEIVE

CUSTOMER CRITICAL BELT CUSTOMER LABEL AND COPY OF
& ORDER EXTENDER WITH PART ADVISE WORKSHEET
COMPLETE THROUGH TO DEALER OWNER & USE
WORKSHEET TDN EXTENDER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN
CUSTOMER
RECORDS
Sample Seat
Belt Extender
Customer
CAUTION
Information
Label THIS SEAT BELT EXTENDER IS TO BE USED ONLY BY:
ON VEHICLE:
VIN:
SEATING POSITION:
USE BY OTHERS, OR IN ANOTHER SEATING POSITION, OR IN ANOTHER VEHICLE

COULD REDUCE SEAT BELT RESTRAINT IN AN ACCIDENT AND RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Page 2 of 7
Front Seat FRONT SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION
Belt Extender
Applications MODEL TYPE ’01 ’00 ’99
RAV4 – R–5 R–5 R–5
ECHO – K–5 K–5 –
TMMC PRODUCTION
NUMMI PRODUCTION
PRIUS – N–7 – –
MR2 SPYDER – N–6 N–6 –
LIFTBACK & COUPE N–6 N–6
CELICA N–6
CONVERTIBLE – –
TMC PRODUCTION
TMMK PRODUCTION
COUPE Q–4
CAMRY SOLARA Q–4 Q–4
CONVERTIBLE –
AVALON* – T–1 T–1 Q–2
SIENNA – Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
TACOMA* – S–2 S–1 S–1
4RUNNER – K–5 K–5 K–5
LAND CRUISER – K–5 K–5 K–5
SEQUOIA – Q–4 – –
TUNDRA* – Q–4 Q–4 –
HIGHLANDER – R–5 – –
* The extender must not be used for the center seat of Avalon, Tacoma, and Tundra which have bench seats.
Page 3 of 7
Rear Seat REAR SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION

Belt Extender
Applications MODEL TYPE ’01 ’00 ’99
W/TOKAI RIKA R–5 R–5*1 R–5*1
RAV4
W/QSS – Q–4*2 Q–4*2
ECHO – R–5 R–5 –
COROLLA
PRIUS – N–7 – –
CELICA CONVERTIBLE (RH) N–1
– –
CONVERTIBLE (LH) N–5
TMC PRODUCTION
TMMK PRODUCTION
COUPE Q–4
CAMRY SOLARA Q–4 Q–4
CONVERTIBLE –
AVALON – T–1 T–1 Q–2
SIENNA – Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
4RUNNER – R–5 R–5 R–5
LAND CRUISER – K–5 K–5 K–5
REAR SEAT #1 T–1
SEQUOIA – –
REAR SEAT #2 Q–4
TUNDRA ACCESS CAB Q–4 Q–4 –
HIGHLANDER – R–5 – –
*1 This seat belt was supplied by TOKAI

RIKA. Make sure that the I/D mark on
the back side of the seat belt buckle
is the same as shown.
*2 This seat belt was supplied by QSS.

Make sure that the I/D mark on the
back side of the seat belt buckle is
the same as shown.
NOTE:
The seat belt extender must not be
used for the center rear seat belt.
Page 4 of 7
Part Number PART NUMBER PREFIX: 73399–
Information
LENGTH
SERIES
R–5 –16060 –16070 –16080 –16090 –16100
N–1 –12060 –12070 –12080 –12090 –12100
N–5 –20110 –20120 –20130 –20140 –20150
N–6 –20160 –20170 –20180 –20190 –20200
N–7 –47010 –47020 –47030 –47040 –47050
K–5 –35010 –35020 –35030 –35040 –25050
A–2 –01060* –01070 –01080 –01090 –01100
Q–2 –06010 –06020 –06030 –06040 –06050
Q–4 –0W010 –0W020 –0W030 –0W040 –0W050
S–1 –04010 –04020 –04030 –04040 –04050
S–2 –04060 –04070 –04080 –04090 –04100
T–1 –01110 –01120 –01130 –01140 –01150
* Length: 7-1/4”
Page 5 of 7
Owner Failure to follow the recommendations indicated below could result in reduced
Instructions effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle collision, causing
personal injury.

a. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
b. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was provided.
c. When the Seat Belt Extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
personalized Seat Belt Extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.
Toyota dealer.
CAUTION:
When using the Seat Belt Extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in reduced effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in
case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.
S Never use the Seat Belt Extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt
without it.

the buckle-release buttons of the

into the buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
the buckle-release button on the
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 6 of 7
CAUTIONS:
S To minimize the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident, the Seat Belt Extender must only be used:
1 By the person for whom it was provided.
2 In the seat position for which it was provided.
S When the Seat Belt Extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic locking retractor),
make sure the retractor is locked when extender belt is in use.

ADDRESS ADDRESS

1. Place the seat in the position the applicant normally uses.
2. With the applicant in the seat, wearing the thickest coat expected to be worn, pull belt all the way out
and try to buckle belt.
S If belt latches into buckle and feels comfortable against upper chest area, an extender is not needed.
S If belt does not buckle, continue with Step 3.
S If buckle latches but belt has no slack remaining, continue with Step 3.
3. Measure distance between applicant’s navel and seat belt buckle (Dimension A) and enter on Worksheet.
4. With belt all the way out, measure distance between latch tip and buckle tip (Dimension B) and enter
on Worksheet.
NOTE: If belt latches but there is no slack enter zero as Dimension B.
5. Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A and record number in Check Number box on Worksheet.
6. Seat Belt Extender length is Dimension B rounded up to next extender length (without exceeding
Check Number).
NOTE: If extender length exceeds Check Number, an extender cannot be provided to the customer.
Navel Latch
A
Buckle Buckle B


S The same Seat Belt Extender can be used for right and left seating applications. Each Seat Belt
Extender will have a label identifying the owner, VIN and seating position. Seat Belt Extenders are
available only in black.
S Applicant’s Signature: Date:
Page 7 of 7
TSB
BODY
Title:
BO003-97
WIND NOISE REPAIR KIT
Models:
All Models
February 21, 1997
Introduction A kit containing special foam sponge material has been developed. This kit, when used
in conjunction with procedures outlined in the Wind Noise Service Information book
(P/N 00401–42978), specific Service Tips and Technical Service Bulletins, should enable
effective wind noise repairs.
Affected D All Models

Vehicles
Parts PART NUMBER PART NAME SIZE (MM) QTY

Information
08231–00810 Kit, Wind Noise ––– 1
08231–00811 * Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 1 297 x 150 (T = 3.0) 2
08231–00812 * Caulking Sponge Sealant No .2 297 x 150 (T = 5.0) 2
* All of these parts are included in the kit.
Kit 1. Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 1, No. 2

Components and No. 3 (Ept–sealer). With adhesive tape
2. Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 4 and

No. 5 (Ept–sealer). This sheet is With adhesive tape
divided into 27 strips, 5 mm wide.
3. Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 6

With adhesive tape
(Ept–sealer).
Page 1 of 1
BODY
BO005–99
Title:
CAMRY CENTER CONSOLE LATCH
Technical Service IMPROVEMENTS
BULLETIN Models:
March 26, 1999 ’97–’99 Camry
Introduction The center console compartment door has been changed to improve the durability of the
console box latch.
Affected S 1997 – 1999 Camrys produced before VIN:

Vehicles
4T1BG ** K * XU414881 (L4)
4T1BF ** K * XU076659 (V6)
4T1BG ** K * XU867323 (L4)
4T1BF ** K * XU930092 (V6)
Parts PREVIOUS PART # CURRENT PART # PART NAME

Information
58910–AA010–XX 58910–AA011–XX Console Box Assembly
58905–AA010–XX 58905–AA011–XX Console Compartment Door
Repair S On vehicles produced before the production change, replace the Rear Console Box
Procedure with P/N 58910–AA011–XX. Refer to Repair Manual, page BO–72 for detailed repair
procedures.
NOTE:
On vehicles produced after the production change, replace the console compartment
door only. These vehicles can be identified by a metal hinge on the console
compartment door.

Information
743641 R & R Rear Console Box Assembly 0.3 58910–AA010–XX 54 12
743931 R & R Rear Console Compartment Door 0.2 58905–AA010–XX 54 12
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Toyota Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.

BODY
BO007–99
Title:
TMMK CAMRY/SIENNA HEADLIGHT
Technical Service ALIGNMENT
BULLETIN Models:
April 16, 1999 ’97–’99 Camry, ’98–’99 Sienna
Introduction To enhance headlamp performance on dark roads, the headlamp alignment process has
been modified.
Affected S 1997–1999 TMMK Camrys produced before the following VINs:

Vehicles
Camry (4–Cyl) 4T1BG2 * K * XU453367
Camry (V–6) 4T1BF2 * K * XU079094
Camry (4–Cyl) 4T1BG2 * K * XU877828
Camry (V–6) 4T1BF2 * K * XU930732
S 1998–1999 Siennas produced before the following VIN:

Sienna 4T3ZF13C * XU119213
Required Headlight Aiming Device.

Tools and
Material
Repair Refer to the ’98 Camry Repair Manual

Procedure page BE–27. Adjust the headlight
nominal line 1’’ higher. State and Federal
New Nominal
standards apply.
cutline 1’’ up
NOTE:
Vehicle lighting will remain within the
tolerances of all applicable federal and
state regulations.

Information

BODY
BO008–96
AUGUST 9, 1996
ALL MODELS
STAINS ON RAPGARD APPLIED AREAS Page 1 of 1
On some Toyota models, when Rapgard is removed from the vehicle, a stain is left on the paint
surface. This stain can be seen under the clear coat and is not a defect of the clear coat. The
stain corresponds to a wrinkled area of Rapgard which retained liquids, such as window washer
fluid, that left a discoloration.
Stain
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
To remove a stain from a vehicle, heat the stain surface to a temperature of 70_C – 80_C.
When the stain is removed it will not reappear.
Equipment –
1. Infrared lamp or dryer to heat the surface.
2. Aluminum foil or a damp cloth to protect plastic parts from deformation.
Procedure –
1. Apply aluminum foil to adjoining plastic parts or cool with damp cloth periodically.
2. Use an infrared lamp or dryer on the stain developed area and heat for 5 to 10 minutes
at 70_C – 80_C.
3. After heating for 5 minutes, check whether the stain has disappeared. If the stain still
remains, reheat the area and check again.
NOTE: Take care that the body’s paint surface temperature does not become too high.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:

Remove stains from paint surface 53301–XXXXX 61 99
BD6004 0.6
caused by Rapguard
BODY
BO009–00
Title:
LOOSE CENTER HVAC VENT
Technical Service ADJUSTMENT
BULLETIN Models:
April 28, 2000 ’98 – ’99 CBU Camry
TSB Revision Notice:

The information updated in this TSB is red and underlined.
Introduction A repair procedure has been made available to remedy customer complaints regarding
loose vertical adjustment of the center vents on 1998 – 1999 CBU Camry.
Applicable S 1998 through 1999 model year Japan built Camry.
Vehicles
Production MODEL/PLANT STARTING VIN
Change
JT2BG2*K*X0339018
Information 2000 MY Japan Built Camry
JT2BF2*K*X0200364
Parts PART NUMBER PART NUMBER QUANTITY
Information
90202–05129 Washer 2
Repair 1. Remove the left vent barrel by gently

Vent Duct Center Vent Assembly
Procedure prying using a wide flat tool with
smooth edges. Be careful not to
damage the vent assembly.
2. Install a washer (P/N 90202–05129)
Install Washer (P/N 90202–05129)
on the shaft inside the vent duct. on Shaft Inside Vent Duct
3. Reinstall the vent barrel by carefully
Vent Barrel
pushing it into position until it locks
onto the shafts on the sides of the
duct. Be sure the spacer and/or
washer do not fall down into the vent Install
duct. Spacer
Here
NOTE:
Spacer
The spacer (P/N 55682–12140) can be (P/N 55682–12140)
ordered, if lost.
4. Confirm that the vent vertical
adjustment is tighter and moves
smoothly. Side View of Vent Barrel
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the right
center vent.
Information
BD0025 Remove & Reinstall Vent Barrels 0.2 55660–33080–XX 40 14

BODY
BO010–96
NOVEMBER 22, 1986
CAM
1997 CAMRY DOOR MIRROR INSTALLATION Page 1 of 2
The following procedures explain in detail how to install the 1997 Camry Door Mirrors.
CAUTION: Should the door mirror be installed incorrectly, a wind noise (air leakage noise)
might be generated.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES:
1. Remove the retaining clip and tweeter (if

applicable) from the door. Discard the
removed clip.
Clip Tweeter
2. In order to secure the door mirror to the

correct position, insert the 2 pins of the
door mirror base into the holes of the
door.
Pins
3. Push the door mirror against the door Molding Lip

and check that the door mirror base
Mirror Base
edge is in contact with the door frame
molding lip.
NOTE: This area is critical to wind noise

reduction.
1997 CAMRY DOOR MIRROR INSTALLATION Page 2 of 2
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES (Cont’d):
4. Tighten the three mirror mounting nuts A , B

and C for vehicles without a tweeter. C
B
Torque: 5.5 N.m (56 kgf.cm, 49 in.lbf) A
Connect the mirror wire.
5. Tighten the two mirror mounting nuts A and

B for vehicles with a tweeter.
B
Torque: 5.5 N.m (56 kgf.cm, 49 in.lbf) A
While lightly pulling the mirror wire

backward, install the tweeter and tighten
nut C. C
Torque: 5.5 N.m (56 kgf.cm, 49 in.lbf)
NOTE: Check that the mirror wire is free

from the tweeter bracket.
6. Check the following items: Molding Lip

Mirror Base
D There is no clearance between the door
mirror base and the door molding lip.
D The door frame molding lip is not tucked
under the mirror base.
7. Install the front door lower frame bracket

garnish.
Garnish
8. Install the black cap onto the nut.
Cap
BODY
BO010-02
Title:
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TOP STRAP
Technical Service BRACKET INSTALLATION
BULLETIN Models:
May 24, 2002 ’83 – ’00 All Models
Introduction Child restraint seat top strap bracket installation procedures are provided to supplement
the Owner’s Manual. Beginning with 2001 models, the top strap brackets are factory
installed.
NOTE:
S The child restraint seat top strap assembly is not available as a service part.
Contact the child restraint seat manufacturer for recommended top strap information,
top strap to child restraint seat installation instructions, and top strap retailers.
S The top strap brackets can only be installed on vehicles that have nuts welded in
place by the factory. The locations of these nuts can be found in the Owner’s Manual
(for most 1983 and newer models.) Toyota does not recommend modifying vehicles
that do not have nuts welded in place by the factory. Some Land Cruiser and RAV4
vehicles, prior to 2001 model year, may not have these nuts welded in by the factory.
Top Strap
Top Strap Bracket
Applicable S 1983 – 2000 model year vehicles, all models.

Vehicles
Parts PART NUMBER PART NAME

Information
73709–12010 Bracket Sub–Assembly (Bracket, Bolt, 10 mm Spacer, and Washers)
CRS Kit (two Bolts [15 mm, 30 mm],
04731–22012
three Spacers [5 mm, 10 mm, 15 mm], and Locking Clip)

Information

CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TOP STRAP BRACKET INSTALLATION – BO010-02 May 24, 2002
Installation Child Restraint Seat Top Strap Bracket Installation

Procedure
Obtain the exact year and vehicle model Toyota Owner’s Manual before beginning
installation.
1. Confirm with the customer which seat Bolt Anchor
location(s) they will be installing the Bracket
child restraint seat. The Owner’s 345 mm
Spacer
Manual seat section provides an (13.6 in.)
illustration showing available top strap
bracket location(s). The illustration
page in the Owner’s Manual is
100 mm
provided in pages 4–9 of this bulletin. (4.0 in.)
NOTE:
Determine which kit parts are needed 185 mm
for each specific child seat location, by (7.3 in.)
referring to pages 4–9 of this bulletin. Example of 1999 Camry Showing Three (3)
Available Bracket Locations
2. Remove a 20 mm diameter area of

the carpet or trim material above the
bracket mounting location. In some
vehicles, a 20 mm circle is already
pre–cut into the interior trim material.
Once the interior trim material is
removed, the nuts welded in by the
factory should be visible.
Example of Pre–Cut Circle in Package Tray Finisher
3. If a 5 mm or 15 mm spacer is
specified, remove the red lock washer
from the Bracket Sub–Assembly
Bolt
(P/N 73709–12010) and remove the
10 mm spacer. Assure the red lock
washer is re–installed onto the bolt.
If a 5 mm spacer is needed, use the Wave Washer
15 mm bolt from the CRS Kit
(P/N 04731–22012). Bracket
Nylon Washer
Spacer
(5/10/15 mm)
Red Lock Washer
Page 2 of 9
Installation 4. Install the bracket assembly,

Procedure according to the directions in the Top Strap Installed Bracket
(Continued) Owner’s Manual. Tighten the bolt to Assembly
Installed
16.5 – 24.7 N–m, (1.68 – 2.52 kgf–m,
12.2 – 18.2 ft–lbf).
S Assure the top strap is attached Body
to the child seat, according to the
child seat manufacturer’s
Nut Welded
instructions. in Place
S Assure the child seat is installed
in the vehicle according to the
Toyota Owner’s Manual (seat
section).
Installation Owner’s Manual Installation Reference Information

Reference
The following pages of this bulletin contain a reference information chart. This chart
Information contains:
S Owner’s Manual page(s) that provide the illustration showing available top strap
bracket location(s). The information goes back to 1983 model year. 2001 models
and newer already had the bracket installed by the factory.
S Installation notes, such as bracket spacer sizes for each specific child seat location.
EXAMPLE:
This cell contains information on the 2000 4Runner
OWNER’S
4Runner
MANUAL Refer to this page in the Owner’s Manual to find the illustration showing
pg 73 available top strap bracket locations.
2000
a Installation Note. In this case, all bracket positions on the 2000 4Runner
will require a 15 mm spacer.
INSTALLATION NOTE COMMENT

a Spacer – 15 mm for all anchors
b Spacer – 10 mm for outer, 15 mm for center
c Spacer – 15 mm for outer, 10 mm for center
d Spacer – 5 mm for all anchors
e Spacer – 15 mm for outer, none for center
f Spacer – 15 mm for center, none for outer
g No Spacer
h Spacer – 10 mm for all anchors
i Bolt for All–Trac/4WD only (Part No. 91511–60814) (Celica & Previa)
NP Spacer pictured but no specifications
N/A Top strap anchor bracket mounting not available
Standard No installation necessary, anchor already installed by factory
Page 3 of 9
Installation OWNER’S Camry Camry Camry Camry Celica All Celica

4Runner Avalon
Reference MANUAL Sedan Liftback Solara Wagon Trac 4WD Coupe
Information
pg 73
(Continued) 2000 Standard Standard Standard
a
pg 71 pg 72 pg 71–73 pg 68 pg 49
1999
a a a a a
pg 53 pg 70 pg 68–69 pg 48
1998
a a a a
pg 52 pg 52 pg 56–57 pg 45
1997
a a a a
pg 45 pg 40 pg 47 pg 48 pg 37
1996
NP a a a a
pg 31 pg 39 pg 44–45 pg 45 pg 36
1995
g a a a a
pg 29 pg 41–42 pg 42 pg 31
1994
g a a a
pg
pg 26 pg 33 pg 30 pg 29
1993 33–34
g a i, g a
a
pg 26 pg 27 pg 30 pg 29
1992
g a i, g a
pg 27 pg 29 pg 29 pg 29–30 pg 29
1991
g c g i, g a
pg 27 pg 29 pg 29 pg 29–30 pg 29
1990
g c g i, g a
pg
pg 32 pg 33 pg 29–30 pg 31
1989 31–33
c g i, g a
g
pg
pg 32 pg 32 pg 16 pg 16
1988 19–20
b g i, g a
g
pg 18 pg 15 pg 16 pg 13
1987
g b g a
pg 17 pg 13 pg 14 pg 12
1986
g e f a
pg 16 pg 13 pg 13 pg 12
1985
g e f a
pg
pg 13 pg 13 pg 12
1984 15–16
e f a
g
pg 12–13 pg 13 pg 11–12
1983
e f a
Page 4 of 9
Installation Corolla
Reference Corolla Corolla Corolla
OWNER’S Celica Corolla Corolla Corolla RWD
FWD FWD 4WD
Information MANUAL Liftback Coupe FX/FX16 Hardtop 2–Door
Sedan Liftback Wagon
Coupe
(Continued)
2000 Standard Standard
pg 49 pg 67
1999
a a
pg
pg 65
1998 49–50
a
a
pg
pg 61
1997 46–47
h
a
pg
pg 49
1996 37–38
h
a
pg
pg 43
1995 37–38
h
a
pg 32 pg 39
1994
a h
pg 30 pg 32–33
1993
g h
pg 30 pg 34 pg 34
1992
g h g
pg
pg 44 pg 45 pg 45
1991 29–30
h g a
g
pg
pg 44–45 pg 46 pg 45
1990 29–30
h g a
g
pg 31 pg 40 pg 41–42 pg 41
1989
g h g a
pg 16 pg 21–22 pg 22 pg 26
1988
g h a f
pg 13 pg 13–14 pg 14 pg 12
1987
g a f h
pg 13 pg 12 pg 12 pg 12
1986
g a f h
pg 13 pg 13 pg 14 pg 12
1985
g a f h
pg 12 pg 12–13 pg 13 pg 12
1984
g a f h
pg 12 pg 10 pg 11 pg 11 pg 10
1983
g a g g h
Page 5 of 9
Installation Corolla
Reference Paseo
OWNER’S RWD Corolla Cressida Land
Cressida Echo MR2 Coupe &
Information MANUAL 3–Door Wagon Wagon Cruiser
Convert.
Coupe
(Continued)
2000 Standard N/A
pg 63
1999 N/A
a
pg 61
1998 N/A
a
pg 55
1997 N/A
a
pg 49–50 pg 40
1996 N/A
h h
pg 44 pg 38 pg 37
1995 N/A
h a h
pg 40 pg 33 pg 33
1994 N/A
h a h
pg 33 pg 31 pg 31
1993 N/A
h a h
pg 35 pg 29 pg 31 pg 27
1992 N/A
h c a h
pg 46 pg 29 pg 31
1991 N/A
h c a
pg 46–47 pg 30
1990 N/A
g c
pg 42 pg 34 pg 28
1989 N/A
a c a
pg 23 pg 30 pg 12
1988 N/A
h h a
pg 13 pg 21 pg 21 pg 11
1987 N/A
g h g a
pg 12 pg 16 pg 16 pg 11
1986 N/A
g h g a
pg 11 pg 15–16 pg 16 pg 11
1985 N/A
g h g a
pg 11 pg 15 pg 15
1984 N/A
g g g
pg 11 pg 15 pg 15
1983 N/A
g g g
Page 6 of 9
Installation OWNER’S T100 Ext. T100 Ext.

Previa RAV4 RAV EV Sienna Starlet Supra
Reference MANUAL Cab 2WD Cab 4WD
Information
pg 99
(Continued) 2000 N/A Standard
a
pg 96
1999 N/A N/A
a
pg 74 pg 49
1998 N/A N/A N/A
a d
pg 60 pg 49
1997 N/A N/A N/A
a d
pg
pg 36
1996 47–48 N/A N/A N/A
d
a
pg
pg 36–37
1995 46–47 N/A N/A
d
a
pg
pg 32–33
1994 41–42
d
a
pg
pg 32–33
1993 41–42
d
a
pg
pg 32
1992 37–38
h
i
pg
pg 33
1991 33–34
h
i
pg 31
1990
h
pg 31
1989
h
pg 32
1988
h
pg 15
1987
h
pg 13–14
1986
g
pg 13
1985
g
pg 9 pg 12
1984
g g
pg 9 pg 11
1983
g g
Page 7 of 9
Installation OWNER’S T100 Reg T100 Reg Tercel Tercel 4WD Tercel All
Tacoma Tercel 3/5 Tercel 4WD
Reference MANUAL Cab 4WD Cab 2WD 2 Door Wagon Models
Information
(Continued) 2000 N/A
1999 N/A
1998 N/A N/A N/A
1997 N/A N/A N/A
1996 N/A N/A N/A
1995 N/A N/A N/A
1994 N/A N/A
1993 N/A N/A
1992
1991
pg 31 pg 31
1990
a h
pg 30–31 pg 30
1989
a h
pg 18 pg 17
1988
a, d h
pg 12 pg 12
1987
g g
pg 12 pg 12
1986
g g
pg 11–13
1985
g
pg 11
1984
g
pg 11
1983
g
Page 8 of 9
Installation OWNER’S Tercel Sedan/

Tercel Wagon Truck 2x4 Truck 4x4 Tundra Van
Reference MANUAL Coupe
Information
(Continued) 2000 Standard
pg 60
1999
h
pg 59
1998
h
pg 54
1997
h
pg 41
1996
h
pg 38
1995
h
pg 39 pg 32 pg 32
1994
h g g
pg 35 pg 27 pg 27
1993
h g g
pg 29 pg 27 pg 27
1992
h g g
pg 28 pg 26 pg 26
1991
h g g
pg 26 pg 26
1990
g g
pg 29 pg 29 pg 37
1989
g g a
pg 13 pg 19 pg 23
1988
g g a
pg 12 pg 11 pg 14 pg 18 pg 21
1987
g g g g a
pg 12 pg 12 pg 13 pg 17 pg 20
1986
g g g g a
pg 12 pg 15 pg 17
1985
g g a
pg 12 pg 12 pg 17
1984
g g a
1983 N/A N/A
Page 9 of 9
BODY
BO011–01
Title:
NEW SEAT BELT TONGUE PLATE
Technical Service STOPPER SERVICE PARTS
BULLETIN Models:
March 23, 2001 All Applicable Models
Introduction A new service part for the seat belt tongue plate stopper has been introduced.
Installation procedures are provided to supplement the Repair Manual.
Applicable MODEL YEAR

Vehicles
Avalon 1995 – 2001
Camry 1983 – 2001
Corolla 1980 – 2001
Camry Solara 1999 – 2001
Sienna (Front Seat Belt Only) 1998 – 2001
RAV4 1997 – 2001
4Runner 1992 – 2001
Land Cruiser 1991 – 2001
Tundra 2000 – 2001
Tacoma 1997 – 2000
ECHO 2000 – 2001
Celica 1980 – 2001
Prius 2001
Tercel 1981 – 1999

Information
N/A 73219–02010 Stopper, Tongue Plate (Black)*
N/A 73219–02020 Stopper, Tongue Plate (Gray)*
N/A 73219–02030 Stopper, Tongue Plate (Beige)*
* Use a stopper color that is closest to the seat belt webbing color.

Information
BD0047 Install Seat Belt Tongue Plate Stopper 0.1 73219–020#0 62 12
This repair is covered under the Toyota Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is
in effect for 36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s
in–service date.

NEW SEAT BELT TONGUE PLATE STOPPER SERVICE PARTS – BO011–01 March 23, 2001
Installation 1. Preparation Tape

Procedure A. Shift the Tongue Plate to the Tongue
Plate
upper portion of the Tongue Plate
Stopper, and temporarily hold it
with a clip or tape.
B. Remove any pieces of the original
Tongue Plate Stopper in the
Example of
webbing, with a pair of pliers. Broken Tongue
Plate Stopper
CAUTION:
Damaged or weakened seat belts may
break in an accident and injure the
occupant. The seat belt assembly must
be replaced if:
S The webbing is cut, frayed, worn, or
damaged.
S It has been used in a severe impact.
Inspect the entire length of webbing
for damage and replace the assembly
if needed. Be careful not to damage
the webbing during repair.
2. Install the New Tongue Plate Stopper

A. Install a new Tongue Plate
Stopper in the hole of the
webbing.
NOTE: Tongue Plate

Stopper
Be aware of the installation direction
of the Tongue Plate Stopper as shown
in the illustration.
B. Pinch the Tongue Plate Stopper

into the webbing using an
adjustable wrench, and turn and
push the adjustment screw by
hand.
HINT: Webbing
Press the adjustment screw in order to
position the male and female parts of
the Tongue Plate Stopper parallel to
each other, as shown in illustration.
CAUTION:
DO NOT use pliers. They may damage
the webbing.
Page 2 of 3
NEW SEAT BELT TONGUE PLATE STOPPER SERVICE PARTS – BO011–01 March 23, 2001
Installation C. When the adjustment screw for

Procedure the adjustable wrench can’t be
(Continued) turned by hand, tighten the
adjustment screw using a pair of
adjustable joint pliers until the
space between jaws of the
adjustable wrench is 4.5 – 5.0 mm.
(See illustrations.)
4.5 – 5.0 mm
D. Check to be sure that the male

CORRECT
pin of the Tongue Plate Stopper
has become deformed evenly in
the hole of the female part and is
firmly held to the belt webbing.
(See illustrations.)
INCORRECT
Page 3 of 3
BODY
BO012–99
Title:
DOOR GLASS DISPLACEMENT FIELD FIX
BULLETIN ’98 – ’99 TMMK Camry

September 3, 1999
Introduction On some 1998 and 1999 Camry Vehicles, the door glass may be displaced from the front
door glass run if the door is closed forcefully with the windows partially down. A field fix
has been developed in order to remedy this condition.
Applicable S 1998 – 1999 TMMK Camrys built before 4T1BG * * K * XU553205

Vehicles
4T1BF * * K * XU084313
4T1BG * * K * XU903993
4T1BF * * K * XU932180

Information
N/A 67212–AA010 Self–Adhesive Stopper
Warranty OP CODE COMBO DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
R&R Door Trim/Install Rubber Stopper
670301 A 0.5 67402–AA011 53 57
– Both Sides

DOOR GLASS DISPLACEMENT FIELD FIX – BO012–99 September 3, 1999
Repair Refer to 1998 Camry Repair Manual (Vol. 2) Pages BO–11–14.

Procedure
1. Remove the front door trim to gain access to the window components.
2. Inspect the front and rear lower frames and the door glass run for damage as a result
of the glass being displaced.
S In cases of slight deformation of window frames, reform as necessary.
If significantly deformed or damaged, replace the frame.
S Replace the window run if cut, torn, mutilated, etc.
3. Replace any damaged parts.
4. Remove front lower frame from the door and attach the self–adhesive rubber stopper
(P/N 67212–AA010) 120 mm from the top of the frame as shown below.
NOTE:
To insure proper adhesion of the self–adhesive rubber stopper, the surface of the
frame must be cleaned to remove any foreign material.
5. Reinstall the front lower frame, door glass run, and door trim.
Stopper
67212–AA010
(50 x 12 x 4.76 mm)
(double sided tape)
120 mm
Page 2 of 2
BODY
BO015–00
Title:
DOOR MIRROR INSTALLATION
BULLETIN ’97 – ’00 Japan Built Camry

March 24, 2000
Introduction The procedures in this bulletin explain in detail how to install the door mirrors.
CAUTION:
If the door mirror is installed incorrectly, a wind noise (air leakage noise) might be
generated.
Applicable S 1997 – 2000 model year Japan built Camry

Vehicles

Information
Installation 1. Remove the retaining clip and

Procedure Clip
speaker (if applicable) from the door.
Discard the removed clip.
Speaker
2. In order to secure the door mirror in

the correct position, insert the 2 pins
of the door mirror base into the holes
of the door.
Pins
3. Push the door mirror against the door Molding Lip

and check that the door mirror base Mirror Base
edge is in contact with the door frame
molding lip.
NOTE:
This area is critical to wind noise
reduction.

DOOR MIRROR INSTALLATION – BO015-00 March 24, 2000
Installation 4. For vehicles without a speaker, Mounting

Procedure tighten the three mirror mounting nuts. Nuts
(Continued)
Torque: 5.5 NSm (56 kgfScm, 49 inSlbf)
5. For vehicles with a speaker, tighten Mounting

the two mirror mounting nuts. Nuts

Speaker
While lightly pulling the mirror wire INCORRECT CORRECT

backward, reinstall the door speaker (one
nut at the lower bracket) onto the door as
shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
S Do NOT mount the upper speaker
bracket behind the nut.
6. Check the following items: Mounting Lip

S There is no clearance between Mirror Base
the door mirror base and the door
molding lip.
S The mirror wire is free from the
speaker bracket.
S The door frame molding lip is not
tucked under the mirror base.
S The speaker wire does not
contact the mirror mounting
screw. Speaker Cover Garnish
S Make sure the power mirror
adjustment and the door speaker
functions properly.
7. Install the front door lower frame
bracket garnish/speaker cover.
8. Install the black cap onto the nut.
Cap
Page 2 of 2
BODY
BO017-01
Title:
POWER SEAT MOTOR CABLE REPAIR TIP
BULLETIN ’99 – ’00 Camry & Solara, ’99 – ’01 Sienna

May 25, 2001
TSB REVISION NOTICE:

June 25, 2003: The Parts Information table has been updated.
The previous TSB should be discarded.
Introduction A field fix has been developed to repair loose power seat motor cables (instead of seat
adjuster replacement). Loose cables can cause seat movement feel or no movement of
seat adjustment.
Applicable S 1999 – 2000 model year Camry and Solara vehicles.

Vehicles
S 1999 – 2001 model year Sienna vehicles.
Parts 3M PART NUMBER PART NAME QUANTITY

Information
3M 36596 3M EPS–300 Thin–Wall 1 Per Seat Motor
Required TOOLS & MATERIALS QUANTITY

Tools &
Heat Gun 1
Material

Information
72020–06020 (Solara)
R & R Seat Assembly;
BD1017 0.5 72020–AA011 (Camry 95 15
Install Shrink Sleeves
72020–08010 (Sienna)
This repair is covered under the Toyota Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in
effect for 36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s
in-service date.

POWER SEAT MOTOR CABLE REPAIR TIP – BO017-01 Revised May 25, 2001
Repair 1. Remove the seat assembly from the

Procedure vehicle.
Turn the seat over and detach motors
from the mounting brackets.
NOTE:
The lower seat cushion must be
removed from the seat frame to access
the motor mounting screws on some
models.
2. Remove the drive cable from the motor gear boxes. Slide a shrink wrap tube
(3/4” diameter x 1.75”, 3M P/N 36596) on each end of the flex shaft, as shown in
the illustration.
S The Camry and Sienna will require six (6) shrink tubes.
S The Solara will require only one (1) shrink tube.
Front
Camry/Sienna Solara
3. Attach the drive cables to the motors and reinstall motors to the motor mounts.
4. Position each shrink wrap tube so that it overlaps the drive cable housing and motor
housing or gear box housing, as necessary.
5. Using a heat gun, apply heat to the
shrink tubes in a direction from the
center of the drive cable toward the Heat Gun
gear box or motor housing. Be sure to
apply just enough heat to shrink the
tubing.
6. Reinstall the seat cushion to the seat
frame. Tighten the mounting screws to
torque specifications listed in the BO
section of the Repair Manual. Shrink Tube
7. Reinstall the seat assembly to the

floor of the vehicle. Assure all
connectors are secure and the power
seat adjustments properly function.
Torque: 37 NSm, 380 kgfScm, 27 ftSlbs
Page 2 of 2
BODY
BO017-03
Title:
TRIM GARNISH LOOSE
BULLETIN All Models

September 9, 2003

March 3, 2004: The TSB has been changed to include new inspection and
replacement instructions.
Previous versions of this TSB should be discarded.
Introduction Customers may experience an interior trim panel either loose or fitting poorly due to a
deformed or missing panel attachment clips. When a trim garnish (A, B, C or D pillar
garnish, door trim panel, etc.) is removed and reinstalled using the old clips, there is a
possibility that the garnish may exhibit a loose condition. To prevent this condition from
occurring, please use the following procedures.
Inspection/ All Models – All trim panel attachment clips must be inspected prior to reassembly and
Replacement replaced if any damage or wear is detected. If no damage is visible, the clip may be
Procedure reused. Always check to make sure that the garnish is properly attached after
reinstallation of all interior trim panels.
2002 – 2004 model year Camry and 2004 model year Solara – When removing the
A–pillar garnish panels, replace the white plastic attachment clips (P/N 90467–A0025).
Applicable S All models.

Vehicles
Warranty OP CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OFP T1 T2

Information

BODY
BO017–99
Title:
DOOR GLASS DISPLACEMENT

November 26, 1999
Introduction On some 1998 and 1999 Camry vehicles, the door glass may be displaced from the front
door glass run if the door is closed forcefully with the window partially down. A field fix
has been developed to remedy this condition.
Applicable S 1998 – 1999 TMMK Camrys vehicles produced prior to VINs listed below.
Vehicles
Production MODEL STARTING VIN

Change
4T1BG**K*XU602813
Information
4T1BF**K*XU088877
1999 TMMK produced Camry
4T1BG**K*XU917744
4T1BF**K*XU933406
NOTE:
Refer to 1998 Camry Repair Manual (Vol. 2) BO–Section for Door Panel Removal and
Window Regulator Servicing information.

Information
BD9008 R&R Door Trim / Modify Hole (both sides) 0.5 67402–AA011 53 57

DOOR GLASS DISPLACEMENT – BO017–99 November 26, 1999
Repair 1. Lower the door glass, disconnect the power window switch, remove the front door
Procedure trim panel, speaker, and loosen the door mirror mounts to gain access to the door
glass and lower frames. Remove the front lower frame (2 screws).
2. Locate the lower window frame mounting hole on the door (see illlustration). Place a
towel or shop rag in the speaker hole to catch metal chips. Using a round file or die
grinder, enlarge the hole 2 mm toward the speaker (rear of the vehicle). Remove the
towel or shop rag and any metal chips in the door. Apply touch–up paint or rust
preventative to the hole.
2 mm → ←
3. Install a rubber stopper to the lower window frame according to directions in TSB
BO012–99.
4. Install the lower window frame. Assure the frame is tight against the glass and the
run is fully inserted in the lower window frame channel.
5. Temporarily connect the power window switch and operate the window. Check to
assure the door glass fully opens and closes easily.
6. Reinstall the door panel and components, check lock/unlock function and door
opening handle function.
Page 2 of 2
BODY
BO019–99
Title:
DOOR MIRROR WIND NOISE
BULLETIN ’97 – ’99 Camry

December 3, 1999
Introduction Wind/road noise heard around the door mirrors of some Japan produced Camry vehicles
may be caused by an improperly positioned mirror wire harness grommet and/or harness
connector.
Applicable S 1997 through 1999 Camry vehicles. (Japan produced only)

Vehicles
Production PLANT STARTING VIN

Change
Information JT2BG22K * X0367325
JT2BG28K * X0367352
TMC
JT2BF22K * X0227381
JT2BF28K * X0227306

Information
Adjust the Wire Harness Grommet
BD9006 0.4 87910–33150 59 57
and/or Connector (both sides)
Repair 1. Carefully pry off the door speaker

Procedure cover and remove the nut using a 10
Connector
mm socket that secures the speaker
and Grommet
to the door.
2. Look through the door mirror harness
access hole and check the position of
the wire harness grommet and wire
Mirror Housing
harness connector – the harness
connector should be inside the
grommet and the grommet should be
Connector Grommet
fully seated in the mirror housing.
CORRECT POSITION

DOOR MIRROR WIND NOISE – BO019–99 December 3, 1999
INCORRECT POSITION A INCORRECT POSITION B INCORRECT POSITION C
Mirror Housing Mirror Housing

Mirror Housing
Grommet Grommet Grommet

Connector
Connector
Connector
Repair 3. To reposition the grommet and/or

Procedure harness connector onto the mirror Rear View Mirror Outside Door
housing: Mirror
S Remove the mirror housing (3

nuts) from the door and carefully
unclip the mirror from the housing.
This will allow easier access and Mirror Housing
reinstallation of the grommet Connector
and/or harness connector.

S Reposition the grommet so it is
fully seated to the mirror housing. Grommet
Assure the harness connector is
CORRECT POSITION
inside the grommet.
NOTE:
Refer to the 1998 Camry Repair Manual
pages BO–23 through BO–26.
4. Reinstall the door mirror and speaker Outside Rear

assembly: View Mirror
S Secure the mirror to the housing. Cover
S Properly align and reinstall the

mirror assembly to the door.
tighten the three nuts. Torque:
5.5 NSm (56 KgfScm, 49 inSlb)
S Reinstall the door speaker (one
nut) and speaker cover onto the Door Trim
door. 5.5 (55, 49, ftSlbf)
S Assure the power mirror NSm (kgfScm, ftSlbf) : Specified Torque

functions properly.
Page 2 of 2
BODY
BO020–98
Title:
1999 TOYOTA SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
BULLETIN All ’95 through ’99 model years

July 3, 1998



Extender

file.
Procedure and Flow Chart...................... Page 2
Application Chart and Notes.................. Page 3
Part Number Information........................ Page 5
Owner Instructions.................................. Page 6
Affected S All Toyota models, 1995 through 1999 model years.

Vehicles

Information

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: ’95 – ’99 – BO020–98 July 3, 1998

Network.
PARTS DEALER OWNER

DEALER
SUPPLY

COMPLETE
LABEL AND
ADVISE
OWNER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN
CUSTOMER
RECORDS
EXTENDER FLOW CHART
Sample Seat
Belt Extender
CAUTION
Label
Driver Passenger Front Rear
Page 2 of 7

Extender MODEL TYPE ’99 ’98 ’97 ’96 ’95
Applications
RAV4 K–5 N/A
R 5
R–5 R 5
R–5 R 5
R–5
TERCEL R–5 R–5
RH EXCEPT CONVERTIBLE R–3*1
R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5
PASEO LH EXCEPT CONVERTIBLE R–3
CONVERTIBLE RH & LH N–6 N–6 N–6 N/A N/A
SDN & WGN..JPP W/TR *2 R–5 R–3
N/A N/A N/A
COROLLA SDN & WGN..JPP W/QSS *3
Q–4 Q–2
NAP (NUMMI, TMMC) Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
MR2 N/A N/A N/A N/A R–3
CELICA N–6 N–6 N–6 N–6 R–3
TOKAI RIKA *2 R–3
JPP *3
CAMRY QSS
Q–4 Q–4 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2
NAP
SUPRA N/A R–3 R–3 R–3 R–3
AVALON *4 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2
PREVIA N/A N/A R–5 R–3 R–3
SIENNA Q–4 Q–4 N/A N/A N/A
TACOMA *4 S–1 S–1 Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
JPP..TOKAI RIKA *2 R–1
COMPACT REGULAR *3
JPP..QSS
TRUCK CAB N/A N/A N/A N/A Q–1
(PICKUP) *4 NAP
XTRACAB (ALL) R–1
T100 *4 (ALL) R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5
4RUNNER 4 DOOR K–5 K–5 K–5 K–1 K–1
LAND CRUISER K–5 R–3 R–3 R–3 R–3
*1 If dimension “L” (length when in use) is under 24

inches the extender must not be used due to its
design and construction (illustration).
L
Extender
Lap Belt
Page 3 of 7

Extender MODEL TYPE ’99 ’98 ’97 ’96 ’95
Applications *2
TOKAI RIKA R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5
RAV4 *3 N/A
QSS Q–4 Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
TOKAI RIKA *2 R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5
TERCEL *3
QSS Q–4 Q–4 Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
RH.. CONVERTIBLE N–3 N–3*5 N–1
N/A N/A
PASEO LH.. CONVERTIBLE N–6 N–6*5 N–5
RH & LH ..COUPE R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5 R–3
SDN & WGN..JPP W/TR *2 R–5 R–3
N/A N/A N/A
SDN ..JPP W/QSS *3
COROLLA Q–4 Q–2
NAP (TMMC) Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
NAP (NUMMI) T–1 T–1 A–2 A–2 A–2
LIFTBACK & COUPE N–6 N–6 N–6 N–6 N–3
CELICA RH ..CONVERTIBLE N–1 N–1 N–1 N–1 N–1
LH ..CONVERTIBLE N–5 N–5 N–5 N–5 N–5
TOKAI RIKA *2 N/A N/A N/A R–3 R–3
JPP *3
QSS
Q–4 Q–4 Q–4
CAMRY SDN Q–2 Q–2
NAP COUPE & WAGON N/A
N/A N/A
SOLARA Q–4 N/A N/A
AVALON *4 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2 Q–2
SUPRA N/A R–3 R–3
R–3 R–3
PREVIA N/A N/A R–5
SIENNA Q–4 Q–4 N/A N/A N/A
TACOMA *4 XTRACAB A–2 A–2 K–3 K–3 K–3
PICKUP *4 XTRACAB N/A N/A N/A N/A R–1
T100 *4 XTRACAB N/A K–4 K–4 K–4 K–4
4RUNNER R–5 R–5 R–5 R–5 R–1
LAND CRUISER K–5 K–5 K–4 K–4 K–4

Make sure that the identification mark on the back
side of the seat belt buckle is the same as shown.

that the identification mark on the back side of the
seat belt buckle is the same as shown.
Page 4 of 7
Rear Seat Belt *4 Extenders must not be used for center front seat belt positions for Avalon, Tacoma, Compact Pickup and
Extender T100 models with bench seats or for the center rear seat belt positions, except for the 1997 – 1999
Applications Camry.
(Continued)
*5 For 1998 model year through November 1997 production of Paseo convertibles, use N–1 for RH and N–5
for LH. For 1998 Paseo convertible models from December 1997 production, use N–3 and N–6.

Information LENGTH
SERIES
R–1 –12010 –12020 –12030 –12040 –12050
R–2 –12160 –12170 –12180 –12190 –12200
R–3 –50010 –50020 –50030 –50040 –50050
R–4 –16010 –16020 –16030 –16040 –16050
R–5 –16060 –16070 –16080 –16090 –16100
N–1 –12060 –12070 –12080 –12090 –12100
N–3 –20011 –20021 –20031 –20041 –20051
N–4 –20060 –20070 –20080 –20090 –20100
N–5 –20110 –20120 –20130 –20140 –20150
N–6 –20160 –20170 –20180 –20190 –20200
K–1 –12110 –12120 –12130 –12140 –12150
K–2 –22010 –22020 –22030 –22040 –22050
K–3 –22060 –22070 –22080 –22090 –22100
K–4 –33010 –33020 –33030 –33040 –33050
K–5 –35010 –35020 –35030 –35040 –35050
A–1 –02010 –02020 –02030 –02040 –02050
A–2 –01060*6 –01070 –01080 –01090 –01100
Q–1 –02060 –02070 –02080 –02090 –02100
Q–2 –06010 –06020 –06030 –06040 –06050
Q–3 –0W010 –0W020 –0W030 –0W040 –0W050
Q–4 –0W010 –0W020 –0W030 –0W040 –0W050
S–1 –04010 –04020 –04030 –04040 –04050
T–1 –01110 –01120 –01130 –01140 –01150
*6 Length: 7 1/4”
Page 5 of 7
The seat belt extender must not be used:
A. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
B. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was provided.
C. When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
Toyota dealer.
CAUTION:
S Never use the seat belt extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt
without it.


into the buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 6 of 7

CAUTION:
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
less effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of
personal injury.

ADDRESS ADDRESS

belt
worksheet
customer
A Navel
B Latch
Buckle Buckle


Page 7 of 7
BODY
BO020–00
Title:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER

August 11, 2000



Extender

file.
Procedure and Sample Label.................Page 2
Application Charts .................................Page 3–4
Part Number Information........................Page 5
Owner Instructions..................................Page 6
Applicable S 1999 through 2001 model year Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles

Information

SEAT BELT EXTENDER: ’99 – ’01 MODEL YEAR – BO020–00 August 11, 2000

Network.
PARTS DEALER OWNER

DEALER
SUPPLY

COMPLETE
LABEL AND
ADVISE
OWNER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN
CUSTOMER
RECORDS
Sample Seat
Belt Extender
CAUTION
Customer
Information
Label
Page 2 of 7

Applications
RAV4 — R–5 R–5 R–5
ECHO — K–5 5–5 —
TMMC PRODUCTION
NUMMI PRODUCTION
PRIUS — N–7 — —
MR2 SPYDER — N–6 N–6 —
LIFTBACK & COUPE N–6 N–6
CELICA N–6
CONVERTIBLE — —
TMC PRODUCTION
TMMK PRODUCTION
CAMRY COUPE Q–4
Q–4 Q–4
SOLARA COVERTIBLE —
AVALON *1 — T–1 T–1 Q–2
TACOMA *1 — S–2 S–1 S–1
4RUNNER — K–5 K–5 K–5
SEQUIOA — Q–4 — —
TUNDRA *1 — Q–4 Q–4 —
*1 The extender must not be used for the center seat belt of Avalon, Tacoma and Tundra which have bench
seats.
Page 3 of 7

Applications
W/TOKAI RIKA R–5 R–5*1 R–5*1
RAV4
W/QSS — Q–4*2 Q–4*2
ECHO — R–5 R–5 —
COROLLA
PRIUS — N–7 — —
CELICA CONVERTIBLE (RH) N–1
— —
CONVERTIBLE (LH) N–5
TMC PRODUCTION
TMMK PRODUCTION
CAMRY COUPE Q–4
Q–4 Q–4
SOLARA CONVERTIBLE —
AVALON — T–1 T–1 Q–2
4RUNNER — R–5 R–5 R–5
SEQUOIA REAR SEAT #1 T–1
— —
SEQUOIA REAR SEAT #2 Q–4
TUNDRA ACCESS CAB Q–4 Q–4 —

Make sure that the I/D mark on the back side of
the seat belt buckle is the same as shown.

that the I/D mark on the back side of the seat belt
buckle is the same as shown.
NOTE:
The seat belt extender must not be
used for the center rear seat belt.
Page 4 of 7

Information LENGTH
SERIES
R–5 –16060 –16070 –16080 –16090 –16100
N–1 –12060 –12070 –12080 –12090 –12100
N–5 –20110 –20120 –20130 –20140 –20150
N–6 –20160 –20170 –20180 –20190 –20200
N–7 –47010 –47020 –47030 –47040 –47050
K–5 –35010 –35020 –35030 –35040 –35050
A–2 –01060*1 –01070 –01080 –01090 –01100
Q–2 –06010 –06020 –06030 –06040 –06050
Q–4 –0W010 –0W020 –0W030 –0W040 –0W050
S–1 –04010 –04020 –04030 –04040 –04050
T–1 –01110 –01120 –01130 –01140 –01150
*1 Length: 7 1/4”
Page 5 of 7
a. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
b. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was
provided.
c. When the Seat Belt Extender is provided for rear seat positions (with
automatic locking retractor), make sure the retractor is locked when in use.
Toyota dealer.
CAUTION:
S Never use the Seat Belt Extender if you can comfortably fasten the seat belt
without it.


into the buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
When not in use, remove the extender and
store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 6 of 7

CAUTION:

ADDRESS ADDRESS

belt
worksheet
customer
Latch
Navel
Buckle
A B
Buckle


Page 7 of 7
BODY
BO020-01
Title:
SLIDING ROOF DIAGNOSTIC TIPS

August 17, 2001
Introduction The 1997 – 2001 model year TMMK Camry sliding roof assembly components are now
available as service parts. Additional diagnostic and repair information has been
developed to supplement the Repair Manual and to provide service tips for the sliding
roof components.
Applicable 1997 – 2001 model year Camry vehicles built in the US (TMMK).
Vehicles
MODEL/PLANT STARTING VIN
Camry (TMMK) All VINs Begin with “4”

Information
Parts REF PART NUMBER PART NAME QTY

Information
1 63201–AA010–83 Glass Sub–Assy, Sliding Roof 1
2 63202–AA010 Rail Sub–Assy, Slide Roof 1
3 63209–AA010 Panel Sub–Assy, Roof Wind Deflector 1
4 63214–AA010 Channel, Roof Drip, RR 1
5 63217–AA010 Garnish, Sliding Roof Side, RH 1
6 63218–AA010 Garnish, Sliding Roof Side, LH 1
7 63221–AA010 Guide, Roof Channel, RH 1
8 63222–AA010 Guide, Roof Channel, LH 1
9 63223–AA010 Cable, Sliding Roof Drive, RH 1
10 63224–AA010 Cable, Sliding Roof Drive, LH 1
11 63225–AA010 Spring, Roof Wind Deflector, RH 1
12 63226–AA010 Spring, Roof Wind Deflector, LH 1
13 63227–AA010 Arm, Sliding Roof Lift, RH 1
14 63228–AA010 Arm, Sliding Roof Lift, LH 1
15 63241–AA010 Bracket, Sliding Roof Housing Fr. Mtg., RH 2
16 63245–AA010 Bracket, Sliding Roof Housing Fr. Mtg., LH 2
17 63251–AA010 Weatherstrip, Sliding Roof 1
18 63260–AA010 Gear Assy, Sliding Roof Drive (Not Illustrated) 1

SLIDING ROOF DIAGNOSTIC TIPS – BO020-01 August 17, 2001
Parts REF PART NUMBER PART NAME QTY

Information
(Continued) 19 63287–AA010 Cap, Sliding Roof Housing Drain End, RH 1
20 63288–AA010 Cap, Sliding Roof Housing Drain End, LH 1
21 63306–AA010–A1/B1/G1 Trim Sub–Assy, Sliding Shade 1
22 90080–11209 Bolt, With Washer 8
23 90084–14004 Screw, Hex Lobular 2
24 90084–15005 Screw, With Washer 4
25 90084–16013 Screw, Hex Lobular Tapping (Long) 2
26 90084–16014 Screw, Hex Lobular Tapping (Short) (Not Illustrated) 2
27 90084–26003 Rivet 6
28 90084–53003 Fastener, Hook 3
29 90159–60545 Screw, With Washer Tapping (Ground Wire) 1
30 90179–06069 Nut 6
24
17
25
6
11
4
13 12
7
8 14
10
21
23
Page 2 of 7
Parts
Information
(Continued)
27
19
2
28
15 20
16
22
29
30
Repair CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE COMMON REPAIR

Procedure
Guide pin mis–adjusted Re–adjust guide pin
Mechanism unlatched Re–adjust guide pin
Damaged drive gear
Replace drive gear assembly
assembly
Glass Won’t Tilt Damaged cable assembly Replace cable assembly
Other damaged part Replace damaged part
Rubber bumper comes off Replace lift arm assembly
Remove foreign material and re–adjust
Foreign material
guide pin
Damaged drive gear
assembly
Glass Won’t Close Damaged cable assembly Replace cable assembly
Foreign material
guide pin
Page 3 of 7
Repair CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE COMMON REPAIR

Procedure
(Continued)
Damaged drive gear
assembly
Glass Won’t Open
p Damaged cable assembly Replace cable assembly
Foreign material
guide pin
Damaged drive gear
assembly
Glass J
Gl Jammed/d/ Damaged cable assembly Replace cable assembly
Binding/Seized
Foreign material
guide pin
Damaged drive gear
assembly
Abnormal Noise Damaged garnish Replace garnish
Damaged roof drip
Replace roof drip channel guide
channel guide
Opening trim molding Adjust trim position. See Service Tip on
installed incorrectly page 7 of this bulletin.
Bent sunshade Replace sunshade
Damaged or bent center
Sunshade Difficult Straighten or replace center reinforcement
reinforcement
to Move
Damaged or bent rear
Straighten or replace rear reinforcement
reinforcement
Damaged or bent roof drip
Straighten or replace drip channel
channel
Page 4 of 7
Service Tips H The recommended sliding roof removal and disassembly procedure is provided in the
2001 Camry Repair Manual, pages BO–62 through BO–65. Take time to read the
procedure before disassembling the sliding roof assembly.
H When the system is diagnosed and the failed part is identified, the failed part can be
removed by following the disassembly procedure in the 2001 Camry Repair Manual
pages BO–66 through BO–67. Adjustment information is available on pages BO–68
and BO–69.
H Electrical diagnosis information can be found:
2001 Camry Repair Manual, pages BE–89 through BE–92.
2001 Camry Electrical Wiring Diagram, pages 168 through 170.
The following service tips are not provided in the Repair Manuals:
Drain Tube Function

To clear clogs in the drain tubes,
insert a long speedometer cable.
A long speedometer cable can be
inserted into each drain, to
determine if the drain tubes are
exiting to the ground instead of
inside the vehicle.
Do NOT blast air down the tube
because this can cause the drain
tube to become disconnected
from the sliding roof.
Guide Pin Adjustment

Adjustments are noted in the
2001 Camry Repair Manual, Move Forward
0.6 mm +/– 0.2 mm
page BO–69.
In addition, when the guide pin
roller moves up and down, the Lift
Arm should be able to move Down
forward–backward a distance of
0.6 mm +/– 0.2 mm.
Page 5 of 7
Service Tips Rear Drain Cap Installation

(Continued)
The Repair Manual recommends
applying Seal Packing P/N
08826–00090 for installation of
the drain cap. Since this product
is not available through the parts
department, the recommended
product is:
3M Windo–Weld Sealer – Black
(3M Part Number 08606)
Moon Roof Opening Trim Removal

The opening trim has three
integrated snaps.
First remove the front section in a
perpendicular motion, then
remove the other sections.
Glass Panel Removal

If the screws (4 screws, Torx
Screw Driver) cannot be reached,
move the sliding roof forward by
turning the motor drive shaft with
a hex wrench.
Assure the glass panel is adjusted
according to the specifications in
the 2001 Camry Repair Manual
page BO–62.
Page 6 of 7
Service Tips Glass Panel Adjustment

(Continued)
1. Glass Panel Closed, Skewed in the
Lift Arm Assembly
Opening
Tilt the glass panel
From the outside of the vehicle, Guide Pin
loosen the guide pin.

Move the guide pin rearward in
small increments, until glass
closes evenly and exhibits no
popping sound. Tighten the pin.
Slide Rail
Cycle the sliding roof to verify
proper adjustment.
2. Glass Panel Tilts Down but Does Not

Retract
Tilt the glass panel
From the outside of the vehicle,
loosen the guide pin.
Move the pin forward in small
increments, until the glass retracts
quietly. Tighten the pin.
Cycle the sliding roof to verify
proper adjustment.
Sunshade Difficult to Move

Confirm the opening trim molding
is attached to the headliner so it
does not contact the sunshade.
Opening Trim Molding
If the trim is pushed up, it will rub Sunshade
against the sunshade and cause
the sunshade to drag.
WRONG CORRECT
Headliner
Page 7 of 7
BODY
BO020–99
Title:
SEAT COVER LOOSENESS
BULLETIN ’99 Camry & Sienna

December 17, 1999
Introduction On some 1999 Camry front seats and Sienna captain seats, the seat bottom cover may
become loose at the front lower J–clip. To correct this condition a change has been
made to the way the seat cover is fastened to the seat bottom.
Applicable S 1999 Camry & Sienna vehicles produced within the following VIN ranges.
Vehicles
MODEL/PLANT BETWEEN VIN
Camry (Plant 1) BG * XU575466 – BF * XU578340 / BF * XU085983 – BF * XU086274

Camry (Plant 2) BG * XU908651 – BG * XU910853 / BF * XU932462 – BF * XU932748
Sienna XU167107 – XU168859
NOTE:
When working with sheet metal wear Kevlar Gloves to protect your hands.
Camry
Information
Re–attach
Re attach Lower Portion of 71071–xxxxx–xx
711041 A&B 11
1.1 62 14
Front Seat Cover (RH & LH) 71072–xxxxx–xx
Sienna
OP CODE COMBO DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2
Re attach Lower Portion of

Re–attach 71071–xxxxx–xx
711041 A&B 06
0.6 62 14
Captain Seat Cover (RH & LH) 71074–xxxxx–xx

SEAT COVER LOOSENESS – BO020–99 December 17, 1999
Repair 1. For easier repair remove the complete

Procedure seat assembly.
J–Clip/Rail
Seat Cover
2. If necessary, remove the manual seat
adjuster handle.
Locking Tabs
Seat Bottom
3. Bend the locking tabs down.

4. Completely disengage the J–clip from
the seat adjuster frame (front area
only).
5. Using a screwdriver, bend the frame

Up
J–clip retention clips to the front. Seat Adjuster Frame
(Approximately 1.5 mm)
Front J–clip
NOTE:
Original Condition: Retention clips are
bent to the rear.
NOTE:
With a screwdriver, bend all 5 retention
clips 1.5 mm forward.
1.5 mm
Page 2 of 3
SEAT COVER LOOSENESS – BO020–99 December 17, 1999
Repair 6. Reassemble the seat cushion.

Procedure
(Continued)
7. Bend the locking tabs over the

Locking Tabs
cushion.
8. After reinstallation of the seat and
manual seat adjuster handle
(if removed), check the seat cushion
retention and seat operation
(sit on seat and push cushion down).
9. Tighten the seat mounting screws to
the torque specifications in the Repair
Manual.
Page 3 of 3
BODY
BO021–99
Title:
SUNROOF OPERATION

December 17, 1999
Introduction Some 1997 – 1999 TMMK Camry vehicles may experience an interruption in sunroof
operation (not opening or closing). Changes have been made to the roof drip channel
guides to improve operation. The guides were modified to increase the clearance
between the sun shade and opening flange by 2 mm. A radius was added to eliminate
the sharp corners of the guides.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 TMMK Camry vehicles built before the production change.
Vehicles
Production MODEL PLANT STARTING VIN

Change
Plant 1 4T1BG*XU543595/BF*XU083791
Information Camry (TMMK)
Plant 2 4T1BG*XU901534/BF*XU932010

Information
63222–AA010 Roof Drip Channel Guide – LH
Same
63221–AA010 Roof Drip Channel Guide – RH
Warranty OPCODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
614141 R & R Drip Channel Guide, Both RH and LH 2.0 63222–AA010 53 83

SUNROOF OPERATION – BO021–99 December 17, 1999
Repair Remove the Roof Drip Channel Guides (left & right) and replace with the current parts.
Procedure
RH Lift Arm and Cable Assembly

Roof Drip Channell
RH Roof Drip Channel Guide
LH Roof Drip Channel Guide
LH Lift Arm and Cable Assembly
Drive Rail Assembly
Page 2 of 2
BODY
BO025-01
Title:
SUNVISOR VANITY MIRROR
Technical Service IMPROVEMENT
BULLETIN Models:
October 12, 2001 ’97 – ’01 NAP Camry
Introduction Production changes have been implemented on the 1997 – 2001 model year NAP Camry
vanity mirror assembly to improve strength and durability of the mirror cover hinge.
Mirror Cover Hinge
Applicable S 1997 – 2001 model year NAP Camry vehicles.

Vehicles

Change
Information 4T1B#2#K#1U045764 (Line 1)
2001 Camry
4T1B#2#K#1U798163 (Line 2)

Information
74310–AA095–A0/B0/G0 74310–AA096–A0/B0/G0 Right Sunvisor Assembly
74320–AA055–A0/B0/G0 74320–AA056–A0/B0/G0 Left Sunvisor Assembly
Repair Replace damaged sunvisor with a service part.

Procedure

Information
74310–AA095–##
752101 R & R RH and/or LH Sunvisor Assembly 0.2 or 62 16
74320–AA055–##
in-service date.

BODY
BO026-01
Title:
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET
BULLETIN All Applicable Avalon, Camry, Corolla,

October 19, 2001 Previa & Sienna
Introduction To assist customers in preventing particle buildup and preserve the appearance of the
shoulder belt anchor, the following procedure has been developed.
Applicable S 1996 – 1999 model year Avalon vehicles.

Vehicles
S 1996 – 2001 model year Camry vehicles.
S 1993 – 2001 model year Corolla vehicles.
S 1996 – 1997 model year Previa vehicles.
S 1998 – 2001 model year Sienna *1 vehicles.
*1 Except rear seat belt.
Parts CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME

Information
73205–48011 Tape Set, Shoulder Belt Anchor
NOTE:
The above tape set contains the fluorocarbon resin tape (2 pieces) and Velcro tape (1 piece).

Information
73210–#####–##*1
BD1011 Clean the Shoulder Belt Anchor 0.3 61 99
73220–#####–##*1
*1 OPN should be part number of whichever belt assembly that the procedure is performed on.
in-service date.

SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET – BO026-01 October 19, 2001
Installation 1. CLEAN SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR

Procedure
NOTE:
S Do not install the tape when the
vehicle temperature is below the
freezing point.
S Do not re–use removed fluorocarbon
resin tape.
A. Pull out the seat belt about 300

mm and attach a clip as shown in
the illustration.
HINT:
Preventing the seat belt from retraction
with a clip will make the following
work easier.
B. Put the Velcro tape (in the parts

kit) through the hole of the
shoulder belt anchor,
brush–shaped side to the anchor.
C. Pull both ends of the Velcro tape

with your hand and shave off the
dirt on the shoulder belt anchor by
moving the Velcro tape several
times as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Remove the dirt completely. Otherwise,
the fluorocarbon resin tape may not
adhere properly.
Page 2 of 4
Installation 2. INSTALL FLUOROCARBON RESIN

Procedure TAPE
(Continued)
A. Place the fluorocarbon resin tape
onto the seat belt as shown in the
illustration.
NOTE:
Before installation of the fluorocarbon
resin tape, it is necessary to pre–release
the colored film about 5 mm for each
side. (Not fully released.)
B. By pulling up the seat belt, put the

fluorocarbon resin tape through
the hole of the shoulder belt
anchor. Match the shoulder belt
anchor to the center of the tape.
C. Remove the upper side colored

film from the fluorocarbon resin
tape, and securely affix the tape
to the outside of the shoulder belt
anchor.
D. Remove the lower side colored

film from the fluorocarbon resin
tape, and securely affix the tape
to the outside of the shoulder belt
anchor.
NOTE:
S Be sure to affix the fluorocarbon
tape securely along all edges.
S Pay attention not to make any
wrinkles or slack in the fluorocarbon
resin tape.
E. Remove the clip.
Page 3 of 4
Installation F. By pulling the seat belt up and

Procedure down several times, as shown in
(Continued) the illustration, securely affix the
fluorocarbon resin tape and
confirm the smoothness of the
belt movement.
NOTE:
Affix the fluorocarbon resin tape on
the shoulder belt anchor to the other
side following the same procedure.
NOTE:
If the seat belt requires cleaning to
remove dirt, only use a neutral
detergent or lukewarm water to clean.
Use the seat belt after it is completely
dried, to confirm proper operation.
Page 4 of 4
BODY
BO028-00
Title:
LEAKS INTO TRUNK
BULLETIN ’97 - ’01 Camry (U.S.), ’98 - ’01 Sienna,

November 3, 2000 ’99 - ’01 Solara & ’01 Avalon
Introduction A field fix is available for incidents of moisture and odors permeating into the vehicle.
The Quarter Panel Air Duct flaps may have become loose or missing. Replacing the
Quarter Panel Air Duct will remedy the condition.
Applicable S 1997 – 2001 model year Camry (U.S. produced)
Vehicles S 1998 – 2001 model year Sienna
S 1999 – 2001 model year Solara
S 2001 model year Avalon
Change
4T1BG22K81U019710
Information 2001 MY Camry, 4 cylinder
4T1BG22KB1U768622
4T1BF28K11U116208
2001 MY Camry, 6 cylinder
4T1BF22K51U958204
2001 MY Sienna 4T3ZF13C#1U335575
2001 MY Solara 2T1CF22P#1C435983
2001 MY Solara Convertible 2T1FF28P#1C435448
2001 MY Avalon 4T1BF28B11U123532

Information
62940-AA010 62940-AA011 Quarter Panel Air Duct
Repair Replace the Quarter Panel Air Duct.

Procedure

Information
BD0036 R & R Quarter Panel Air Duct 1.0 62940-AA010 62 57
36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in-service date.

BODY
BO030-01
Title:
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE
Technical Service MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
BULLETIN Models:
December 7, 2001 All Models
Introduction The following procedures are recommended to maintain windshield wiper blade
performance.

Vehicles

Information
Maintenance, Recommendations for Windshield Wiper Maintenance, Cleaning and Use:

Cleaning
and Use 1. Scheduled Maintenance
S Check wiper rubber blades every 4 – 6 months or 7,500 miles for wear, cracking
and contamination.
S Clean glass and rubber wiper blades if blades are not clearing glass adequately.
If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements.
2. Cleaning Procedure
S Wiper Rubber: Bugs, dirt, sap and road grime on blades will cause streaking.
Clean wiper rubber of road and environmental debris using cloth or paper towel
soaked with windshield washer fluid or mild detergent.
S DO NOT USE fuel, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean rubber wiper
blades.
S Windshield: Bugs, road grime, sap and car wash wax treatments decrease wiper
performance.
S Rinse windshield with water and apply non–abrasive cleaner, such as Bon–Ami
(www.faultless.com), with a sponge.
NOTE:
Make sure to use plenty of water with all powder based cleaners so the glass is
not scratched.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING – BO030-01 December 7, 2001
Maintenance, 3. Contributors to Poor Performance/Decreased Rubber Blade Life (require rubber

Cleaning replacement)
and Use
(Continued) S Dusty areas cause the rubber edge to wear quickly.
S Sand and salt used for road conditioning during winter causes the edge to wear
quickly, so areas with significant snowfall require more frequent wiper
replacement.
S Heat and time cause the rubber to become excessively “permanent set,” so the
rubber does not turn over, resulting in streaking and/or unwiped areas on the
glass.
S Rubber is easily cut or torn while using ice scrapers on the glass.
S Rubber can be torn when pulling blades off a frozen windshield.
S Using wipers instead of an ice scraper to remove frost and ice from the windshield
during a car warm up can dull, nick, or tear the rubber.
S Banging wiper on the glass to remove ice & snow can cause the blade to bend
and rubber to come out of the blade providing the potential to scratch the glass.
S Ice forms in wiper blade pin joints, which causes streaking and unwiped areas. To
remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber with your hand to
loosen the frozen joints. To prevent this condition, use winter blades with a rubber
cover.
Page 2 of 2
BRAKES
BK91-001
MARCH 15, 1991
ALL MODELS
BRAKE DISC ANTI–RUST COVER REMOVAL Page 1 of 2
During the removal of the Anti–Rust Covers, do not use screwdrivers or other sharp objects. The
use of such tools may result in the scratching of the outer rotor surface.
Step–by–step instructions for removing the Anti–Rust Covers are provided on the following page.
TOYOTA MOTOR SALES U.S.A., INC.

Printed on Recycled Paper.
BRAKE DISC ANTI–RUST COVER REMOVAL (CONT’D) Page 2 of 2
RECOMMENDED REMOVAL PROCEDURE:

Turn the right front wheel to full right lock.
Unhook the Anti–Rust Cover from the disc brake dust cover, then pull the center of the Anti–Rust
Cover toward the wheel. This separates the Anti–Rust Cover from the disc brake dust cover (see
illustration below).
Pull the center of the Anti–Rust Cover by hand towards you to break the thin portion of cover.
Remove the Anti–Rust Cover along the arch of the wheel disc by shaking it up and down. If the
cover is torn while removing, check to see that no parts of the cover are left inside.
Turn the steering wheel to full left lock and perform the same steps on the left front wheel. If
applicable, also remove the Anti–Rust Covers on the rear brakes.
Indicate on the new car inspection sheet that the Anti–Rust Covers have been removed.
BRAKES
BR001–99
Title:
FRONT BRAKE NOISE
BULLETIN ’97–’99 V–6 Camry and ’98–’99 Avalon

April 23, 1999
Introduction New Front Brake Pad Kits are available to reduce front brake groan or grinding noise on
1997–1999 V6 Camry and 1998–1999 Avalon.
Affected S 1997–1999 V6 Camrys built before VINs 4T1BF2 * K * XU078781 (NAP – Plant 1)
Vehicles
4T1BF2 * K * XU930650 (NAP – Plant 2)
JT2BF2 * K * X0179640 (TMC)
S 1998–1999 Avalons built before VIN 4T1BF18B * XU310454

Information
04465–33121 Front Brake Pads
04945–33040 Shim Kit (If Needed*)
* Visually inspect Shims for heat discoloration. If discolored, replace shims.
Repair 1. Surface the disc rotors with the “On–Car Brake Lathe” to within serviceable limits.
Procedure
2. If the rotors are unserviceable or below minimum thickness, replace the rotors.
3. Check any new disc rotors for runout.
4. If the disc rotor runout is over 0.03 mm (0.00012 in), perform a phase matching
procedure.
5. Replace the front brake pads.
6. Road test.

Information
Grind Front Discs and Replace Pads, Shims
36 99
(if needed) for Squeak (both sides)
473025 A 2.1 04465–33121 21 99
(if needed) for Vibration (both sides)
91 99
(if needed) for Groan/Grinding (both sides)

BRAKES
BR94–002
FEBRUARY 7, 1994
ALL MODELS
BRAKE VIBRATION AND/OR PULSATION Page 1 of 6

This TSB outlines the causes of brake vibration and pulsation, as well as the best corrective
measures to use.
CONTENTS
1) Symptoms of brake vibration and pulsation
2) Cause of vibration/pulsation problems
3) Advantages of using an on–car brake lathe
4) Rotor replacement and off–car brake lathe procedure
1) SYMPTOMS OF BRAKE VIBRATION AND PULSATION

Brake vibration problems generally involve one or both of two phenomena: body vibration and/
or pedal pulsation.
A. BRAKE VIBRATION
Applying brakes causes vibration to occur in the instrument panel, steering column, steering
wheel, and/or body of the vehicle (See Figure 1 below).
Figure 1

B. PEDAL PULSATION
Applying brakes causes the brake pedal to pulsate. This brake pulsation sometimes
causes the steering wheel to oscillate when the brakes are applied (See Figure 2 below).
Figure 2
2) CAUSE OF VIBRATION/PULSATION PROBLEMS
Brake rotor thickness variation causes brake vibration due to changes in the braking force as
thick/thin portions of the rotor pass the pads. Brake rotor thickness variation can be measured
with a micrometer as shown in Figure 3 below.
10 mm
Divide Into
8 Equal Parts & Measure
at each location
Thickness Variation = Maximum – Minimum

Figure 3
BR002–94
There are two factors which cause excessive rotor thickness variation:
A. ROTOR RUNOUT
– Rotor runout can be caused by poor mating of flanges between the hub and rotor when
assembled as a unit. Manufacturing tolerance stack–up of the rotor and hub may also
cause excessive rotor assembly runout (See Figure 4 below).
– If there is rotor runout, a portion of the rotor comes into contact with the brake pad on
each rotor revolution. If left like this, the portion of the rotor that contacts the brake pad
becomes worn, creating thickness variation.
Thickness Variation = A – B
B
Runout Figure 4
B. EXCESSIVE RUST OR CORROSION ON ROTOR SURFACE
– Driving in areas where salt is applied to road surfaces for winter conditions can cause
rust and corrosion when the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time. This occurs
on the area where the brake pads are not in contact with the rotor.
– When a vehicle is driven with rusted rotors, the area with corrosion wears at a
different rate than the non–corroded areas, resulting in excessive thickness variation.
BR002–94
3) Advantages Of Using An On–Car Brake Lathe
Toyota Motor Corporation Engineers strongly recommend that an on–car brake lathe be used
for repairing brake vibration and pulsation. This method improves rotor and hub combined
runout, and is the preferred method when compared to rotor replacement and off–the–car rotor
machining.
A. Technical Advantage of Caliper Mounted Brake Lathe
– Installing the brake lathe in the same position as the caliper results in minimal runout
relative to the caliper.
– Eliminating this runout minimizes the pad grinding on the rotor and reduces rotor
thickness variation.
B. Practical Use Benefits
– Resurfacing rotors on vehicles with rotor/hub assemblies can be performed easily.
– Vehicles with corrosion between hub and rotor flanges can be machined without
removing rotor from hub.
4) Rotor Replacement And Off–Car Brake Lathe Procedures
If an on–car brake lathe is not available at your dealership, it may be necessary to use an off–car
lathe or replace rotors. In order to ensure proper brake vibration and pulsation repairs, pay close
attention to the following precautions:
A. Off–Car Brake Lathe Precautions
– Perform routine maintenance of brake lathe components (clearance of arbor shaft to
adapters may need to be repaired).
– Clean all adapters and shaft to maintain accuracy of equipment.
– When installing rotor to machine, clean mud, rust, and/or foreign material from the
adapters and rotors.
– After installing rotor on machine, check rotor runout using dial indicator. If runout is
excessive, determine the cause and correct it.
– Follow lathe manufacturer repair procedures. Do not cut excessive amounts off rotor
during the first cut to save time.
Anytime a rotor is machined it must be measured for minimum rotor thickness. The
thickness for the rotor is never to be less than minimum thickness as specified in the
appropriate repair manual.
BR002–94
B. Installation of Rotor
– Check wheel bearing pre–load. If excessive movement is found, adjust bearing
pre–load.
– Using a dial indicator, measure the rotor 10 mm from the outside edge
(See Figure 5 below).
Figure 5
BR002–94
C. Phase Match Rotor To Hub

– If rotor runout is at the maximum value or greater, (refer to appropriate repair manual)
index the rotor one lug and measure the runout again. Repeat this process, moving the
rotor one lug each time, until the position is found where the runout is at the minimum and
within the maximum value listed in the appropriate repair manual
Figure 6
– Tighten lug nuts to the specified torque following a star sequence when installing wheel
Note: DO NOT USE AIR IMPACT WRENCH.
Four Holes Five Holes
Figure 7
BR002–94
BRAKES
BR004–99
Title:
REAR BRAKE DRUM NOISE
BULLETIN ’99 Camry – NAP

July 16, 1999
Introduction Rear Brake Drums are available to reduce rear brake drum howling/groaning noise on
NAP built Camrys.
Applicable S 1999 4 cylinder NAP built Camrys built before:

Vehicles
4T1BG2 * K * XU568428 (NAP – Plant 1)
4T1BG2 * K * XU900266 (NAP – Plant 2)

Information
42431–33020 Rear Brake Drum
Repair If the customer encounters a brake groan or howling noise, replace the rear brake drums.
Procedure

Information
472151 A R & R Rear Brake Drum (Both Sides) 1.1 42431–33020 91 99

BRAKES
BR004–00
Title:
BRAKE PAD CLICKING NOISE
BULLETIN ’90 – ’00 All Models

October 20, 2000
Introduction A clicking type noise may be noticed when first applying the brakes after changing
vehicle travel direction (Drive/Forward to Reverse, Reverse to Drive/Forward). This is a
normal noise caused by the required brake pad–to–caliper clearances. When the
direction of travel is changed, the brake pads may “shift” towards the new direction of
travel. When the brake pad contacts the caliper, a clicking noise may be heard.
To minimize this clicking noise, a disc brake caliper grease has been made available for
use during brake service/maintenance operations. Under normal usage conditions this
grease should be effective for a period of 6 months to 1 year.
Applicable S 1990 – 2000 model year Toyota vehicles, all models.

Vehicles

Information
N/A 08887–80609 Disc Brake Caliper Grease (50 g tube)

Information

BRAKE PAD CLICKING NOISE – BR004–00 October 20, 2000
Application There are two types of brake calipers: floating and fixed. Check the type of brake caliper
Procedure installed on the vehicle by removing the wheel assembly.
1. Floating Type Brake Caliper

A. Lift up or remove the brake caliper
and suspend it securely.
HINT:
Do not disconnect the flexible hose
from the brake caliper.
B. If equipped with anti–squeal

spring: Remove the anti–squeal
Torque
springs. Pad Support
Plate
Plates
C. Remove the brake pads with
anti–squeal shims.
D. Remove the pad support plates
from the torque plate. Clean any
dust from the pad support plates,
torque plates and brake pads.
E. Apply a small amount of the Pad Support Plates
disc brake caliper grease
(1–2 mm thick) to both sides
of the pad support plates.
NOTE:
Do NOT apply grease to the friction
surfaces of the brake pads or the
disc rotor.
F. If the pad support plate is fixed to Apply Disc Brake Caliper Grease
the torque plate with adhesive tape,
perform the operation according to
the following flow chart.
Check whether or not the pad support plate

and the torque plate are fixed firmly in place
with adhesive tape.
There is adhesive tape, but

Fixed firmly in place Adhesive tape is peeled off
it is not fixed firmly in place
Without removing the pad Remove the pad support plate, Remove the pad support plate
support plate, apply a small peel off the adhesive tape and and apply a small amount of
amount of grease to the portion apply a small amount of grease to grease to both sides of the
where the pad touches the both sides of the support plate. support plate.
surface of the support plate.
Page 2 of 4
Application G. Apply a small amount of the

Procedure disc brake caliper grease
(Continued) (1–2 mm thick) to the caliper
as indicated in the illustration.
H. Install the brake pads with the
I. If equipped with anti–squeal
spring: Install the anti–squeal
springs.
Apply Disc Brake
J. Press the piston in firmly and Caliper Grease
install the brake caliper.
NOTE:
S Clean excess grease from brake
pad and caliper.
S Do NOT apply grease to the friction
disc rotor.
K. Install the wheel assembly.
2. Fixed Type Brake Caliper Type “A” Type “B”

There are two types of brake pads: Brake Pad Brake Pad
S Type “A”: Has a projection on the Flat Edge

upper and lower side of the brake Projection
pad. (See illustration.)
S Type “B”: Has a flat upper and
lower edge on the brake pad
backing plate.
Type “A” Brake Pad Type “A” Brake Pad

A. Remove the anti–squeal spring,
clip and pad guide pin.
B. Remove the brake pads with the
C. Clean any dust from the brake
pads.
Page 3 of 4
Application D. Apply a small amount of the

Procedure disc brake caliper grease
(Continued) (1–2 mm thick) to the areas
indicated in the illustration.
NOTE:
disc rotor.
E. Install the brake pads with the Apply Disc Brake

Caliper Grease
NOTE:
Clean excess grease from the brake
pads and caliper.
F. Install the pad guide pin, clip and

anti–squeal spring.
G. Install the wheel assembly.
Type “B” Brake Pad Type “B” Brake Pad

A. Remove the clip, pins and
anti–rattle spring/pad retainer clip.
B. Remove the brake pads with the
C. Clean any dust from the brake
pads.
D. Apply a small amount of the

disc brake caliper grease
(1–2 mm thick) to the areas
indicated in the illustration.
NOTE:
disc rotor.
Apply Disc Brake

E. Install the brake pads with the Caliper Grease
NOTE:
Clean excess grease from the brake
pads and caliper.
F. Install the pad guide pin, clip and

anti–squeal spring.
G. Install the wheel assembly.
Page 4 of 4
ENGINE
EG001–00
Title:
SINGLE CYLINDER MISFIRES
BULLETIN ’99 Avalon, Camry, Sienna & Solara (CA Spec.)

January 14, 2000
NOTE:
The information contained in this TSB updates EG013–99 dated December 17, 1999.
Introduction Some 1999 California Emission Specification Avalon, Camry (1MZ–FE), Sienna & Solara
(1MZ–FE) vehicles may exhibit a rough idle, and or a M.I.L. “ON“ condition, in which a
single cylinder misfire code, or codes are present. Changes have been made in the fuel
injector production process to correct this condition.
Applicable S 1999 CA Emission Spec. TMMK produced Avalon, Camry (1MZ–FE), Sienna &
Vehicles TMMC produced Solara (1MZ–FE) vehicles built between the VIN numbers listed
below.
MODEL STARTING VIN ENDING VIN
Avalon 4T1BF1#B*XU298504 4T1BF1#B*XU319557
Camry 4T1BF2#K*XU076403 4T1BF2#K*XU081214
Camry (cont.) 4T1BF2#K*XU930024 4T1BF2#K*XU931330
Sienna 4T3ZF1#C*XU090887 4T3ZF1#C*XU122589
Solara (U.S.) 2T1CF2#P*XC111083 2T1CF2#P*XC757508
Solara (Canada) 2T1CF2#P*XC744113 2T1CF2#P*XC162681
Parts APPLICABLE PARTS QUANTITY PART NAME

Information
23209–0A010 6 Fuel Injector
Warranty OP CODE VWC DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
895221 N R & R Fuel Injector Assembly – All 1.8 23209–0A010 02 56
This repair is covered under the Toyota Federal Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
Coverage is extended to 36 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, in the
states of California, Massachusetts, and Vermont due to state emission warranty
legislation.
NOTE:
Be sure to enter the DTC No. in the Condition/Cause/Remedy section, if a DTC Code
appeared.

SINGLE CYLINDER MISFIRE – EG001-00 January 14, 2000
Repair 1. Remove all six fuel injectors for

Procedure verification of production information.
Affected injectors will be labeled with
Production
a vendor part number of Date
“23250–0A010“ and have a
production date code number of “828“
or lower (see illustration for number
locations).
2. After determining that one or more of
the injectors are affected, replace all
Part Number
six injectors with the above applicable
part number.
3. Clear the DTC, if present, and verify
that the vehicle now operates as
designed.
Page 2 of 2
ENGINE
EG002–00
Title:
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE P1133
BULLETIN ’97 – ’99 Camry: 1MZ–FE CA Spec.

February 25, 2000
TSB Revision Notice:

Introduction Under certain driving conditions, some 1MZ–FE equipped 1997 – 1999 Camry California
Emission specification vehicles can exhibit a M.I.L. “ON” DTC P1133. An improved
Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor has been developed to correct this condition.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 Camry (1MZ–FE) with California Emission Specification.

Vehicles
Production MODEL YEAR ENGINE STARTING VIN

Change
4T1BF2#K * XU088001
Information 1999 Camry 1MZ–FE
4T1BF2#K * XU933227

Information
89467–41020 89467–41021 Sensor, Air/Fuel
Repair S Should a M.I.L. “ON” condition with DTC P1133 be encountered, perform diagnostic
Procedure procedures as described in the Repair Manual.
S If the problem source cannot be identified after checking all affected areas according
to the Repair Manual, the cause may be an Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor malfunction. In this
case, replace the Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor with the current part number listed above.
S If the Exhaust Manifold threads are damaged by removal of the sensor, they can be
repaired by the proper use of a M18 x 1.5 tap.

Information
895131 R & R Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor 0.3 89467–41020 99 99
states of California and Massachusetts due to state emissions warranty legislation.
NOTE:
Please enter the DTC in the condition/Cause/Remedy section when applying for
warranty reimbursement.

ENGINE
EG003-96
OCTOBER 11, 1996
ALL MODELS
UNDERCOATING ON OXYGEN SENSORS Page 1 of 1
During vehicle processing by Dealers, care must be taken to avoid applying undercoating in the
area surrounding the Oxygen Sensors. Application of undercoating on or near the Oxygen Sensors
can cause insufficient air to flow around the sensor, and inaccurate information storage by the ECM.
If this condition occurs, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may illuminate.
Sub Oxygen Sensor
Main Oxygen Sensor

Center Pipe to Muffler
Avoid undercoating this area
Front Pipe to Manifold

ENGINE
EG003-02
Title:
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS
BULLETIN All ’96 – ’02

March 29, 2002

Introduction The On–Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system is designed to monitor the performance of
emission–related components and report any detected abnormalities in the form of
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Since the various components need to be monitored
during different driving conditions, the OBDII system is designed to run separate
monitoring programs called Readiness Monitors. Many state Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs require that vehicles complete their Readiness Monitors
prior to beginning an emissions test.
The current status of the Readiness Monitors can be seen by using the Toyota Diagnostic
Tester with version 9.0 software (or newer), or a generic OBDII Scantool.
To view the Readiness Monitor status using the Toyota Diagnostic Tester, select “Monitor
Status” from the Enhanced OBDII Menu.
A status of “complete” indicates that the necessary conditions have been met to run the
performance tests for the related Readiness Monitor.
The Readiness Monitor will be reset to “incomplete” if:
ECU has lost power (battery or fuse).
DTCs have been cleared.
The conditions for running the Readiness Monitor have not been met.
In the event that any Readiness Monitor shows “incomplete,” follow the appropriate
Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern to change the readiness status to “complete.”
Refer to the Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern Application Table to determine which
drive pattern should be followed.
Contents SECTION PAGE(S)
Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern Application Tables 3–9
Readiness Monitor Drive Patterns
1 EGR Monitor (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine) 10
2 EGR Monitor (For 1FZ–FE Engine) 11
3 Catalyst Monitor (O2S Type) 12
4 Catalyst Monitor (AF Sensor Type) 13
5 EVAP Monitor (Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type) 14–15
6 EVAP Monitor (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type) 16–17
7 EVAP Monitor (Without Leak Detection) 18
8 EVAP Monitor (For Prius) 19–20
9 Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front and Rear O2S System) 21
10 Oxygen/AF Sensor Monitor (Front AF Sensor and Rear O2S System) 22
11 Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor 23
Applicable All 1996 – 2002 model year Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles
Information

READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG003-02 Revised March 29, 2002
Terms & J1930 TERM J1930 DEFINITION TOYOTA/LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TESTER PARAMETER
Definitions
IAT Intake Air Temperature Intake Air
ECT Engine Coolant Temperature Coolant Temp
Required TOOLS & MATERIAL PART NUMBER QUANTITY

Tools &
Toyota Diagnostic Tester Kit 01001271 1
Material
12 Megabyte Diagnostic Tester Program Card
01002593-005 1
with version 9.0a Software (or later)
NOTE:
A generic OBDII Scantool can be used in place of the Toyota Diagnostic Tester.
CAUTION:
Strict observance of posted speed limits, traffic laws and road conditions are
required when performing these drive patterns.
NOTE:
These drive patterns represent the fastest method to satisfy all necessary
conditions which allow the specific Readiness Monitor to complete.
In the event that the drive pattern must be interrupted (possibly due to traffic
conditions or other factors) the drive pattern can be resumed and, in most cases,
the Readiness Monitor will still set to “complete.”
To ensure rapid completion of Readiness Monitors, avoid sudden changes in
vehicle load and speed (driving up and down hills and/or sudden acceleration).
Underhood
SAMPLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL
Emission
Control
Information VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
Label TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION
TEST GROUP : 1TYXV02.2JJA SFI, EGR, A/F S, WU–TWC, TWC, HO2S
EVAP. FAMILY : 1TYXR0135AK1 2.2 LITER
ENGINE TUNE–UP SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL ALTITUDES
VALVE CLEARANCE INTAKE 0.19–0.29 mm [0.007–0.011 in.]
(ENGINE AT COLD) EXHAUST 0.28–0.38 mm [0.011–0.015 in.]
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.
2 2 V A G J J Y
7A650 2AZ–FE USA
EGR = Exhaust Gas Recirculation

A/F S = Air Fuel Sensor
O2S = Oxygen Sensor
Page 2 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NUMBER*

Monitor O2S/AF
Drive Pattern MODEL DRIVE EGR CATALYST EVAP SENSOR HTR

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Application MODEL ENGINE CATEGORY
Tables Tercel 5E–FE X X X X X

Paseo 5E–FE X X X X X
Corolla 7A–FE X X X X X
7A–FE X X X X X
Celica
5S–FE X X X X X
MTM X X X X X
5S FE
5S–FE
ATM X X X X X
Camry
MTM X X X X X
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
ATM X X X X X
Avalon 1MZ–FE X X X X X
2JZ–GE X X X X X
Supra
2JZ-GTE X X X X X
RAV4 3S–FE X X X X X
1996 Previa 2TZ–FZE X X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
Tacoma 2WD X X X X X
5VZ–FE w/EGR** X X X X X
4WD
w/oEGR** N/A X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
4Runner w/EGR** X X X X X
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
w/oEGR** N/A X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
T100 2WD w/EGR** X X X X X

5VZ FE
5VZ–FE or
4WD w/oEGR** N/A X X X X
Land
1FZ–FE X X N/A X X
Cruiser
* Readiness Monitor Drive Patterns:
1. EGR (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine) 7. EVAP (Without Leak Detection)
2. EGR (For 1FZ–FE Engine) 8. EVAP (For Prius)
3. Catalyst (O2S Type) 9. Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front & Rear O2S System)
4. Catalyst (AF Sensor Type) 10. Oxygen/AF Sensor Monitor (Front AF Sensor &
5. EVAP (Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type) Rear O2S System)
6. EVAP (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type) 11. Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor
** Refer to Underhood Emissions Label on page 2.
Page 3 of 23

Monitor O2S/AF

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

(Continued) Paseo 5E–FE X X X X X
Corolla 7A–FE X X X X X
7A–FE X X X X X
Celica
5S–FE X X X X X
MTM X X X X X
5S–FE Fed X X X X X
ATM
Camry
y CA X X X X X
MTM X X X X X
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
ATM X X X X X
Avalon 1MZ–FE X X X X X
2JZ–GE X X X X X
Supra
2JZ-GTE X X X X X
RAV4 3S–FE X X X X X
1997
Previa 2TZ–FZE X X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
Tacoma 2WD
or w/EGR** X X X X X
5VZ–FE 4WD
3RZ–FE X X X X X
4Runner
5VZ–FE N/A X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
2WD w/EGR** X X X X X
T100
5VZ–FE 2WD
or w/oEGR** N/A X X X X
4WD
Land
1FZ–FE X X N/A X X
Cruiser
Page 4 of 23

Monitor O2S/AF

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Tables Tercel 5E–FE X X X X

(Continued) Paseo 5E–FE N/A X X X X
Corolla 1ZZ–FE X X X X
Celica 5S–FE X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
5S FE
5S–FE
CA X X X X X
Camry
y MTM X X X X X
1MZ–FE Fed X X X X X
ATM
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
Avalon 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
CA X X X X X
2JZ–GE N/A X X X X
Supra
2JZ-GTE X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
1998 RAV4 3S FE
3S–FE
CA X X X X X
Sienna 1MZ–FE N/A X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
Tacoma
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
3RZ–FE X X X X X
4Runner
5VZ–FE N/A X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
T100
5VZ–FE 2WD
or w/oEGR** X X X X
4WD N/A
Land
2UZ–FE X X X X
Cruiser
Page 5 of 23

Monitor O2S/AF

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

(Continued) Paseo 5E–FE X X X X X
Corolla 1ZZ–FE N/A X X X X
Celica 5S–FE X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
5S FE
5S–FE
CA X X X X X
Camry
y MTM X X X X X
ATM
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
5S FE
5S–FE
CA X X X X X
Solara MTM X X X X X
ATM
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
1999 Avalon 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
RAV4 3S FE
3S–FE
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X
Sienna 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE N/A
CA X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
Tacoma 2WD w/EGR** X X X X X
5VZ–FE 2WD
or w/oEGR** N/A X X X X
4WD
3RZ–FE X X X X X
4Runner Fed X X X X
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
CA X X X X
N/A
Land
2UZ–FE X X X X
Cruiser
Page 6 of 23

Monitor O2S/AF

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Tables ECHO 1NZ–FE X X X X

(Continued) Corolla 1ZZ–FE X X X X
1ZZ–FE N/A X X X X
Celica
2ZZ–GE X X X X
MR2 1ZZ–FE X X X X
Fed X X X X X
5S FE
5S–FE
CA X X X X X
Camry
y MTM X X X X X
ATM
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X X
5S FE
5S–FE
CA X X X X X
ATM
CA X X X X X
Camry
5S–FNE X N/A N/A X X
CNG
Avalon 1MZ–FE N/A X X X X
2000 Fed X X X X X
RAV4 3S FE
3S–FE
CA X X X X X
Fed X X X X
Sienna 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE N/A
CA X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
T
Tacoma
w/o A/F S,
2WD X X X X
5VZ–FE w/oEGR**
or N/A
w/A/F S,
4WD X X X X
w/oEGR**
3RZ–FE X X X X X
4Runner Fed X X X X
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
CA X X X X
Fed X X X X
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
Tundra CA N/A X X X X
2UZ–FE X X X X
Land
2UZ–FE X X X X
Cruiser
Page 7 of 23

Monitor O2S/AF

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1ZZ–FE N/A X X X X
Celica
2ZZ–GE X X X X
5S–FE X X X X X
Camry
y MTM X X X X X
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
ATM X X X X X
5S–FE X X X X X
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
ATM X X X X X
Camry
CNG
Avalon 1MZ–FE X X X X
2001 Prius 1NZ-FXE X X X X
RAV4 1AZ–FE X X X X
N/A
High
High- 2AZ–FE X X X X
lander 1MZ–FE X X X X
Sienna 1MZ–FE X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
3RZ–FE X X X X X
Tacoma
2WD X X X X X
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
4WD X X X X
4Runner 5VZ–FE X X X X
5VZ–FE X X X X
Tundra
2UZ–FE N/A X X X X
Land
2UZ–FE X X X X
Cruiser
Sequoia 2UZ–FE X X X X

Page 8 of 23

Monitor O2S/AF

YEAR TRAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1ZZ–FE X X X X
Celica N/A
2ZZ–GE X X X X
2AZ–FE X X X X
Camry
y MTM X X X X X
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
ATM X X X X X
2AZ–FE X X X X X
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
ATM X X X X X
Camry
CNG
Avalon 1MZ–FE X X X X
2002
Prius 1NZ-FXE X X X X
RAV4 1AZ–FE X X X X
N/A
High
High- 2AZ–FE X X X X
lander 1MZ–FE X X X X
Sienna 1MZ–FE X X X X
2RZ–FE X X X X X
Tacoma 3RZ–FE X X X X X
5VZ–FE X X X X
4Runner 5VZ–FE X X X X
5VZ–FE X X X X
Tundra
2UZ–FE N/A X X X X
Land
2UZ–FE X X X X
Cruiser
Sequoia 2UZ–FE X X X X

Page 9 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 1: EGR Monitor (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine)
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EGR Monitors
43 – 56 mph
(70 – 90 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min

10 min (b) (c)
(a) (d)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
MIL is OFF.
Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.
Drive Pattern Procedure

Connect the OBDII Scantool to the DLC3 connector to check monitor status and
preconditions.
a. If IAT (Intake Air) is less than 50tF (10tC) when starting the engine, idle the
engine for approximately 10 minutes.
b. Drive the vehicle at 43 – 56 mph (70 – 90 km/h) for a period of 3 – 5 minutes.
NOTE:
Do not allow the Throttle Position (TP) to exceed 30%.
Drive with smooth throttle operation and avoid sudden acceleration.
c. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
d. Repeat steps “b” and “c” once.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “b” through “d.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 10 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 2: EGR Monitor (for 1FZ–FE Engine)

Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EGR Monitors
(Continued) 43 – 56 mph
(70 – 90 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min

(a) (b)
(c)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.
IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.
ECT (Coolant Temp) is less than 104tF (40tC).

Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
a. Start the engine and as soon as safely possible begin driving the vehicle at 43 –
56 mph (70 – 90 km/h) for a period of 3 – 5 minutes.
NOTE:
b. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
c. Repeat steps “a” and “b” once.
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “c.”
NOTE:
Page 11 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 3: Catalyst Monitor (O2S Type)

Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Catalyst 40 – 50 mph
Monitors (64 – 88 km/h)
35 – 45 mph
(56 – 72 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up IAT < 50tF = 7 min 7 min

ECT≥176tF IAT > 50tF = 3 min (b)
(a)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.
ECT (Coolant Temp) is 176tF (80tC) or greater.
IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.*
* For 2002 MY and later vehicles: The readiness test can be completed in cold ambient conditions
(less than 14tF / –10tC), if the drive pattern is repeated a second time after cycling the ignition OFF.
Note the IAT (Intake Air) value during engine startup. The driving time must be adjusted
during step “a” based upon IAT (Intake Air) value at startup.
a. Drive the vehicle at 40 – 55 mph (64 – 88 km/h) for the time described below:
If IAT (Intake Air) was less than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
drive for 7 minutes.
If IAT (Intake Air) was greater than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
b. Drive the vehicle at 35 – 45 mph (56 – 72 km/h) for approximately 7 minutes.
NOTE:
Drive with smooth throttle operation.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Avoid sudden deceleration as much as possible with the throttle fully closed.
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” and “b.”
NOTE:
Page 12 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 4: Catalyst Monitor (AF Sensor Type)

Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Catalyst 40 – 50 mph
(Continued) 35 – 45 mph
(56 – 72 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up IAT < 50tF = 7min 16 min
ECT≥176tF IAT > 50tF = 3min (b)
(a)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.
IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.*
(less than 14tF / –10tC), if the drive pattern is repeated a second time after cycling the ignition OFF.
Note the IAT (Intake Air) value during engine startup. The driving time must be adjusted
during step “a” based upon IAT (Intake Air) value at startup.
a. Drive the vehicle at 40 – 55 mph (64 – 88 km/h) for the time described below:
If IAT (Intake Air) was less than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
If IAT (Intake Air) was greater than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
b. Drive the vehicle allowing speed to fluctuate between 35 – 45 mph (56 – 72 km/h)
for about 16 minutes.
NOTE:
Drive with smooth throttle operation.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Avoid sudden deceleration as much as possible with the throttle fully closed.
NOTE:
Page 13 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 5: EVAP Monitor

Monitor (Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type)
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors 45 mph
(72 km/h)
25 mph
(40 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up Soak 5 min 15 min
ECT≥176tF (1b) (2a) (2b)
(1a)
Cold Soak Drive Pattern
Cold Soak Preconditions

MIL is OFF.
Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full (for faster completion).
IMPORTANT:
A cold soak must be performed prior to conducting the drive pattern to complete the
Internal Pressure Readiness Monitor.
Cold Soak Procedure

1a. Start the engine and allow ECT (Coolant Temp) to reach 176tF (80tC) or greater.
(This can be done by letting the engine idle or by driving the vehicle.)
1b. Let the vehicle cold soak for 8 hours or until the difference between IAT (Intake
Air) and ECT (Coolant Temp) is less than 13tF (7tC).
H Example 1
ECT (Coolant Temp) = 75tF (24tC).
IAT (Intake Air) = 60tF (16tC).
Difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is 15tF (8tC).
⇒ The monitor will not run because the difference between ECT (Coolant
Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is greater than 13tF (7tC).
H Example 2
⇒ The monitor will run because the difference between ECT (Coolant Temp)
and IAT (Intake Air) is less than 13tF (7tC).
Page 14 of 23
Readiness Drive Pattern Preconditions

Monitor
Drive The monitor will not run unless:
Patterns: MIL is OFF.
EVAP
Monitors Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full (for faster completion).
(Continued) Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
ECT (Coolant Temp) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
IAT (Intake Air) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
Cold Soak Procedure has been completed.
NOTE:
Before starting the engine, the difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake
Air) must be less than 13tF (7tC). (Refer to Examples 1 and 2 on previous page.)

Release the pressure in the fuel tank by removing and then reinstalling the fuel tank
cap.
Start the engine and begin driving as directed.
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition off until the drive pattern is complete.
Drive on smooth roads to reduce excessive fuel sloshing.
2a. Start the engine and as soon as safely possible begin driving at approximately 45
mph (72km/h) for 5 minutes. (See illustration on previous page.)
2b. Drive the vehicle at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) for 15 minutes and include a
minimum of two stops for approximately 30 seconds. (See illustration on previous
page.)
The monitor should complete within approximately 20 minutes. If it does not, ensure
preconditions are met and repeat the drive pattern process beginning with the Cold Soak
Procedure.
NOTE:
Page 15 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 6: EVAP Monitor (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type)
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors 3,000 rpm
(Continued)
Idling
IG SW off
Soak Warm up 15 –50 min
(1a) (2a) (When the Readiness Monitor or
DTC is set, this test is complete.)
10 sec (2c)
(2b)

MIL is OFF.
Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full (for faster completion).
Cold Soak Procedure

1a. Let the vehicle cold soak for 8 hours or until the difference between IAT (Intake
H Example 1
H Example 2
Page 16 of 23

Monitor
EVAP
Monitors Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full (for faster completion).
(Continued) Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.*
ECT (Coolant Temp) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
IAT (Intake Air) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).*
(less than 40tF / 4.4tC) and/or at high altitudes (more than 7800 feet / 2400 m) if the complete drive
pattern (including Cold Soak) is repeated a second time after cycling the ignition OFF.
NOTE:

cap.
2a. Start the engine and allow it to idle until ECT (Coolant Temp) is 167tF (75tC) or
greater. (See illustration on previous page.)
2b. Race the engine at 3,000 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. (See illustration on
previous page.)
2c. Allow the engine to idle with the A/C ON (to create a slight load) for 15 – 50
minutes. (See illustration on previous page.)
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with A/C put a slight load on the engine by doing the
following:
Securely set the parking brake.
Block the drive wheels with wheel chocks.
Allow the vehicle to idle in drive for 15 – 50 minutes.
NOTE:
Page 17 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 7: EVAP Monitor (Without Leak Detection)

Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP 43 – 56 mph
(Continued)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min 3 – 5 min

ECT≥181tF (a) (b)
(c)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.
IAT (Intake Air) is 41tF (5tC) or greater.

a. Drive the vehicle at 43 – 56 mph (70 – 90 km/h) for a period of 3 – 5 minutes.
NOTE:
b. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
c. Repeat steps “a” and “b” once.
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “c.”
NOTE:
Page 18 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 8: EVAP Monitor (For Prius)

Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP 50 – 65 mph
(80 – 104 km/h)
Monitors
(Continued)
Idling
IG SW off
Soak 15 min
(1a) (When the Readiness Monitor or
DTC is set, this test is complete.)
(2a)

MIL is OFF.
IMPORTANT:
A cold soak must be performed prior to conducting the drive pattern to complete the
Internal Pressure Readiness Monitor.
Cold Soak Procedure

1a. Let the vehicle cold soak for 8 hours or until the difference between IAT (Intake
H Example 1
H Example 2
Page 19 of 23

Monitor
EVAP
Monitors Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
(Continued) ECT (Coolant Temp) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
IAT (Intake Air) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).*
NOTE:

cap.
Start the engine and as soon as safely possible begin driving as directed.
2a. Drive the vehicle at 50 – 65 mph (80 – 104 km/h) for about 15 minutes. (See
illustration on previous page.)
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition off until the drive pattern is complete.
Drive on smooth roads to reduce excessive fuel sloshing.
If vehicle speed drops under 45 mph (72 km/h) repeat step “2a.”
Page 20 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 9: Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front and Rear O2S System)
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Oxygen
Monitors
Once Twice 3 times 10 times
25 mph
(40 km/h)
(over 900
rpm)
Idling
IG SW off
Over Over Over Over Over 50 sec 40 50 sec

2 min 50 sec 40 50 sec 40 sec
(a) (b) sec sec
(c)
(d)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.

a. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes or more.
b. Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for at least 50 seconds.
Be sure engine speed remains above 900 rpm.
c. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 40 seconds or more.
d. Perform steps “b” and “c” ten times.
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “d.”
NOTE:
Page 21 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 10: Oxygen/Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitor
Monitor (Front AF Sensor and Rear O2S System)
Drive
Patterns:
Oxygen
Monitors
(Continued)
40 – 70 mph
(64 – 112 km/h)
(900 – 3,200 rpm)
Once Twice 10 times
25 mph
(40 km/h)
(over 900 rpm)
Idling
IG SW off
Over Over Over Over 40 sec

2 min 3 min 40 sec 40 sec
(a) (b) (d) Over
Over
Over 10 sec
10 sec
10 sec
(c)
(e) (f)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.

a. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes or more.
b. Drive the vehicle at 40 – 70 mph (64 – 112 km/h) or more for at least 3 minutes.
Be sure to maintain engine speed between 900 and 3,200 rpm.
c. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 10 seconds or more.
d. Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) for at least 40 seconds or more.
Be sure to maintain engine speed above 900 rpm.
e. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 10 seconds or more.
f. Perform steps “d” and “e” ten times.
ignition switch OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “f.”
NOTE:
Page 22 of 23
Readiness DRIVE PATTERN NO. 11: Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor

Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Oxygen
Monitors
(Continued)
25 mph
(40 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
9 min 2 min
(a) (b)
Preconditions
MIL is OFF.

a. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 9 minutes.
b. Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for at least 2 minutes.
NOTE:
Page 23 of 23
ENGINE
EG003-03
Title:
SULFUR ODOR FROM EXHAUST
BULLETIN All Models

February 24, 2003
Introduction Some owners of Toyota vehicles may experience a sulfur–like or “rotten egg” odor from
the exhaust system. Sulfur is a natural component of crude oil from which gasoline is
refined and the amount of sulfur can be decreased through the refining process. The
amount of sulfur in fuel sold in California is regulated, however gasoline sold in other
states can have substantially higher sulfur content. Sulfur content also varies
considerably between gasoline brands and locations.
Applicable S All Models.

Vehicles
Repair A sulfur odor emitted from the vehicle’s tailpipe does not necessarily indicate that there is
Procedure an issue with the engine’s running condition, but is most likely directly related to the fuel.
If the vehicle is exhibiting an excessive sulfur odor, the following checks should be
performed:
S If the MIL light is ON, check for DTCs and repair as necessary.
If no trouble is found after performing the above check, recommend the customer try a
different source of fuel.
Replacement of oxygen sensors, air/fuel ratio sensors or catalytic converters will not
reduce the odor and will therefore not be considered warrantable.

Information

TSB
R E V I S E D
ENGINE
TOYOTA
EG004-99
Title:
DIAGNOSTIC TR OUBLE CODE P0446
BULLETIN ’99 Avalon, Camry & Solara
June 11, 1999
Introduction Under certain driving conditions, some 1999 Model Year Avalon, Camry and Solaras will
exhibit a false M.I.L. ON DTC P0446. A Vacuum Control Valve Assembly has been
developed to prevent this condition.
Production VIN RANGE

Change MODEL
FROM TO
Information
Avalon 4T1BF1#B*XU286982 4T1BF1#B*XU307913
JT2BG2#K*X0263387 JT2BG2#K*X0301683
Camry
4T1BG2#K*XU382466 4T1BG2#K*XU446663
(4 Cylinder)
4T1BG2#K*XU859688 4T1BG2#K*XU890371
JT2BF2#K*X0146113 JT2BF2#K*X0164251
Camry
4T1BF2#K*XU074015 4T1BF2#K*XU077714
(6 Cylinder)
4T1BF2#K*XU929580 4T1BF2#K*XU079278
Camry Solara 2T1CG2#P*XC055458 2T1CG2#P*XC142298

(4 Cylinder) 2T1CG2#P*XC736206 2T1CG2#P*XC766681
2T1CF2#P*XC055463 2T1CF2#P*XC142355
Camry Solara
(6 Cylinder) 2T1CF2#P*XC722383 2T1CF2#P*XC766715
”#” May be a 2 or an 8.
”*” May be any number from 0 to 9 or an X.

Information
N/A 25852-20010 Valve, Vacuum Control with Hoses

Information
8602L2 Vacuum Control Valve 0.5 25852-20010 99 99
This repair is covered under the Toyota Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect
for 36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle s in-service
date. Coverage is extended to 36 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, in
the states of California and Massachusetts under the California Emission Warranty.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer s specific complaint.
NOTE:
Please enter the DTC P0446 in the Condition/Cause/Remedy Section when applying
for Warranty Reimbursement.
Toyota Supports ASE Certification

Page 1of 2
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE P0446 – EG004-99 Revised June 11, 1999
Repair 1. Verify that the Purge System is Figure 1

Procedure operating as specified in the Repair
Manual.
2. Raise vehicle on lift to gain access to

the Purge Canister and remove the two
Vacuum Lines indicated in Figure 1.
Remove
Save the Metal Clamps from the larger
hoses for reuse.
Use these two clamps on

the New Hose Assembly
3. Install the New Hose Assembly as Figure 2

shown in Figure 2.
Reuse the Hose Clamps removed in
Step 2 on the large hose as indicated.
Drain
Hose
Thin
Hose
Clamp must be
above Hose and
clamped onto Wire
Thick Hose to Harness
Canister
Clamp onto
Drain Hose
Use Metal
Clamps here
Bottom of Vehicle
4. Verify that the Vacuum Hose Assembly

Figure 3 Route Larger Hose under
is installed as shown in Figure 3.
Smaller Vacuum Hose.
5. After lowering vehicle verify that the

Gas Cap is on securely.
Rear of Vehicle Metal Tube attached to

side of Body.
Install the Two Clamps

removed in Step "2" here.
Page 2 of 2
ENGINE
EG004-01
Title:
M.I.L. ON" P1133
BULLETIN ’97–’99 Camry and ’99 Solara

April 20, 2001
Introduction Under certain driving conditions, some 1997 – 1999 5S–FE California emission
specification Camrys and 1999 5S–FE California emission specification Solaras may
exhibit a M.I.L. “ON” with DTC P1133 (Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Slow Response
Malfunction). An improved Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor was developed to correct this
condition (See TSB EG006–99).
In some rare cases, P1133 may still set after the improved A/F sensor is installed. The
Engine Control Module (ECM) logic has been modified to correct this condition.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 model year Camrys with 5S–FE California emission specification.
Vehicles
S 1999 model year Solaras with 5S–FE California emission specification.

Information
89661–3T451 89661–3T452 ECM,, 1999 AT
89661–06681 89661–06682 ECM,, 1999 MT
89661–3T271 89661–3T272 ECM,, 1998 AT
Non Immobilizer
Non–Immobilizer
89661–06501 89661–06502 ECM,, 1998 MT
89661–3T041 89661–3T042 ECM, 1997 AT
89661–06371 89661–06372 ECM, 1997 MT
89661–3T471 89661–3T472 ECM, 1999 AT
Immobilizer
89661–3T291 89661–3T292 ECM, 1998 AT

Information
895011 See Previous PN
R & R ECM For DOHC 0.4 99 99
Varied Work Code “N”. Above
This repair is covered under the Toyota Federal Emissions Warranty. This warranty is
in-service date.

M.I.L. “ON” P1133 – EG004-01 April 20, 2001
Repair 1. Should a M.I.L. “ON” condition with P1133 be encountered, perform diagnostic
2. If the problem source cannot be identified after checking all affected areas according
to the Repair Manual, the cause may be an A/F Sensor or ECM logic malfunction. In
this case, follow the procedure in the flowchart below to determine which part needs
to be replaced.
Replace the ECM only if the A/F Sensor in the vehicle was produced after
August 31, 1999.
DATE CODE
PART NUMBER
Check A/F Sensor Part Number If 89467–33010:
Replace sensor with 89467–33011
If 89467–33011: If sensor was built before

Check A/F Sensor Aug. 31, 1999,
Date Code Number: Date Code 08U31:
Replace with sensor built after

Date Code 08U31.
If sensor was built after
Aug. 31, 1999,
Date Code 08U31:
Replace ECM with the improved

one.
A/F Sensor Date Code Number: Date Code Examples:

08 U 31
07U25 = July 25, 1999
02B15 = February 15, 2000
Month Day
08 = Aug.
Year
U = 1999
B = 2000
Page 2 of 2
ENGINE
EG005-01
Title:
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION
Technical Service INFORMATION
BULLETIN Models:
April 27, 2001 All ’96 – ’01 Models
Introduction This service bulletin provides supplemental information regarding the system design,
operation, and diagnostics of the Early Type (Non–Intrusive) and Late Type (Intrusive)
EVAP Systems found on 1996 model year and later OBD II equipped vehicles.
Applicable MODEL 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001

Vehicles
Avalon Early Early Early Early Late Late
Early
Camry Early Early Early Late Late
(A/T only)
Camry
N/A N/A N/A Early Late Late
Solara
Celica N/A N/A Early Early Late Late
Corolla N/A N/A Early Early Late Late
ECHO N/A N/A N/A N/A Late Late
MR2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Late Late
Prius N/A N/A N/A N/A Late Late
Tercel N/A Early Early Early N/A N/A
4Runner Early Early Early Early Early Late
Land
N/A N/A Early Early Early Early
Cruiser
RAV4 Early Early Early Early Early Late
Sequoia N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Late
Sienna N/A N/A Early Early Early Late
Early
Tacoma Early Early Early Early Early
(4WD only)
Tundra N/A N/A N/A N/A Early Early
T100 N/A Early Early N/A N/A N/A
Contents This bulletin is divided into the following sections:

Early Type and Late Type EVAP System Outline
1. Early Type Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 2–4
2. Late Type Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 4–6
3. ECHO Late Type Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6
4. Late Type System Monitor Sequence . . . . . . Pages 6–9
Diagnostic Tips For Late Type EVAP System . . . . . . . . . . Pages 10–14

Information

EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG005-01 April 27, 2001
Early Type Early Type (Non–Intrusive) EVAP System Overview

System
Description There are a variety of EVAP systems in use with different monitoring strategies. It is
essential that the EVAP system be correctly identified before beginning diagnosis. The
Repair Manual is the best source for this information. The following information covers
the different systems.
The first system described is the Early Type (Non–Intrusive) EVAP System. Refer to the
Applicable Vehicles chart for applicability information.
Onboard Recovery Valve Vapor
Vapor Vacuum
(Fill Check Valve) Pressure Tank Valve
Pressure Check Pressure
Sensor Assembly Canister
Sensor Valve Valve
Three Way
VSV
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
Valve
Filtered
Air
Service Air Drain Valve Air Inlet Valve

Air Inlet Line
Port Air Valve Assembly
Purge Operation Purge VSV

When the engine has reached
predetermined parameters (closed loop,
engine temp. above 125F, etc.), stored
fuel vapors are purged from the canister
whenever the purge VSV is opened by
the ECM. At the appropriate time, the
ECM will turn on the purge VSV.
Fresh Air Inlet

The ECM will change the duty ratio cycle Figure 1. Purge Operation
of the purge VSV thus controlling purge
flow volume. Purge flow volume is
determined by manifold pressure and the
duty ratio cycle of the purge VSV.
Atmospheric pressure is allowed into the
canister to ensure that purge flow is
constantly maintained whenever purge
vacuum is applied to the canister (see
Figure 1).
Page 2 of 14
Early Type ORVR Operation

System During refueling, low pressure above the
Description diaphragm in the onboard recovery valve
(Continued)
lifts allowing fuel vapors into the charcoal
canister. At the same time, the air drain
valve opens and the charcoal absorbs the
fuel vapors (see Figure 2).
Figure 2. ORVR Operation
Early Type (Non–Intrusive) EVAP System DTCs
EVAP Monitor Leak Operation P0440

The ECM tests for leaks by measuring
EVAP system pressure in the lines,
charcoal canister, and fuel tank. When
the EVAP pressure is higher or lower than
atmospheric pressure, the ECM
concludes that no leaks are present.
EVAP pressure is measured by the vapor
pressure sensor. If either the tank or
canister purge side is at atmospheric Figure 3. Fuel Tank Side of System
pressure under specific conditions, the
ECM determines there is a leak.
If DTC P0440 is present, the leak is on

the fuel tank side of the EVAP system.
This also includes the lines between the
fuel tank and part of the canister. When
the Vapor Pressure sensor is measuring
tank pressure, the ECM is observing
changes in pressure and comparing tank
pressure to atmospheric pressure. No
difference in pressure indicates a leak.
The ECM may take 20 minutes or more to
complete testing the fuel tank side (see
Figure 3).
Canister Leak Detection P0446

When the ECM switches the vapor
pressure VSV to canister side, the ECM
measures canister pressure. A leak on
the canister side can set multiple DTCs
(see Figure 4).
Figure 4. Canister Side of System
Page 3 of 14
Early Type Vapor Purge Flow P0441

System The EVAP monitor is designed to detect:
Description
(Continued) S Restricted vapor purge flow when the
purge VSV is open
S Inappropriate vapor purge flow when
the purge VSV is closed
Under normal purge conditions, pressure

pulsations generated by the cycling of the Figure 5. Flow During Purge Operation
purge VSV are present in the canister

and detected by the Vapor Pressure
sensor.
Three–Way VSV P0446
The three–way VSV is connected to the Vapor Pressure sensor, canister, and fuel tank.
This VSV allows the Vapor Pressure sensor to detect either canister or tank pressure.
There are two modes the ECM can use to determine if the three–way VSV is
malfunctioning. The three–way VSV is judged to be normal if there is pressure difference
between the tank and canister when the three–way VSV is switched to look at the
charcoal canister and fuel tank side of system.
If there isn’t any pressure difference between the fuel tank and canister, the ECM looks
for the following conditions:
S During purging, pressure pulsations generated by the purge VSV are not present in
the canister as detected by Vapor Pressure sensor, the three–way VSV is judged to
be defective.
S If there are pressure pulsations detected by the Vapor Pressure sensor present in the
fuel tank, the three–way VSV is judged to be defective.
Late Type Late Type (Intrusive) EVAP System Overview

System
Description The Late Type EVAP System, also known as the Intrusive type, was developed to meet
the very stringent, mandated standard of detecting a hole 0.020 inch (0.5 mm). This
system uses many of the same components as the early type EVAP system. Purge,
vacuum relief, pressure relief, and ORVR operations are identical to the early type. Refer
to the Applicable Vehicles chart for applicability information.
The following changes were made to the Late Type EVAP System:
S Vapor pressure sensor connected to the fuel tank.
S Bypass VSV in the place of the three way VSV.
S Canister Closed Valve (CCV) on the air inlet line.
Page 4 of 14
Late Type Late Type (Intrusive EVAP System) (Except ECHO)

System
Description Onboard Recovery Valve
Tank
(Fill Check Valve) Vapor Tank Valve
(Continued) Pressure Vacuum Assembly Pressure
Check Valve Canister
Sensor
Valve
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
VSV
Filtered
Air
Canister
Closed Valve Service Bypass Air Air Inlet Valve
Port Inlet Line Air Valve Assembly
VSV Air Drain Valve
Tank Side Except ECHO

The bypass VSV and the fill check valve
assembly isolates the tank pressure side
from the canister side (see Figure 1).
Figure 1. Fuel Tank Side of System
Canister Side Except ECHO

The bypass VSV and the Fill Check valve
also isolate the canister side from the
tank side (see Figure 2).
Figure 2. Canister Side of System
Page 5 of 14
Late Type ECHO Late Type (Intrusive EVAP System)

System The ECHO uses a Late Type EVAP System but is configured with some small
Description differences. For the ECHO, the Canister Closed Valve is located directly on the canister.
(Continued)
Additionally, the bypass VSV has been eliminated.
Onboard Recovery Vapor

Valve (Fill Check Valve) Pressure Air Inlet Valve Canister
Sensor
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
Valve
Filtered
Air
Canister Closed Valve

Air Drain Valve Assembly Air Valve Assembly
Late Type Late Type (Intrusive) EVAP System Monitor Sequence

System The monitoring sequence for leak detection is different from that of the Early Type EVAP
Monitor
System. The Late Type applies a very small vacuum to the EVAP system. The ECM then
Sequence
determines if there is a problem in the system based on the vapor pressure sensor
signal.
Monitor Sequence (Except ECHO)
CCV Open Open

Closed
Open
Bypass Closed Closed
Open
Open
Purge Closed Purge Closed
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Signal
Time in Minutes
Negative
Cold Start ECT/IAT Leak Testing CCV Bypass
Pressure
Near Same Temp Period Occurs Op VSV Op
(Vacuum)
Occurs P0440 P0446
P0441 P0442
Page 6 of 14
Late Type ECHO Monitor Sequence

System
Monitor CCV Open Open
Sequence Closed
(Continued)
Open
Open
Purge Purge Closed
Closed
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Signal
Cold Start ECT/IAT Negative CCV

Tank &
Pressure Testing
Near Same Temp Canister
(Vacuum)
Occurs Leak Check
Monitor Operation
The monitor sequence begins with a cold
engine start. The IAT and ECT sensors
must have approximately the same
temperature reading.
The ECM is constantly monitoring fuel Except ECHO

tank pressure. As the temperature of the
fuel increases, pressure slowly rises.
Figure 1. Canister Purge
The ECM will purge the charcoal canister ECHO

at the appropriate time (see Figure 1).
With bypass VSV closed, pressure will
continue to rise in fuel tank.
Figure 1. Canister Purge
Page 7 of 14
Late Type Purge VSV Operation – P0441 Except ECHO

System At a predetermined point, the ECM closes
Monitor the CCV and opens the bypass VSV
Sequence
causing vacuum to increase in the entire
(Continued)
EVAP system.
The ECM continues to operate the purge

VSV until the vacuum is increased to a
specified point at which time the ECM
closes the purge VSV (see Figure 2). Figure 2. Vacuum Application
If the vacuum did not increase, or if the ECHO

vacuum increased beyond the specified
limit, the ECM judges the purge VSV and
related components to be faulty.
Figure 2. Vacuum Application
Hole Detection P0440 and P0442 Except ECHO

The rate of pressure increase as detected
by the vapor pressure signal indicates the
if there is a leak and if it is a large or
small leak.
After purge VSV operation, the purge

VSV is turned off sealing the vacuum in
the system and the ECM begins to
Figure 3. System Sealed
monitor the pressure increase (see Figure
3). Some increase is normal. A very rapid,
sharp increase in pressure indicates a
leak in the EVAP system and sets the ECHO
DTC P0440.
This monitoring method is also able to

distinguish what is called the small leak
detection. A pressure rise just above
normal indicates a very small hole and
will set the DTC P0442.
Figure 3. System Sealed
Page 8 of 14
Late Type Vent Control, CCV Operation P0446 Except ECHO

System This stage checks the CCV and vent (air
Monitor inlet side) operation. When the vapor
Sequence
pressure rises to a specified point, the
(Continued)
ECM opens the CCV. Pressure will
increase rapidly because of the air
allowed into the system. No increase or
an increase below specified rate of
pressure increase indicates a restriction
on the air inlet side (see Figure 4). Figure 4. CCV Opens
ECHO
Figure 4. CCV Opens
Bypass VSV Operation P0446 Except ECHO

In the next stage, the ECM closes the
bypass VSV. This action blocks air
entering the tank side of the system. The
pressure rise on the fuel tank side is no
longer as great. If there was no change in
pressure, the ECM will conclude the
bypass VSV did not close (see Figure 5).
Figure 5. Bypass VSV Closes
Page 9 of 14
Diagnostic This diagnostic process tests the EVAP System. The following diagnostic tips may be
Tips for Late used in conjunction with the Diagnostic Procedures for EVAP DTCs listed in the Repair
Type EVAP Manual. They may be used for all Late Type (Intrusive) EVAP Systems and for all EVAP
System DTCs. Refer to the Applicable Vehicles chart for applicability information.
The EVAP System Pressure Test Kit (P/N 00002–6872A) and the Scan Tool can be used
to diagnose the EVAP System. Measuring EVAP System pressures using the EVAP
System Pressure Tester Gauge and the Scan Tool can aid in the identification of leaks in
the system.
System Outline (Except ECHO)
Onboard Recovery Valve
Vapor Tank Valve Tank
(Fill Check Valve)
Pressure Vacuum Assembly Pressure
Check Valve Canister
Sensor
Valve
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
VSV
Filtered
Air
Canister
Closed Valve Service Bypass Air Air Inlet Valve
Port Inlet Line Air Valve Assembly
VSV Air Drain Valve
ECHO System Outline
Onboard Recovery Valve Vapor

(Fill Check Valve) Pressure
Sensor Air Inlet Valve Canister
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
VSV
Filtered
Air
Canister
Air Drain Closed
Service Air
Inlet Line Valve Air Valve Valve
Port
Assembly
Page 10 of 14
Diagnostic
Diagnostic Process Flow Chart
Tips for Late
Type EVAP
System START
(Continued)
PRELIMINARY CHECK
S Fuel level should be between
1/4 and 3/4 NG
S Visually inspect for presence DO NOT PROCEED!
of Fuel/Gas Cap
DO NOT TIGHTEN OR REMOVE!
OK
SCAN TOOL SETUP

A) Connect Scan Tool to DLC3 on vehicle.
B) Go to the SETUP menu and select UNIT CONVERSION.
C) Under VAPOR PRESSURE, Select ABS for absolute pressure, and mmHg for millimeters of mercury.
This is to match the Repair Manual specifications.
D) Go back to FUNCTION SELECT menu and select ENHANCED OBD II.
E) Select NORMAL MODE. Then select CURRENT DATA and USER SELECT.
F) Using the arrow key, select VAPOR PRESS from the DATA LIST and select YES.
G) Press ENTER. You will now be able to monitor the Vapor Pressure Sensor reading.
If vehicle is ECHO, go directly to “ECHO Canister and Tank Leak Check” on page 14.
If vehicle is not ECHO, follow the flow chart below.
PRESSURIZE EVAP SYSTEM (System Integrity Check)

This test checks for leaks in the canister and fuel tank sides. The CCV and Air Inlet Lines will be checked
separately.
A) Clamp the air drain hose on the charcoal canister with the supplied hose pliers from the EVAP System
Pressure Test Kit.
B) Locate the vapor pressure sensor. If the vapor pressure sensor has two hoses connected to it,
disconnect the hose between the air drain hose fitting at the vapor pressure sensor and plug the hose.
C) Connect the pressure supply hose from the Pressure Test Kit to the Green EVAP System Service Port
located on the EVAP Purge VSV line in the engine compartment.
D) Using the directions on the inside of the EVAP System Pressure Test Kit lid, pressurize the EVAP
system. Once pressurized, turn off the pump and seal the system (Pressure Hold Switch to “Closed”
and Vent Switch to “Closed).
E) After 30 seconds, note the pump pressure gauge reading and the Scan Tool vapor pressure
sensor reading.
F) Compare the readings to one of the four conditions listed below and proceed as directed.
(Continued on following page)
Page 11 of 14
Diagnostic
Tips for Late Diagnostic Process Flow Chart (Continued)
Type EVAP
System (Continued from previous page)
(Continued)
Pump pressure Pump pressure Pump pressure Pump pressure

gauge and vapor gauge zero, vapor gauge is above gauge at zero,
pressure above pressure above atmospheric vapor pressure is
atmospheric atmospheric pressure (above at 762 mmHg. The
pressure (above 762 pressure (above 762 zero), vapor leak(s) is/are on the
mmHg). No leak in mmHg). Leak is on pressure is at canister and tank
canister or tank. canister side of 762 mmHg. Leak is
sides or a leak at a
system. on the fuel tank side
point common to
of system.
both sides of system.
Remove hose pliers Remove hose pliers Remove hose pliers Remove hose pliers
from the air drain from the air drain from the air drain from the air drain
hose on the charcoal hose on the charcoal hose on the charcoal hose on the charcoal
canister before canister before canister before canister before
proceeding with proceeding with proceeding with proceeding with
additional checks. additional checks. additional checks. additional checks.
Go to CCV/Air Inlet Go to “Canister Leak Go to “Fuel Tank Go to “Fuel Tank

Line Check. Check.” Diagram on Leak Check.” Leak Check.”
page 13. Diagram on page 13. Diagram on page 13.
CCV and Air Inlet Line Check. (Except ECHO)

A) Disconnect the air inlet line from the charcoal canister.
B) Using the supplied step–down brass adapter (or equivalent) connect the Pressure Supply Hose to
the air inlet line.
C) Using the Scan Tool Active Test, turn on the CCV. This will close the CCV.
D) Pressurize the line. Once pressurized, turn off the pump and seal the line (Pressure Hold Switch to
“Closed” and Vent Switch to “Closed”). Pressure should hold. If not, check CCV and connections.
E) Next, using the Scan Tool, turn off the CCV. This will open the CCV. The pressure should decrease.
If not, check the CCV and connections.
F) After completing the test, reconnect air inlet line to charcoal canister.
Go to “Return Vehicle to Service” on page 14.
Page 12 of 14
Diagnostic
Fuel Tank Leak Check (Except ECHO)
Tips for Late
Type EVAP Disconnect
System EVAP Hose Here
(Continued)
A. Using the supplied brass step–down adapter, disconnect the EVAP hose from
the charcoal canister side as indicated above. Connect Pressure Supply hose
from Pressure Test Kit to the EVAP hose and pressurize the fuel tank to
30 mmHg (4 kPa / 0.58 psi).
B. Check that the internal pressure of the tank will hold for 1 minute. Check shaded
areas for leaks (soapy water can be used for leak detection). If pressure holds, then
perform the Canister Leak Check.
C. When done, reconnect the EVAP line hose to the charcoal canister.
Canister Leak Check (Except ECHO)
A. Connect the Pressure Supply hose from the Pressure Test Kit to the Green EVAP
System Service Port located on the EVAP Purge VSV line in the engine compartment.
B. Using the directions on the inside of the EVAP System Pressure Test Kit lid,
pressurize the EVAP system. Once pressurized, turn off the pump and seal the system
(Pressure Hold Switch to “Closed” and Vent Switch to “Closed”)
C. With system pressurized at EVAP Service Port, check shaded areas for leaks (soapy
water can be used for leak detection).
Page 13 of 14
Diagnostic
ECHO Canister and Tank Leak Check
Tips for Late
Type EVAP
System
(Continued)
A. Connect the Pressure Supply hose from the Pressure Test Kit to the Green EVAP
System Service Port located on the EVAP Purge VSV line in the engine
compartment.
B. Using the directions on the inside of the EVAP System Pressure Test Kit lid,
pressurize the EVAP system. Once pressurized, turn off the pump and seal the
system (Pressure Hold Switch to “Closed” and Vent Switch to “Closed”)
C. With system pressurized, check shaded areas for leaks (soapy water can be used
for leak detection).
Return Vehicle to Service

A. After performing checks and/or repairs, be sure to reconnect all lines and verify
that all plugs and hose pliers used for diagnosis have been removed.
B. For additional diagnostic procedures and information, refer to the appropriate
Repair Manual.
Page 14 of 14
ENGINE
EG007-02
Title:
GENERAL MAINTENANCE TIP
BULLETIN All ’93 – ’03 Models

March 22, 2002
Introduction To help prevent unnecessary complications during the oil fill process, no undue load
should be placed on the oil baffle attached to the inside of the valve cover (see
illustration). This baffle is designed to deflect oil and should not be used to support
the weight of heavy oil fill devices. These devices can place stress on the baffle, and
bend or break it during the oil fill process.
Applicable S All 1993 – 2003 model year Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles
Oil Filling Please take measures to ensure that the baffle is not damaged during the oil fill process.
Procedure If it does become damaged, repair it before any collateral damage occurs.
Example of Bent Oil Baffle

Oil Fill Gun (View From Underneath Valve Cover)
Valve
Cover
Oil Baffle
Bent
Oil Baffle

Information

ENGINE
EG013-02
Title:
M.I.L. ON" P0440, P0441 & P0446
BULLETIN ’98 – ’99 Camry & Solara

July 12, 2002
Introduction Under certain driving conditions, some 1998 – 1999 model year Camry and Solara
vehicles may exhibit a M.I.L. “ON” with DTCs P0440, P0441 and P0446 stored due to an
inoperative Vapor Pressure Sensor 3 way Vacuum Switching Valve (VSV). An improved
Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV has been developed to correct this condition.
Applicable 1998 – 1999 model year Camry & Solara vehicles.

Vehicles
Parts PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME QTY
Information
90910–12109 90910–12271 Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV 1
Required Tools TOOLS & MATERIAL PART NUMBER QUANTITY

& Material
Toyota Diagnostic Tester Kit*
01001271 1

with version 9.01a Software (or later)* 01002593-005 1
Hand Operated Vacuum Pump N/A 1

09082–00050
Digital Volt Ohm Meter (DVOM) 1
(Or Equivalent)
* Essential SSTs.
NOTE:
Additional Diagnostic Tester Kits, Program Cards or SSTs may be ordered by calling
OTC at 1-800-933-8335.

Information
R & R Vacuum Switching Valve (4 Cylinder) 0.4
178011 90910 12109
90910–12109 72 83
R & R Vacuum Switching Valve (6 Cylinder) 0.2
in-service date.

M.I.L. “ON” P0440, P0441 & P0446 – EG013-02 July 12, 2002
Inspection & Test VSV Operation Using ACTIVE TEST on the Toyota Diagnostic Tester
Repair
Procedure 1. Test operation of the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV using the Toyota Diagnostic Tester
in ACTIVE TEST (see screen flow in Figure 1).
Figure 1: Testing Operation of Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV using ACTIVE TEST
A B C
FUNCTION SELECT FOR
*APPLICATION SELECT* DIAGNOSTIC MENU
NORTH AMERICA
ENGINE
1: OBD/MOBD
2: ENHANCED OBD 1: DATA LIST
1: DIAGNOSIS 3: CARB OBD II 2: DTC INFO
2: CUSTOMIZE 4: BREAK–OUT BOX 3: ACTIVE TEST
3: ECU REPROGRAM 5: NVH 4: SNAPSHOT
6: AUTOPROBE 5: SYSTEM CHECK
7: 02 RPM CHECK 6: RESET MEMORY
8: SNAPSHOT REVIEW 7: MONITOR STATUS
9: SETUP 8: CHECK MODE
0: GAS ANALYSIS
D E F
SELECT DATA INJECTOR 0.0ms
SELECT DATA
IGN ADVANCE 5.0deg
INJ VOL ALL CALC LOAD 0%
A/F CONTROL MAF 0gm/s
FUEL PMP SP CTL USER DATA
ENGINE SPD 0rpm
A/C CUT SIG COOLANT TEMP 77.0tF
CAN CTRL VSV INTAKE AIR 87.8tF
TANK BYPASS VSV THROTTLE POS 16%
EVAP VSV (ALONE) CTP SW ON
FUEL PUMP/SPD VEHICLE SPD 0MPH
LINE PRESS UP 02S B1 S1 0.00V
PRESS [ENTER]
TANK BYPASS VSV "OFF
G
INJECTOR 0.0ms
IGN ADVANCE 5.0deg
CALC LOAD 0%
MAF 0gm/s
ENGINE SPD 0rpm
COOLANT TEMP 77.0tF
INTAKE AIR 87.8tF
THROTTLE POS 16%
CTP SW ON
VEHICLE SPD 0MPH
02S B1 S1 0.00V
TANK BYPASS VSV "ON
NOTE:
Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV is listed as TANK BYPASS VSV on the Diagnostic Tester.
Page 2 of 5
M.I.L. “ON” P0440, P0441 & P0446 – EG013-02 July 12, 2002
Inspection & 2. Locate Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV as shown in Figure 2 (or see SFI section of 1998
Repair or 1999 Camry or Solara Repair Manual).
Procedure
(Continued) Figure 2: Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV Components
Vapor Pressure Sensor

VSV Connector
Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV
Charcoal Canister
3. Using the Diagnostic Tester ACTIVE TEST, switch the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV
(TANK BYPASS VSV) to ON using the arrow keys.
4. Does the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV make a “click” noise when switched to ON?
YES " Go to “Test VSV for Vacuum Leaks” (page 4 and 5 of this TSB).
NO " Go to Step 5.
5. Is the wiring harness connector properly connected to the Vapor Pressure Sensor
VSV?
YES " Go to Step 6.
NO " Fix the connector, then return to Step 3.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector for the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV.
7. Using a DVOM test at Pin 1 to a known good ground. (Red wire on Solara, black and
yellow wire on Camry).
Is battery voltage (B+) present at Pin 1 of the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV connector
when the TANK BYPASS VSV ACTIVE TEST is switched to ON?
YES " Go to Step 8.
NO " Perform diagnosis of power circuit.
Page 3 of 5
M.I.L. “ON” P0440, P0441 & P0446 – EG013-02 July 12, 2002
Inspection & 8. Using a DVOM test at Pin 2 to a known good ground. The ECM provides ground
Repair when the VSV is switched ON. (White and red wire on Solara, violet wire on Camry).
Procedure
(Continued) Is there continuity to ground at Pin 2 of the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV connector
when the TANK BYPASS VSV ACTIVE TEST is switched to ON?
YES " Replace the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV.
NO " Perform diagnosis of ground circuit.
Test VSV for Vacuum Leaks

1. Locate the vacuum hose going from charcoal canister to Port F of the Vapor Pressure
Sensor VSV (see Figure 3).
Figure 3

Vacuum Hose
Bracket
PORT F
Vacuum Hose
Vacuum Hose
VSV Connector
Charcoal Canister
2. Remove vacuum hose from Port F of the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV and connect a
hand–held vacuum pump to Port F using a short length of vacuum hose.
3. Apply at least 10 mm Hg vacuum to the VSV.

Is a vacuum held for at least 1 minute?
YES " Go to Step 4.
NO " Replace the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV.
4. Disconnect the hand–held vacuum pump and reconnect the vacuum hose from the
canister to the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV.
Page 4 of 5
M.I.L. “ON” P0440, P0441 & P0446 – EG013-02 July 12, 2002
Inspection & 5. Locate the vacuum hose going from charcoal canister to Port P of the Vapor Pressure
Repair Sensor VSV (see Figure 4).
Procedure
(Continued) Figure 4
Vacuum Hose
Bracket HOSE TO
REMOVE
Vacuum Hose
Vacuum Hose
PORT P
VSV Connector
Charcoal Canister
6. Remove the vacuum hose from Port P of the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV and
connect a hand–held vacuum pump to Port P using a short length of vacuum hose.
7. Apply at least 10 mm Hg vacuum to the VSV.

Is a vacuum held for at least 1 minute?
YES " Go to Step 8.
NO " Replace the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV.
8. Disconnect the hand–held vacuum pump and reconnect the vacuum hose from the
canister to the Vapor Pressure Sensor VSV.
9. Continue diagnosis of the EVAP system.

Reference TSB EG005–01, “EVAP System Operation Information.”
Page 5 of 5
ENGINE
EG013–99
Title:
SINGLE CYLINDER MISFIRES
BULLETIN ’99 Avalon, Camry, Sienna & Solara

December 17, 1999
Introduction Some 1999 Avalon, Camry (1MZ–FE), Sienna & Solara (1MZ–FE) vehicles may exhibit a
rough idle, and or a M.I.L. “ON” condition, in which a single cylinder misfire code, or
codes are present. Changes have been made in the fuel injector production process to
correct this condition.
Applicable S 1999 TMMK produced Avalon, Camry (1MZ–FE), Sienna & TMMC produced Solara
Vehicles (1MZ–FE) vehicles built between the VIN numbers listed below.
Avalon 4T1BF1#B * XU298504 4T1BF1#B*XU319557
Camry 4T1BF2#K * XU076403 4T1BF2#K*XU081214
Camry (cont.) 4T1BF2#K * XU930024 4T1BF2#K*XU931330
Sienna 4T3ZF1#C * XU090887 4T3ZF1#C*XU122589
Solara (U.S.) 2T1CF2#P * XC111083 2T1CF2#P*XC757508
Solara (Canada) 2T1CF2#P * XC744113 2T1CF2#P*XC162681
Parts APPLICABLE PARTS QUANTITY PART NAME
Information
23209–0A010 6 Fuel Injector
Warranty OP CODE VWC DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
895221 N R & R Fuel Injector Assembly – All 1.8 23209–0A010 02 56
This repair is covered under the Toyota Federal Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
states of California, Massachusetts, and Vermont due to state emission warranty
legislation.
NOTE:
Be sure to enter the DTC No. in the Condition/Cause/Remedy section, if a DTC Code
appeared.

SINGLE CYLINDER MISFIRE – EG013–99 December 17, 1999
Repair 1. Remove all six fuel injectors for

Procedure verification of production information.
Affected injectors will be labeled with
a vendor part number of
Production
“23250–0A010” and have a
Date
production date code number of “828“
or lower (see illustration for number
locations).
2. After determining that one or more of
the injectors are affected, replace all
six injectors with the above applicable
part number. Part Number
3. Clear the DTC, if present, and verify

that the vehicle now operates as
designed.
Page 2 of 2
ENGINE
EG009–99
Title:
M.I.L. ON" DTC P1133
BULLETIN ’97–’99 Camry and ’99 Solara: 5S–FE CA Spec.

October 1, 1999
Introduction Under certain driving conditions, some 5S–FE equipped 1997–1999 Camry and 1999
Solara California emission specification vehicles may exhibit a M.I.L. “ON” DTC P1133.
An improved Air Fuel Ratio Sensor has been developed to correct this condition.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 Camry & 1999 Solara (5S–FE) with California emission
Vehicles specification.
Production MODEL YEAR ORIGIN ENGINE STARTING VIN
Change
JPN JT2BG2#K*X0363615
Information
1999 Camry 4T1BG2#K*XU603913
(5S–FE)
NAP 4T1BG2#K*XU918675
2000 Solara ––
* # May be a 2 or an 8.
* * May be any number from 0 to 9 or an X.
Parts PREVIOUS PART NUMER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME

Information
89467–33010 89467–33011 Sensor, Air Fuel
Repair S Should a M.I.L. “ON” condition with DTC P1133 be encountered, perform diagnostic
S If the problem source cannot be identified after checking all affected areas according
to the Repair Manual, the cause may be an Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor malfunction. In this
case, replace the Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor with the updated part.
S If the Exhaust Manifold threads are damaged by removal of the sensor, they can be
repaired by the proper use of a M18 x 1.5 tap.
Information
EL9006 Sensor, Air Fuel Ratio 0.3 89467–33010 99 99
Coverage is extended to 36 months or 50,000 miles, which ever occurs first, in the
states of California and Massachusetts due to state emissions warranty legislation.
NOTE:
Please enter the DTC in the condition/Cause/Remedy section when applying for
warranty reimbursement.

ELECTRICAL
EL002–98
Title:
CIGARETTE LIGHTER SERVICE
BULLETIN All Models

Apirl 10, 1998
Introduction When receiving customer complaints to repair the lighter or lighter socket, please
carefully investigate the cause of the failure to prevent further occurrences. If the
customer uses the wrong size lighter element or power accessory plug, damage may
occur to the lighter socket. When applicable, instruct the customer to replace the lighter
element with original equipment components or to use an appropriate sized accessory
plug. Dimensional information included within this document will instruct you on
component specifications.
Service 1. Determine if the lighter is original equipment by using the specifications shown.
Procedure
a. If the vehicle has a non–genuine lighter element, it has the possibility to cause
a short circuit between the lighter element and the lighter socket, which can
result in an open fuse.
b. A non–genuine lighter element may cause a rattle or bend the socket bimetal
contacts.
c. If a non–genuine lighter element is being used, advise the customer to use an
original equipment element.
TYPE DRAWING WITH DIMESIONS FEATURES
Knob 8.4 mm (0.33”) Bimetal
17.7–17.8 mm
(0.697–0.7”)
Genuine No Problem to use.

22.5 (0.88”) Ash Plate
Heater Element
Heater Head
Guard
13 mm (0.51”)
Too long an ash guard will
20.7 mm
(0.81”)
contact bimetal (positive

circuit) plate and cause fuse
to melt.
25.5 mm (1.0”)
Non–Genuine
11 mm (0.43”) Excessive free play on the
heater head which allows
20.8 mm
(0.82”)
contact between heater

element, socket body and
bimetal plate, will cause fuse
24 mm (0.94”) to melt.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER SERVICE – EL002-98 April 10, 1998
Service 2. If the lighter element is original

Recommended Accessory Plug Shape
Procedure equipment and the lighter socket is
(Continued) bent or pulled out of the dash, please
< 20.5 mm
(0.81”)
<13 mm
(0.51”)
ask the customer about the accessory
plug being used in the lighter socket.
a. The attached specifications in > 15 mm
the drawing provide the (0.59”)
maximum recommended size 25 – 30 mm > 2 Terminals

of accessory plug. If the (0.79 – 1.18”)
customer is using an
< 20.5 mm
(0.81”)
accessory plug larger than
(0.51”)
13 mm
recommended, please advise
the customer to use a plug of
appropriate size. > 8.5 mm
(0.33”)
b. Using a power plug larger 25 – 30 mm
than the given dimensions (0.79 – 1.18”)
may damage the lighter
socket.
c. If the vehicle has a power
point socket, advise the
customer to use this socket
instead of the lighter socket.
Affected S All models, all model years

Vehicles

Information
Page 2 of 2
ELECTRICAL
Title:
EL003–00
SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER
Technical Service NEEDLE MOVEMENT
Models:
BULLETIN
’99 – ’00 Camry, Corolla, Sienna, & Solara
February 11, 2000
December 13, 2002 & ’00 Avalon

The information contained in this TSB was revised on December 13, 2002.
The previous TSB should be discarded.
Introduction Some vehicles may experience a slight, intermittent resistance to movement of the
speedometer or tachometer needle near zero during the first few miles of travel. The
condition can be corrected by following the repair method outlined below.
NOTE:
This repair does not apply to speedometers or tachometers which are permanently
inoperative.
Applicable S 1999 – 2000 model year Camry, Corolla, Sienna, & Solara,
Vehicles and 2000 model year Avalon between the following VINs:
Avalon 4T1BF28B * YU001171 4T1BF28B * YU030913
4T1BG2 * K * XU424095 4T1BG2 * K * YU657647
4T1BG2 * K * XU869714 4T1BG2 * K * YU957337
Camry
4T1BF2 * K * XU077249 4T1BF2 * K * YU098224
4T1BF2 * K * XU930237 4T1BF2 * K * YU940492
1NXBR1 * E * XZ171600 1NXBR1 * E * YZ359500
Corolla 1NXBR1 * E * XC171600 1NXBR1 * E * YC359500
2T1BR1 * E * XC120816 2T1BR1 * E * YC291439
4T3 * F1 * C * XU096570 4T3 * F1 * C * YU236332
Sienna
4T3 * F1 * CZ * XU096570 4T3 * F1 * CZ * YU236332
Solara 2T1 * * 2 * P * XC122747 2T1 * * 2 * P * YC291165
Warranty OP CODE MODEL DESCRIPTION TIME OFP T1 T2

Information
Avalon, Camry,
830011 Corolla, Sienna, R & R Speedometer Assembly 0.4 83220–XXXXX 73 83
& Solara

SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER NEEDLE MOVEMENT – EL003-02 Revised: December 13, 2002 February 11, 2000

Information
Speedometer
83220 XXXXX
83220-XXXXX Same
Tachometer

Tools &
Double Sided Cotton Swab 1
Material
Distilled Water 1 oz.
Repair 1. Remove the combination meter

Procedure assembly per repair manual
instructions.
2. Remove the window plate from the
instrument cluster.
3. Clean the entire surface of the needle
and needle stopper as illustrated.
Using one end of a double sided
cotton swab, clean the contact point
between the pointer and the stopper
pin on the speedometer and
tachometer with distilled water.
S Use only a new, clean cotton
swab.
S Use only distilled water.
S Use a new swab each time a part
is cleaned (one per speedometer,
one per tachometer).
NOTE:
S After cleaning, do not touch the
pointer needle or stopper pin.
S Do not blow dry the pointer or
stopper pin.
4. Use the opposite (dry) end of the

cotton swab to dry the previously
cleaned area.
5. Reassemble parts and assemble to
vehicle.
6. Confirm proper working condition of
speedometer and tachometer.
S Confirm no foreign material
entered the cluster while the
window plate was removed.
Page 2 of 2
ELECTRICAL
EL006–99
Title:
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Technical Service PRECAUTIONS
BULLETIN Models:
October 8, 1999 All Models
REVISION NOTICE:
The information contained in this TSB updates EL001–98 dated January 23, 1998.
Introduction This bulletin applies to 1998 and newer Toyota vehicles. When using an immobilizer key
containing a transponder chip, observe the following precautions while starting the engine.
1. The key ring should not rest on or be
pressed against the key grip.
2. Do not place any other transponder

devices on the same key ring. Such
devices would include transponder
equipped units used for charging fuel.
3. Do not place any other immobilizer

keys on the same key ring with the
key used to start the vehicle.
4. If the above precautions are not
observed and an engine starting or
running problem occurs, remove all
items which may interfere with the
ignition key transponder signal. Turn
off the engine and then restart.
Applicable S All Toyota models equipped with an engine immobilizer system.

Vehicles

Information

ELECTRICAL
EL007–00
Title:
HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Technical Service INSTRUCTIONS
BULLETIN Models:
April 14, 2000 ’97 – ’99 Camry
Introduction The attached instructions have been developed to supplement the Repair Manual to
assure corrrect cable routing of the heater control assembly during a service repair.
PUBLICATION NUMBER
1997 Camry Repair Manual, Vol. 2 RM503U2
NOTE:
For maximum heater performance the coolant ratio should be 50 to 60 percent.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 model year Camry

Vehicles

Information

POOR HEATER PERFORMANCE – EL007–00 April 14, 2000
Installation A. Pull out the inner cable of the

Procedure REC/FRE cable until the link of the
A/C unit contacts the link stopper.
View A
View A
Top
Left Side
Link
Rear Should make

contact here.
Link Stopper
B. Set the air intake selector of the

heater control unit all the way to the
“FRESH” position.
C. Attach the REC/FRE cable to the

heater control unit lever pin and clamp
the outer cable to the secure clamp.
NOTE: Lever
Clamp the cable while pushing the
outer cable to the A/C unit assembly
side.
Page 2 of 4
Installation D. Install the heater control panel to the

Procedure instrument panel with 4 screws.
(Continued)
NOTE:
Make sure air mix cable is routed
outside of the brace.
REC/FRE Cable
(from A/C Unit)
Instrument Panel
Step (A)
Step (C)
Step (D)
Air Mix Cable
Top
Front Side
Screw (4)
Right Side
Page 3 of 4
Installation E. Set the temperature selector of the

Procedure heater control unit to the “MAX.
(Continued) COOL” position.
MAX.
COOL
F. Connect the air mix cable connector

to the air mix link pin on the left side
of the A/C unit and clamp the outer
cable to the secure clamp.
NOTE:
S It is unnecessary to push or pull the
outer cable.
S Do not bend the cable when setting Air
the cable. Mix
S Do not move the air mix knob until Link
you are finished clamping the outer
cable.
Inspection 1. Rotary Knob For Temperature

Procedure Control
Operate the temperature control

rotary knob after setting the cables,
check that there is a “thump” at the
end of the travel, and no reversing
force at “MAX. COOL” or “MAX. HOT”
position.
2. Air Inlet Lever
Operate air inlet lever after setting the

cable and check that there is a “click”
at the end of the travel and no
reversing force at “RECIRCULATE”
and “FRESH” positions.
3. Blower Switch, Air Flow Mode
Switch & A/C Switch
Operate each switch and make sure

they are operating correctly.
Page 4 of 4
ELECTRICAL
EL008–98
Title:
PROGRAMMING OEM WIRELESS
Technical Service DOOR LOCK REMOTE TRANSMITTERS
BULLETIN Models:
December 4, 1998 ’97 – ’99 Camry
Introduction This bulletin describes procedures used to program the three button remote transmitter to
vehicles that are equipped with Wireless Door Lock Control. The following information
applies only to the Factory Wireless Door Lock Control, not dealer or port installed
options that also utilize remotes, such as VIP Keyless Entry/RS3000 or any aftermarket
system.
Verification of Factory Wireless Door Lock Control can easily be performed by identifying
the TDS status monitor, functioning remote, or model grade.
Transmitter Identification TDS Status Montior Indentification
S The Remote Transmitter has LOCK, S The TDS Status Monitor is located in
UNLOCK, and PANIC features. the Tachometer.
NOTE:
When a new remote is programmed, all previous codes are erased. Because of this,
all remotes should be entered during the same programming session, otherwise a
remote may no longer be registered and operate the vehicle.
For Customer Satisfaction, request that any existing remote be furnished when
programming a new or replacement unit.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 Camrys:

Vehicles 1997 – 1998 All XLE (standard equipment) and some LE (optional)
1999 All XLE only

Information

PROGRAMMING OEM WIRELESS DOOR LOCK REMOTE TRANSMITTERS – EL008–98 December 4, 1998
Programing The PRG (Program) circuit of the

Procedure Wireless Door Lock ECU is grounded to
perform programming. This can be
accomplished at a satellite location, the
Mirror Control Switch (see illustration).
NOTE:
Up to two remotes can be programmed
to operate each vehicle.
Mirror Control Switch
1. With the key OUT of the ignition

Violet
switch, locate and disconnect the Wireless
PRG
Door Lock
Mirror Control Switch from the vehicle
White–Black
E.C.U.
harness.
Jumper Wire
2. Using a suitable jumper wire, connect
terminal number 2, PRG (violet wire)
to terminal number 10, GND
GND
(white/black) of the 10 cavity mirror
control switch connector (illustrated).
The vehicle confirms programming
mode by requesting the power door Wire Harness
locks to lock.
3. Depress, then release, any button on
the remote. The vehicle confirms
registration by requesting the power
door locks to lock once again.
Program (PRG)
4. To program an additional remote,
repeat step 3.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire to exit
programming mode.
Wire Harness
Mirror Control Switch Connector
Page 2 of 2
ELECTRICAL
EL008-02
Title:
WIRELESS TRANSMITTER &
Technical Service PROGRAMMING GUIDE
BULLETIN Models:
December 20, 2002 All Applicable

S February 28, 2003: In Wireless Transmitter Identification section (pages 5 and 6),
Figures 5, 9, 10, 12, and 13 updated to include 2003 model year; Figure 11 updated
to include 1999 and 2003 model year.
S January 17, 2003: 2003 model year added to Solara in the Application Chart on
page 3.
S The information contained in this TSB supercedes TSB EL010–01, dated October 26,
2001. The previous TSB, EL010–01, should be discarded.
Introduction Difficulties during Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming can arise due to
confusion between Toyota Factory Wireless systems and Toyota Port/Dealer installed
systems. This bulletin will assist in identifying the system/correct remote transmitters for
each vehicle, and provide the location of the most accurate programming procedure for
each system.
Applicable S All applicable Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles

Information
System The following table contains all of the necessary information to correctly identify the type
Identification of system installed, and where to go to get programming procedures for each vehicle.
NOTE:
Should a vehicle having both VIP and Factory systems available (as identified in the
following table) be brought in without any remotes (or one non–working remote), use
the following tips to help determine which type of wireless system (O.E. or PIO/DIO)
the vehicle has.
S Look at the Trim Level of the vehicle. Higher–grade vehicles will tend to have O.E.
systems, while entry–grade vehicles will tend to have VIP. For example, the 2001
Camry XLE has Factory RKE, but the LE and CE grades have VIP.
S Look for a “Status Monitor” with a glass breakage sensor and an LED externally
installed into the dashboard or on the center console. Most VIP systems will have
this.
S Locate the ECU (refer to the applicable vehicle VIP Manual installation instructions
for location). Once located, refer to the part label.
S Attempt to perform the factory wireless programming procedure to get a response
from the vehicle. Select the “confirmation mode” and see if any “Lock/Unlock”
response is received, if so, the vehicle has a factory system.

WIRELESS TRANSMITTER & PROGRAMMING GUIDE – EL008-02 Revised December 20, 2002
Application APPLICATION DEALER/PORT INSTALLED FACTORY INSTALLED

Chart FACTORY
VEHICLE YEAR SYSTEM/REMOTE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
REMOTE
TVSS Owner’s
1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1
Guide Fig. 8
TSB – EL003
EL003–99
99
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
A l
Avalon TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 – 1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4
2000 – 2001 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 g 9 *2
Fig. RM 02 V2, BE–99
2002 – 2003 N/A N/A TSB – EL004–01
1990 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1 Guide N/A N/A
1996
RS3000 / Fig.
Fig 3
Camry
y 1997 TSB – AX005–99
Fig 7
Fig. TSB – EL008–98
EL008 98
1998 – 1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4
2000 – 2001 RS3200 / Fig. 11 RM 01 V2, BE–86
2000 VIP Manual *6
2002 – 2003 Fig. 5 or 6 *7 Fig. 9 *2 TSB – EL004–01
1990 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1 Guide
N/A N/A
Celica 1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 – 1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4
2000 – 2003 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
1990 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1 TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
N/A N/A
Corolla 1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 – 2002 RS3000 / Fig. 4
2003 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
TVSS Owner’s
Cressida 1991 – 1992 TDSE / Fig. 1 *1 N/A N/A
Guide
ECHO 2000 – 2003 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
Owner’s
s
N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
4Runner 1998 TSB – AX005–99
RS3000 / Fig.
Fig 4
1999
RM 02 V2,
V2 BE–98
BE 98
Fig.
2003 N/A N/A RM 03, 73–16
Highlander 2001 – 2003 N/A N/A Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
Owner’s
s
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3 TSB – AX005–99
Land Cruiser
RM 02 V1,
1998 – 2002
N/A N/A Fig. 13 DI–624
2003 RM 03 V2, BE–93
Page 2 of 6

Chart FACTORY
(Continued) VEHICLE YEAR SYSTEM/REMOTE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
REMOTE
Matrix 2003 N/A N/A Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
1991 – 1994 TDSE / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
MR2 1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1 Guide N/A N/A
2001 – 2003 RS3200 *3 / Fig.5 2003 VIP Manual
1992 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
Paseo N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
1991 – 1994 TDSE / Fig. 1 *1 TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
Previa 1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1 Guide N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3 TSB – AX005–99
Prius 2001 – 2003 N/A N/A Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99 N/A N/A
RAV4 1998 – 2000 RS3000 / Fig. 4
RM 03 V2,
Sequoia 2001 – 2003 N/A N/A Fig. 10 *5
BE–105
1998 Fig. 7
RS3000 / Fig.
Fig 4
1999 TSB – AX005–99 TSB – EL009–98
2000 RS3000 / Fig.4 *4
Sienna Fig. 11 /
2001 – 2002 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 Fig. 12 RM 02 V2, BE–87
2003 N/A N/A RM 03 V2, BE–91
1999 – 2001 RS3000 / Fig. 4 TSB – AX005–99 Fig. 11
Solara RM 02 V2
V2, BE
BE–87
87
2002–2003 N/A N/A Fig. 9 *2
Owner’s
s
1995 TDSE / Fig. 2 *1 Guide
S pra
Supra N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Owner’s
s
T100 N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3 TSB – AX005–99
Tacoma 1998 – 2001 RS3000 / Fig. 4 N/A N/A
2002 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6
2003 RS3200*3 / Fig. 5 2003 VIP Manual *6
Page 3 of 6

Chart FACTORY
REMOTE
Owner’s
s
Tercel N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Owner’s
s
Tr ck
Truck N/A N/A
2000 – 2001 RS3000 / Fig. 4 TSB – AX005–99
T ndra
Tundra N/A N/A
2002 – 2003 RS3200*3 / Fig. 5 2003 VIP Manual
*1 Original style TVSS/TDSE system remotes are no longer available as replacement parts. Black RS3000
remotes (Figure 3) can be used with these systems.
*2 While the outward appearances are the same, there are 3 different remotes of this style (not interchangeable).
Check the FCC ID Number on the back of the remote to verify correct application:
S Avalon 1998 – 1999 FCC ID: HYQ1512Y / 2000 – 2003 FCC ID: HYQ12BAN
S Camry/Solara 2002 – 2003 FCC ID: GQ43VT14T
*3 This is a variant of the RS3200 TDS system, which does not include the security functions. The VIP manual
outlines programming procedures used on these vehicles.
*4 RS3200 was launched prior to the 2001 MY Change Over. Please refer to the 2000 VIP Manual if necessary.
*5 While the outward appearances are the same, there are 2 different remotes of this style (not interchangeable).
Check the FCC ID Number on the back of the remote to verify correct application:
S 1999 – 2002 4Runner – FCC ID: HYQ1512Y
S Sequoia / 2003 4Runner – FCC ID: HYQ12BAN
*6 RS3200 programming procedures were sent as a supplement to the 2000 VIP Manual. This information can
now be found on the TIS system.
*7 The RS3200 system was only available on early production vehicles in the 2003 model year.
Page 4 of 6
Wireless
Transmitter DEALER or PORT INSTALLED SYSTEMS
Identification
Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3.
TVSS/TDSE TVSS/TDSE RS3000 (BLACK)

1990 – 1994 1995 1996 – 1997
RS3000 (GRAY) RS3200* RS3200*

1998 – 2002 2000 – 2003 2000 – 2002
* Panic Button on Back Side
Page 5 of 6
Wireless
Transmitter FACTORY INSTALLED or “ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT” SYSTEMS
Identification
(Continued)
Figure 7. Figure 8.
O.E. 3 Button O.E. 3 Button

1997 – 1999 1995 – 1997
O.E. 4 Button* O.E. 4 Button* O.E. 3 Button*

1998 – 2003 1999 – 2003 1999 – 2003
Figure 12. Figure 13.
O.E. 4 Button* O.E. In–Key

1999 – 2003 1998 – 2003
Page 6 of 6
OBSOLETE
PLEASE SEE EL008–02
ELECTRICAL
Title:
EL010-01
WIRELESS TRANSMITTER &
Technical Service PROGRAMMING GUIDE
BULLETIN Models:
October 26, 2001 All Applicable
Introduction Difficulties during Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming can arise due to
confusion between Toyota Factory Wireless systems and Toyota Port/Dealer installed
systems. This bulletin will assist in identifying the system/correct remote transmitters for
each vehicle, and provide the location of the most accurate programming procedure for
each system.
Applicable S All applicable Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles

Information
System The following table contains all of the necessary information to correctly identify the type
Identification of system installed, and where to go to get programming procedures for each vehicle.
NOTE:
Should a vehicle having both VIP and Factory systems available (as identified in the
following table) be brought in without any remotes (or one non–working remote), use
the following tips to help determine which type of wireless system (O.E. or PIO/DIO)
the vehicle has.
S Look at the Trim Level of the vehicle. Higher–grade vehicles will tend to have O.E.
systems, while entry–grade vehicles will tend to have VIP. For example, the 2001
Camry XLE has Factory RKE, but the LE and CE grades have VIP.
S Look for a “Status Monitor” with a glass breakage sensor and an LED externally
installed into the dashboard or on the center console. Most VIP systems will have
this.
S Locate the ECU (refer to the applicable vehicle VIP Manual installation instructions
for location). Once located, refer to the part label.
S Attempt to perform the factory wireless programming procedure to get a response
from the vehicle. Select the “confirmation mode” and see if any “Lock/Unlock”
response is received, if so, the vehicle has a factory system.

WIRELESS TRANSMITTER & PROGRAMMING GUIDE – EL010-01 October 26, 2001

Chart FACTORY
VEHICLE YEAR SYSTEM/REMOTE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
REMOTE
TVSS Owner’s
1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1
Guide Fig. 8
TSB – EL003
EL003–99
99
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
A l
Avalon TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 – 1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Fig.
RM 02 V2,
V2 BE–99
BE 99
2002 N/A N/A
Owner’s
s
1996
RS3000 / Fig.
Fig 3
Camry
y 1997 TSB – AX005–99
Fig 7
Fig. TSB – EL008–98
EL008 98
1998 – 1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4
2000 – 2001 RS3200 / Fig. 5 Fig. 11 RM 01 V2, BE–86
2000 VIP Manual *6
2002 or 6 Fig. 9 *2 RM 02 V2, 73–8
1990 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
N/A N/A
Celica 1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 – 1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Owner’s
s
Corolla N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 – 2002 RS3000 / Fig. 4
TVSS Owner’s
Cressida 1991 – 1992 TDSE / Fig. 1 *1 N/A N/A
Guide
ECHO 2000 – 2002 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
1990 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
4R nner
4Runner
1998 TSB – AX005–99
RS3000 / Fig.
Fig 4
1999
Fig 10 *5
Fig. RM 02 V2,
V2 BE–98
BE 98
2000 – 2002 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6
Highlander 2001 – 2002 N/A N/A Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
1991 – 1994 TVSS / Fig. 1 *1
TVSS Owner
Owner’s
s
Land Cruiser 1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3 TSB – AX005–99
RM 02 V1,
1998 – 2002 N/A N/A Fig. 13
DI–624
Owner’s
s
MR2 1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1 Guide N/A N/A
2001 – 2002 RS3200 *3 / Fig.5 2000 VIP Manual *6
Page 2 of 5

Chart FACTORY
REMOTE
Owner’s
s
Paseo N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Owner’s
s
Previa 1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1 Guide N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3 TSB – AX005–99
Prius 2001 – 2002 N/A N/A Fig. 11 TSB – EL004–01
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99 N/A N/A
RAV4 1998 – 2000 RS3000 / Fig. 4
RM 02 V2,
Sequoia 2001 – 2002 N/A N/A Fig. 10 *5
BE–100
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4 Fig. 7
1999 RS3000 / Fig. 4 TSB – AX005–99 TSB – EL009–98
Sienna Fig. 11 /
Fi
2000 RS3000 / Fig.4 *4
Fig 12
Fig.
2001 – 2002 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6 RM 02 V2, BE–87
1999 – 2001 RS3000 / Fig. 4 TSB – AX005–99 Fig. 11
Solara RM 02 V2
V2, BE
BE–87
87
2002 N/A N/A Fig. 9 *2
Owner’s
s
1995 TDSE / Fig. 2 *1 Guide
S pra
Supra N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Owner’s
s
T100 N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
1995 TVSS / Fig. 2 *1
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3 TSB – AX005–99
Tacoma N/A N/A
1998 – 2001 RS3000 / Fig. 4
2002 RS3200 / Fig. 5 2000 VIP Manual *6
Owner’s
s
Tercel N/A N/A
1996 – 1997 RS3000 / Fig. 3
TSB – AX005–99
AX005 99
1998 RS3000 / Fig. 4
Owner’s
s
Tr ck
Truck N/A N/A
Tundra 2000 – 2002 RS3000 / Fig. 4 TSB – AX005–99 N/A N/A
Page 3 of 5
Application *1 Original style TVSS/TDSE system remotes are no longer available as replacement parts. Black RS3000
Chart remotes (Figure 3) can be used with these systems.
(Continued) *2 While the outward appearances are the same, there are 3 different remotes of this style (not
interchangeable). Check the FCC ID Number on the back of the remote to verify correct application:
S Avalon 1998 – 1999 FCC ID: HYQ1512Y / 2000 – 2002 FCC ID: HYQ12BAN
S Camry/Solara 2002 FCC ID: GQ43VT14T
*3 The MR2 Spyder uses a variant of the RS3200 TDS system, which does not include the security functions.
RS3200 programming procedures should be used for this vehicle.
*4 RS3200 was launched prior to the 2001 MY Change Over. Please refer to the 2000 VIP Manual if
necessary.
*5 The Sequoia and 4Runner remotes look the same but have different FCC ID Numbers (not interchangeable):
S 4Runner – FCC ID: HYQ1512Y
S Sequoia – FCC ID: HYQ12BAN
*6 RS 3200 programming procedures were sent as a supplement to the 2000 VIP Manual. If you require an
additional copy of this information, it can be ordered from the Material Distribution Center (MDC) through
your parts department: P/N 00107–00282–04.
Wireless
Transmitter DEALER or PORT INSTALLED SYSTEMS
Identification
TVSS/TDSE TVSS/TDSE RS3000 (BLACK)

1990 – 1994 1995 1996 – 1997
RS3000 (GRAY) RS3200 RS3200

1998 – 2002 2000 – 2002 2000 – 2002
Page 4 of 5
Wireless
Transmitter FACTORY INSTALLED or “ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT” SYSTEMS
Identification
(Continued)
Figure 7. Figure 8.
O.E. 3 Button O.E. 3 Button

1997 – 1999 1995 – 1997
O.E. 4 Button* O.E. 4 Button* O.E. 3 Button*

2000 – 2002 1999 – 2002 2000 – 2002
Figure 12. Figure 13.
O.E. 4 Button* O.E. In–Key

1999 – 2002 1998 – 2002
Page 5 of 5
ELECTRICAL
EL011–00
Title:
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT DISABLING
Technical Service PROCEDURE
BULLETIN Models:
October 6, 2000 All Models
Introduction Some customers may request to have the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) on their Toyota
vehicle disabled. These customers may live or work in military bases or in communities
that have light–sensitive gates or guardhouses. This bulletin provides instructions for
disabling the feature on the Toyota vehicles listed below. If the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) have been previously disabled, the information in this bulletin can be used to
enable the feature at the request of the customer.
IMPORTANT:
Please be sure the customer is informed that when the Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
are being disabled, although it is not required by the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards for safety compliance, it has been listed as a safety feature in advertising
brochures. In addition, on models equipped with the Twilight Sentinel feature, the
headlights will be defaulted to a manual system and will no longer function
automatically.
Applicable S All Models equipped with Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (see chart below).
Vehicles
Parts TOOLS & MATERIALS QUANTITY
Information
Wire Harness Repair Kit 1
NOTE:
After referencing the chart, proceed to the repair procedure on the following pages.
Reference MODEL MODEL YEAR ECU CONNECTOR PIN# EWD PG#

Chart 1999 DRL Main Relay D4 1 110
Avalon
2000 Body ECU B5 6 99
1999 23 102
Camry S/D*
2000 DRL Main Relay D6 10 96
Camry Solara* 1999/2000 23 102/96
Celica* 2000 Body ECU B6 17 75
Corolla* 1999/2000 D3 23 84/72
ECHO 2000 D2 12 67
4Runner 2000 99
D8 2
Land Cruiser 1999/2000 90/88
MR2 Spyder 2000 DRL Main Relay D2 12 69
RAV4 1999/2000 D17 72/70
Sienna 1999/2000 D4 83/81
2
Tacoma 2000 D8 115
Tundra 2000 D7 95
* Vehicles equipped with Twilight Sentinel.

Information

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT DISABLING PROCEDURE – EL011–00 October 6, 2000
Repair 1. Disconnect the Battery.

DRL Relay or Body ECU
Procedure
2. Use the locking pick tool from the wire
harness repair kit and back out the
terminal from the appropriate
connector for the DRL Relay or Body
ECU. See the Reference Chart on
Page 1 of this bulletin for pin and
connector information. W/H
3. Insulate the removed terminal using

vinyl electrical tape.
Insulate
Terminal
4. Secure the wire and terminal to the

Tape insulated
outside of the wire harness using vinyl terminal to
electrical tape. outside of
wire harness.
NOTE:
For the 2000 MY Avalon, proceed to
Step 5. For all remaining models,
proceed to Step 6.
5. For 2000 model year Avalon:

A. Order a new terminal with lead that
is the same size and type as the
terminal previously removed from
P.N. 82998–12690
the connector. (PN 82998–12690)
B. Securely attach a 45 cm/ 18 in wire

with an outside diameter of 2.0 mm
or larger to the tail of the new
terminal.
Page 2 of 3
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT DISABLING PROCEDURE – EL011–00 October 6, 2000
Repair C. Securely attach an eyelet with a

Procedure hole size of 7 mm to the end of the
new wire.
D. Insert the new terminal with lead
into the Body ECU Connector B5,
previously vacated by the original
terminal.
E. Properly attach and route the new

wire to the exterior of the existing
wire harness in a manner that will
not allow it to become damaged or
come into contact with any other
circuits.
F. Securely attach the eyelet to the

existing ground point located in the
left kick panel area. (Ground Point
IF)
6. Check that the Daytime Running Light

(DRL) operation has been disabled.
7. Reassemble any interior panels that
were removed to gain access to
components, connectors, etc.
Page 3 of 3
NVH
NV007–00
Title:
DOOR MIRROR WIND NOISE

March 31, 2000
TSB Update Notice:

The information contained in this TSB updates The information contained in this TSB
updates BO019–99 dated December 3, 1999. Revised text is red and underlined.
Introduction Wind/road noise heard around the door mirrors of some Japan produced Camry vehicles
may be caused by an improperly positioned mirror wire harness grommet and/or harness
connector.
Applicable S 1997 through 1999 Camry vehicles. (Japan produced only)

Vehicles
Production PLANT STARTING VIN

Change
JT2BG22K * X0367325
Information
JT2BG28K * X0367352
TMC
JT2BF22K * X0227381
JT2BF28K * X0227306

Information
Adjust the Wire Harness Grommet 87940–XXXXX–XX (LH)
BD0009 0.4 59 57
and/or Connector 87910–XXXXX–XX (RH)
Repair 1. Carefully pry off the door speaker

Procedure Connector
cover and remove the nut using a 10 and Grommet
mm socket that secures the speaker
to the door.
2. Look through the door mirror harness Speaker
access hole and check the position of
Mirror Housing
the wire harness grommet and wire
harness connector – the harness
connector should be inside the
Connector
grommet and the grommet should be Grommet
fully seated in the mirror housing.
CORRECT POSITION

DOOR MIRROR WIND NOISE – NV007–00 March 31, 2000
Repair Examples of improperly installed assemblies are shown below:

Procedure
(Continued) INCORRECT POSITION A INCORRECT POSITION B INCORRECT POSITION C
Mirror Housing Mirror Housing Mirror Housing
Grommet Grommet
Connector Grommet Connector Connector
3. To reposition the grommet and/or

Outside Door
harness connector onto the mirror Rear View
Mirror
Mirror
housing:
S Remove the mirror housing (the
remaining 2 nuts) from the door
and carefully unclip the mirror
from the housing. This will allow Connector Mirror Housing
easier access and reinstallation of
the grommet and/or harness
connector.
S Reposition the grommet so it is Grommet
fully seated to the mirror housing. CORRECT POSITION
Assure the harness connector is
inside the grommet.
NOTE: Outside Rear

View Mirror
Refer to the 1998 Camry Repair Manual Cover
pages BO–23 through BO–26.
4. Reinstall the door mirror and speaker

assembly:
S Secure the mirror to the housing.
S Properly align and reinstall the
Door Trim
mirror assembly to the door. 5.5 (55, 49, ftSlbf)
Tighten the upper and forward
nuts. Torque: 5.5 NSm (56 NSm (kgfScm, ftSlbf) : Specified Torque
KgfScm, 49 inSlb)
S Reinstall the door speaker (one
nut at the lower bracket) and
speaker cover onto the door as
INCORRECT CORRECT
shown in the illustration. Torque:
5.5 NSm (56 KgfScm, 49 inSlb)
S Assure the power mirror
functions properly.
NOTE:
Do NOT mount the UPPER speaker
bracket behind the nut.
Page 2 of 2
PAINT
PA002–99
Title:
1999 PAINT AND REFINISH FORMULA
Technical Service CODES
BULLETIN Models:
March 12, 1999 All 1999 Models
Introduction Attached for your reference is a list of all 1999 OEM paint codes and refinish paint codes
for the following paint manufacturers:
BASF, DuPont, ICI Autocolor, PPG, Sherwin Williams, Sikkens,
Spies–Hecker, and Standox
NOTE:
The body color code is on the vehicle Certification Regulation Label, located on the
left front door “B” Pillar or door rear lower surface.
Please contact your local paint representative for the actual paint
mixing formulas or if you need help in color matching.
Affected S All 1999 Models.

Vehicles

Information
Paint Codes & COLOR ICI SHERWIN SPIES–

COLOR NAME BASF DUPONT PPG SIKKENS STANDOX
Color Names CODE AUTOCOLOR WILLIAMS HECKER
040 Super White TOY040 W8430 KK47 90288 35000 TOY040 17143 040
N9033 TA99G 90673 40881

049 White Pearl TOY049 TOY049 97746 049
L9018 PC61B 90674 40882
L9246 PF76B 90822 42872 98125

051 Diamond White Pearl TOY051 TOY051 051
L9247 TD86G 90826 42873 16329
056 Natural White TOY056 F1858 BAB5 91452 52893 TOY056 15217 056

1999 PAINT AND REFINISH FORMULA CODES – PA002–99 March 12, 1999
Paint Codes & COLOR

COLOR NAME BASF DUPONT
ICI
PPG
SHERWIN
SIKKENS
SPIES–
STANDOX
CODE
Color Names AUTOCOLOR WILLIAMS HECKER
(Continued)
181 Silver Metallic TOY181 L9245 C523B 34878 44337 TOY181 98127 181
199 Alpine Silver Metallic TOY199 L9990 5TX1B 4900 48976 TOY199 70706 199
1A0 Platinum Metallic TOY1A0 N9923 6ED5B 4896 49700 TOY1A0 70809 1A0
1A2 Topaz Metallic TOY1A2 F0016 6ED9B 4898 49701 TOY1A2 70855 1A2
1A3 Silver Metallic TOY1A3 F0697 7DJ9B 35841 53001 TOY1A3 72319 1A3
1A5 Desert Dune Pearl TOY1A5 F1458 8NH3B 36090 52139 TOY1A5 72759 1A5
1B1 Champagne Pearl TOY1B1 F2186 FLT9B 5252 53074 TOY1B1 20699 1B1
1B2 Antique Sage Pearl TOY1B2 F2201 HRE5B 5324 54757 TOY1B2 73622 1B2
1B9 Quiksilver FX TOY1B9 F4996 LJC5B 5449 56738 TOY1B9 74332 1B9
1C0 Millennium Silver TOY1C0 F4928 LCJ4B 36643 56793 TOY1C0 74500 1C0
1C3 River Rock Green Mica TOY1C3 F4513 LVT2B 48703 57226 TOY1C3 74488 1C3
1C4 Silverstream Op TOY1C4 F5137 NPD6B 5560 57927 TOY1C4 74771 1C4
1C7 Thunder Gray Metallic TOY1C7 F5581 PEJ6B 5600 58581 TOY1C7 74806 1C7
1C8 Lunar Mist Metallic TOY1C8 F8569 PEJ7B 5539 58582 TOY1C8 74807 1C8
202 Black TOY202 FO220 0122 95100 57871 TOY202 72941 202
204 Black Metallic TOY204 H8645 A237B 9624 35533 TOY204 96020 204
205 Satin Black Metallic TOY205 L9024 B941B 9756 40888 TOY205 97765 205
3E5 Super Red TOY3E5 W8431 KK41 72717 35001 TOY3E5 38236 3E5
3H7 Cardinal Red TOY3H7 L9026 WJ91 73279 40890 TOY3H7 38805 3H7
3J8 Prussian Red Pearl TOY3J8 W9463 PT73B 4596 46590 TOY3J8 99827 3J8
3K4 Sunfire Red Pearl TOY3K4 W9546 PM54B 4511 46144 TOY3K4 99722 3K4
3L2 Renaissance Red TOY3L2 L9992 5TX3B 4902 48978 TOY3L2 30491 3L2
3L5 Radiant Red TOY3L5 F2688 GNK8 5287 54291 TOY3L5 33476 3L5
3M5 Sandrift Metallic TOY3M5 F3531 LCP1B 5444 56742 TOY3M5 34261 3M5
3M6 Napa Burgundy Pearl TOY3M6 F3747 LJC2B 5447 56739 TOY3M6 34262 3M6
3M8 Venetian Red Pearl TOY3M8 F4929 LCJ5B 5561 56795 TOY3M8 34300 3M8
3M9 Baroque Red Metallic TOY3M9 F4464 KWB9B 5421 56658 TOY3M9 34257 3M9
3N1 Cinnabar Pearl TOY3N1 F4483 LPC9B 5435 56752 TOY3N1 34254 3N1
3N2 Mahogany Pearl TOY3N2 F1744 LVT3B 28763 57227 TOY3N2 34317 3N2
3N5 Red Flame Metallic TOY3N5 F5138 NPD7B 5563 57928 TOY3N5 34587 3N5
3N6 Vintage Red Pearl TOY3N6 F8568 PEB8B 5525 58338 TOY3N6 34622 3N6
4J6 Sadona Sunset Metallic TOY4J6 L9028 B945B 26601 40892 TOY4J6 97753 4J6
4M4 Sierra Beige Metallic TOY4M4 H9879 4SS7B 4743 47606 TOY4M4 20157 4M4
Page 2 of 5
Paint Codes & COLOR

ICI
PPG
SHERWIN
SIKKENS
SPIES–
STANDOX
CODE
Color Names AUTOCOLOR WILLIAMS HECKER
(Continued)
4M7 Oyster Pearl TOY4M7 K9968 5MK6B 27579 48841 TOY4M7 10655 4M7
Cashmere Beige
4M9 TOY4M9 N9924 6ED6B 4903 49702 TOY4M9 20261 4M9
Metallic
4N5 Vintage Rose Metallic TOY4N5 F2716 HYV5B 5339 54862 TOY4N5 15817 4N5
4N7 Sable Pearl TOY4N7 F3748 LJC3B 5448 56740 TOY4N7 22236 4N7
4P1 Antique Bronze Metallic TOY4P1 F4465 KWC1B 5422 56659 TOY4P1 81642 4P1
4P3 Desert Bronze Metallic LEX4P3 F7145 LVT4B 28764 57228 LEX4P3 22317 4P3
4P5 Autumn Blaze Metallic TOY4P5 F5583 PEC1B 5526 58340 TOY4P5 34623 4P5
4P6 Autumn Red Mica TOY4P6 F5139 NPD8B 5565 57929 TOY4P6 34588 4P6
578 Golden Sand Metallic TOY578 F3749 LNX6B 5457 56741 TOY578 22189 578
6M1 Dark Emerald Pearl TOY6M1 W9542 PM72B 4595 46589 TOY6M1 99746 6M1
6M3 Silver Spruce Metallic TOY6M3 W9514 D381B 4474 45931 TOY6M3 99679 6M3
6N7 Sierra Green Metallic TOY6N7 F1036 7P07B 5047 51163 TOY6N7 61391 6N7
6P2 Classic Green Pearl TOY6P2 F1850 BAA7B 5173 52889 TOY6P2 61953 6P2
Deep Jewel
6P3 TOY6P3 F1805 ARD3B 5166 52887 TOY6P3 61928 6P3
Grean Pearl
6P4 Surfside Green Mica TOY6P4 F2690 GNL1B 5289 54293 TOY6P4 64018 6P4
6Q7 Imperial Jade Mica TOY6Q7 F3750 KWC2B 5423 56660 TOY6Q7 68096 6Q7
6R1 Woodland Pearl TOY6R1 F7147 LVT6B 5566 57230 TOY6R1 65321 6R1
6R3 Fairway Green Pearl TOY6R3 F5140 NPD9B 5567 57930 TOY6R3 65706 6R3
760 Mystic Teal Mica TOY760 F3533 LCP2B 5445 56258 TOY760 65225 760
762 Aqua Blue Metallic TOY762 F8543 PEJ8B 5595 58693 TOY762 56812 762
8L3 Blue Velvet Pearl TOY8L3 F2239 FRC7B 5328 54032 TOY8L3 54676 8L3
8L4 Atlantis Blue Mica TOY8L4 F1898 BGT9B 19705 52994 TOY8L4 54483 8L4
8L5 Royal Sapphire Blue TOY8L5 F2728 HDJ4B 5329 54485 TOY8L5 55068 8L5
8L7 Stellar Blue Pearl TOY8L7 F2059 ETB9B 5206 53072 TOY8L7 54562 8L7
8L9 Denim Blue Mica TOY8L9 F2722 JCD1B 5443 54872 TOY8L9 55325 8L9
8M5 Mista Blue Mica TOY8M5 F3562 KBA1B 5434 56261 TOY8M5 55825 8M5
8M8 Twilight Blue Pearl TOY8M8 F7274 LXY2B 190925 57452 TOY8M8 56542 8M8
8N1 Horizon Blue Metallic TOY8N1 F5223 PEC2B 5527 58341 TOY8N1 56813 8N1
930 Blue Dusk Pearl TOY930 F2723 HRE6B 5330 54758 TOY930 40713 930
931 Frosted Iris Metallic TOY931 F2724 HRE7B 5331 54759 TOY931 40714 931
938 Mystic Purple Mica TOY938 F3532 KWB7B 5420 56656 TOY938 40930 938
Page 3 of 5
Land Cruiser COLOR

ICI
PPG
SHERWIN
SIKKENS
SPIES–
STANDOX
CODE
Cladding AUTOCOLOR WILLIAMS HECKER
Codes
Cashmere
UCA46 TOYUCA46 H9752 D700B 27345 46754 TOYUA46 20631 UCA46
Beige Metallic
UCA76 Medium Gray Metallic TOYA76 F1114 7VT6B 35973 51188 TOY9418 72547 UCA76
UCA78 Dark Taupe Metallic TOY9420 TOYUCA78 F1116 27888 51186 80371 UCA78 7VV1B
Paint COLOR
COR SOL CAM AVL CEL SNA RAV RAVev 4RN TAC L–C
Applications & CODE
Types 040
049
051
056
181
199
1A0
1A2
1A3
1A5
1B1
1B2
1B9
1C0
1C3
1C4
1C7
1C8
202
204
205
3E5
3H7
3J8
3K4
3L2
3L5
3M5
3M6
3M8
3M9
Page 4 of 5
Paint COLOR
COR SOL CAM AVL CEL SNA RAV RAVev 4RN TAC L–C
Applications & CODE
Types 3N1
(Continued)
3N2
3N5
3N6
4J6
4M4
4M7
4M9
4N5
4N7
4P1
4P3
4P5
4P6
578
6M1
6M3
6N7
6P2
6P3
6P4
6Q7
6R1
6R3
760
762
8L3
8L4
8L5
8L7
8L9
8M5
8M8
8N1
930
931
938
Page 5 of 5
PAINT
PA003-02
Title:
REFINISHING REPLACEMENT
Technical Service BUMPER COVERS
BULLETIN Models:
June 14, 2002 All ’83 – ’03 Models
Introduction In cases where a bumper cover is being replaced, a special preparation process is
necessary to assure the refinish is customer acceptable. This bulletin provides the
recommended refinishing procedure for new bumper covers.

Vehicles

Tools &
Mild Soap –– Ph neutral (no wax type) 3Mt Car Shampoo (or equivalent)
Material
Sanding Pad 3Mt ScotchBrite (Gray) 37448
Sanding Paste
Wax, Grease, & Silicone Remover
See Paint Manufacturer’s Recommendations
Plastic Part Adhesion Promoter
Primer and Paint

Information
Refinishing 1. Mix a solution of mild soap (car wash soap with no wax additives) and clean water.
Procedure
NOTE:
Carefully follow mixing instructions on the soap container. Too much soap or too
much water may cause surface contamination or rinsing difficulty.

REFINISHING REPLACEMENT BUMPER COVERS – PA003-02 June 14, 2002
Refinishing 2. Scrub the bumper covers with the soap and water solution, making sure all
Procedure difficult–to–reach areas are thoroughly cleaned.
(Continued)
3. Rinse the entire bumper cover with clean deionized water, making sure all
difficult–to–reach areas are thoroughly rinsed.
4. Dry the surface with a clean towel before water dries on the surface. Clean, dry
compressed air from an oil–less compressor may be substituted for drying with a
towel.
5. Degrease the surface with a wax, grease, and silicone remover.
NOTE:
Lacquer thinner or brake cleaner will NOT remove silicone. You MUST use a wax,
grease, and silicone remover. Carefully follow application instructions on the container
label. Fish eyes or other paint irregularities may result from not following instructions.
6. Apply a generous amount of sanding paste with a gray 3Mt ScotchBrite pad. Only a
gray pad should be used during the sanding process. Sand the entire bumper cover
surface. Be sure all difficult–to–reach areas are thoroughly sanded.
7. Clean the entire bumper cover with car wash soap and water. Be sure all
difficult–to–reach areas are thoroughly cleaned.
8. Rinse the entire bumper with clean deionized water. Be sure all difficult–to–reach
areas are thoroughly rinsed.
9. Degrease the surface with an anti–static plastic parts cleaner and a white body shop
towel or paper towel.
NOTE:
Never use a red shop towel to wipe the surface (contains silicone).
10. Assure the bumper is firmly held in place to a steady fixture.

11. Apply a plastic parts adhesion promoter to the surface, according to the
manufacturer ’s recommendations.
12. Apply plastic parts primer to the surface, according to the paint manufacturer’s
recommendations.
13. Since bumpers are made of flexible plastic urethane material, use a two–part
urethane finish paint system with plasticizer (flex agent) for all bumper and cladding
repairs. Apply the appropriate top coat to the surface, according to the paint
manufacturer ’s recommendations.
14. If heat is applied to cure the paint, assure the surface temperature does not exceed
80C (176F.)
For additional information concerning the refinish process for plastic bumpers/cladding,
please contact your respective refinish paint manufacturer’s local representative.
Scrub with
Wash with Rinse & Degrease Wash with
Sanding
Soap & Water Towel Dry Step 1 Soap & Water
Paste
Apply
Rinse & Degrease Apply Apply Top
Adhesion
Towel Dry Step 2 Primer Coat
Promoter
Page 2 of 2
PAINT
PA004–99
Title:
TWO-TONE PAINT COLOR
BULLETIN ’99 Camry Limited Edition

June 11, 1999
Introduction The following information outlines the two–tone painting scheme on 1999 Camry Limited
Edition.
Affected S 1999 Camry Limited Edition

Vehicles
Production COLOR NO. COMBINATION TWO–TONE NAMES

Change
Oyster Pearl/Antique Sage
Information 2GP 4M7/1B2
Pearl accent
Diamond White Pearl/
28Y 051/4M7
Oyster Pearl Accent

Information

PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG001–00
Title:
2000 TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
Technical Service INFORMATION
BULLETIN Models:
January 7, 2000 All Models
Introduction Toyota Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) continue to be one of the most current sources
of technical information available. To ensure complete access to this reference source,
use the following steps:
S All 1999 Technical Service Bulletins should be relocated to a temporary binder.
S Place this bulletin along with all 2000 TSBs into the emptied TSB binder.
S During the month of March, all dealers will receive bound books containing all TSBs
issued in 1999. Upon receipt, discard all 1999 TSBs and refer only to the bound
book for reference.
S Additional copies of 1994 through 2000 TSBs are available to all Toyota dealerships
through the Toyota Non–Parts System (MDC NPM System) by using the following
Part Number designation:
TSB Part Number Prefix

TSB Chapter Code
Chapter Code Sequence Number
Year
00406 – PG 001 – 99
Parts MATERIAL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

Information
TSB Binder, tabs and all 2000 bulletins issued to date TSB00
New TSB Binder and tabs ONLY 00406–61012
1999 TSB Bound Book 00442–99002*
1998 TSB Bound Book 00442–98005
1997 TSB Bound Book 00442–97011
1996 TSB Bound Book 00442–97003
1995 TSB Bound Book 00401–43055
* Available in March, 2000.
NOTE:
If you have any questions concerning Toyota Technical Service Bulletins, please
contact your District Service Manager.

PG001-03
Title:
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX
Models:
Technical Service
BULLETIN All Models
February 28, 2003
Introduction Corrections have been made in the repair manuals listed below. Corrections available
in the last quarter are marked in red. The Toyota Technical Information system (TIS) is
the best way to access up–to–date service information.
NOTE:
When ordering a technical publication (i.e., Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring Diagram)
from the MDC, any Correction Page(s) associated with that particular Publication will
automatically be included with your order.
Parts Correction Pages are available through the Dealer Support Material Network (MDC NPM
Information System) via the corresponding part numbers from the following table.
Publication Number Page(s) Part Number
4Runner 2003 4Runner . . . . . . . . RM1001–U1 . . . 03–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–12131

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1001–U2 . . . 29–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 29–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 25–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–22146
...................................... 26–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 26–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 27–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1001–U1 . . . 05–614 to 05–616 . . 00400–RM100–12156
...................................... 05–712 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–713 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–713–1 to 05–713–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–724 to 05–737 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–811 to 05–813 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓

REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG001-03 February 28, 2003
Avalon 2000 Avalon . . . . . . . . . . RM746–U2 . . . . BE–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM746–2167B

...................................... BE–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BE–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BE–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2001 Avalon . . . . . . . . . . RM808–U2 . . . . BE–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM808–2166B
...................................... BE–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BE–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BE–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 Avalon . . . . . . . . . . RM872–U2 . . . . BE–96 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM872–2088B
...................................... BE–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM872–2165B
...................................... BE–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BE–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BE–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Camry 2002 Camry . . . . . . . . . . EWD461U . . . . . 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD46–12107

...................................... 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2003 Camry . . . . . . . . . . EWD506U . . . . . 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD50–62108
...................................... 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Corolla 2003 Corolla . . . . . . . . . . EWD484U . . . . . 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD48–42150
Highlander 2001 Highlander . . . . . . RM837–U2 . . . . 11–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM837–2140B

...................................... 11–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 Highlander . . . . . . RM918–U2 . . . . 11–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM918–2141B
...................................... 11–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2003 Highlander . . . . . . RM987–U2 . . . . 11–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM987–2157B
...................................... 11–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–14–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–14–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 11–27–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 2 of 4
Matrix 2003 Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . EWD486U . . . . . 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD48–62151

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM940–U1 . . . . 05–833 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM940–2116
...................................... 05–834 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–820 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM940–2159
...................................... 05–821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–826 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–829 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–837 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM940–U2 . . . . 73–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM940–2163B
MR2 Spyder 2001 MR2 Spyder . . . . . RM801–U1 . . . . DI–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM801–2105

...................................... DI–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–183 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–184–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–184–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 MR2 Spyder . . . . . RM900–U1 . . . . DI–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM900–2106
...................................... DI–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM900–U2 . . . . BO–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM900–2137
Prius 2001 Prius . . . . . . . . . . . . RM778–U1 . . . . DI–680 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–2095

2002 Prius . . . . . . . . . . . . RM883–U1 . . . . DI–687 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM883–2096
2003 Prius . . . . . . . . . . . . RM957–U1 . . . . DI–687 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM957–2097
Page 3 of 4
Sequoia 2003 Sequoia . . . . . . . . . RM959–U1 . . . . DI–304 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–12128

...................................... DI–312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–330 to DI–333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–347 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–358 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–360 to DI–362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... DI–377–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Sienna 2001 Sienna . . . . . . . . . . EWD420U . . . . . 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD42–2121

...................................... 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 Sienna . . . . . . . . . . EWD454U . . . . . 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD45–2122
...................................... 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2003 Sienna . . . . . . . . . . EWD490U . . . . . 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD49–02123
...................................... 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Tacoma 2002 Tacoma . . . . . . . . . RM921–U1 . . . . DI–510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM921–2089
Tundra 2000 Tundra . . . . . . . . . . EWD367U . . . . . 129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD36–72133

...................................... 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2001 Tundra . . . . . . . . . . EWD429U . . . . . 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD42–92134
...................................... 208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 Tundra . . . . . . . . . . EWD468U . . . . . 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD46–82135
...................................... 208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... M26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 4 of 4
PG002–00
Title:
BULLETIN All Models

December 31, 2000
Introduction Corrections have been made in the repair manuals listed below. Corrections available in
the last quarter are marked in red, and have already been mailed to all dealers.
NOTE:
When ordering a technical publication (i.e. Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring Diagram)
from the MDC, and Correction Page(s) associated with that particular Publication will
Information System) via the corresponding part numbers from the following table:
Avalon 2001 Avalon . . . . . . . . RM746–U1 . . . . . DI–259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM746–Z107

..................................... DI–260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–317–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–317–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Celica 2000 Celica . . . . . . . . . RM744–U1 . . . . . SS–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM744–9094A

..................................... SS–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SS–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM744–U2 . . . . . SA–02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM744–9094B
..................................... SA–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM744–Z066
..................................... EM–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... EM–12–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SF–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM744–Z130
..................................... SF–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SF–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SF–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓

REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-00 Revised December 31, 2000
Celica 2001 Celica . . . . . . . . . RM818–U2 . . . . . SF–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM818–Z130

(Continued) ..................................... SF–12 ................................. ↓
..................................... SF–13 ................................. ↓
..................................... SF–15 ................................. ↓
ECHO 2000 ECHO . . . . . . . . RM750–U . . . . . . BR–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM591–8121

..................................... BR–27 ................................. ↓
..................................... BR–28 ................................. ↓
..................................... BR–31 ................................. ↓
..................................... PP–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM591–8063
..................................... SS–37 ................................. ↓
..................................... SS–38 ................................. ↓
..................................... BR–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM750–Z140
2001 ECHO . . . . . . . . RM816–U . . . . . . BR–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM816–Z140
Highlander 2001 Highlander . . . . EWD442–U . . . . . 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD44–2Z149

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Land Cruiser 2000 Land Cruiser . . . RM722–U1 . . . . . DI–305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM722–Z018

..................................... DI–306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SS–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM722–9093A
..................................... SS–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM722–U2 . . . . . SA–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM722–9093B
..................................... SA–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BR–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM722–Z038
MR2 Spyder 2000 MR2 . . . . . . . . . . RM760–U . . . . . . BR–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM760–Z141

2001 MR2 . . . . . . . . . . RM801–U . . . . . . BR–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM801–Z141
Page 2 of 4
Prius 2001 Prius . . . . . . . . . . BRM09–6E . . . . . BP–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–BRM09–6Z112

..................................... BP–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BP–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BP–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BP–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BP–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BP–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... PC–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM778–U1 . . . . . DI–105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–Z093
..................................... DI–106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SS–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–Z123
..................................... DI–504 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–593–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–593–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–593–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... HV–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–Z120A
..................................... DI–661–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–665 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–666 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–671 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM778–U2 . . . . . BE–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–Z151
..................................... BE–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–Z120B
..................................... BE–46–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
RAV4 1996 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM447–U . . . . . . SA–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM447–Z071

1997 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM505–U . . . . . . SA–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM505–Z071
1998 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM595–U . . . . . . SA–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM595–Z071
1999 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM668–U2 . . . . . SA–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM668–Z071
2000 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM711–U2 . . . . . SA–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM711–Z071
2001 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM797–U1 . . . . . DI–489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–Z096
..................................... SS–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–Z106A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM797–U2 . . . . . SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–Z106B
..................................... SA–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–Z071
Sequoia 2001 Sequoia . . . . . . . RM832–U1 . . . . . SS–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM832–Z139
Sienna 1998 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM594–U . . . . . . SR–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–9095

..................................... SR–47 ................................. ↓
..................................... SR–48 ................................. ↓
1999 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM657–U . . . . . . SR–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–9095
..................................... SR–47 ................................. ↓
..................................... SR–48 ................................. ↓
Page 3 of 4
Sienna 2000 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM701–U . . . . . . SR–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM701–9095

(Continued) ..................................... SR–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM701–Z121
..................................... DI–388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–389–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–389–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–389–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Tacoma 1998 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM576–U1 . . . . . DI–349 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM576–Z105

..................................... DI–350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
1998 Tacoma Suppl. . RM614–U . . . . . . PP–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM614–9123
..................................... PP–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SS–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
1999 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM673–U1 . . . . . SS–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM673–9123A
..................................... DI–373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM673–Z105
..................................... DI–374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM673–U2 . . . . . SA–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM673–9123B
..................................... SA–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2000 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM712–U1 . . . . . SS–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM712–9123A
..................................... DI–415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM712–Z105
..................................... DI–416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM712–U2 . . . . . SA–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM712–9123B
..................................... SA–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2001 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM835–U1 . . . . . DI–340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM835–Z105
..................................... DI–341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Tundra 2000 Tundra . . . . . . . . RM682–U2 . . . . . TR–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM682–Z055

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 4 of 4
PG002–99
Title:
BULLETIN All Models

December 24, 1999
Introduction Corrections have been made in the repair manuals listed below. Corrections available in
the last quarter are marked in red, and have already been mailed to all dealers.
Information System) via the corresponding part numbers from the following table:
NOTE:
When ordering a technical publication (i.e. Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring Diagram)
from the MDC, and Correction Page(s) associated with that particular Publication will
Avalon 1999 Avalon . . . . . . . . RM598–U . . . . . . BE–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM598–8029

..................................... BE–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BE–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM656–U . . . . . . DI–116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM656–8121
..................................... DI–121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
4Runner 1998 4Runner . . . . . . RM580–U1 . . . . . DI–331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM580–8087

..................................... DI–338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
1999 4Runner . . . . . . RM663–U2 . . . . . BE–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM663–9005
..................................... BE–92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM663–8117
Camry 1998 Camry . . . . . . . . RM589–U1 . . . . . DI–107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM580–8087

..................................... DI–112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... DI–127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM589–U2 . . . . . SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM589–9002
1999 Camry . . . . . . . . RM654–U2 . . . . . SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM654–9002

REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-99 REVISED December 24, 1999

Celica 1998 Celica . . . . . . . . . RM613–U . . . . . . D1–90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM598–8029
..................................... D1–95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM613–9002
1999 Celica . . . . . . . . . RM660–U . . . . . . D1–96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM660–8121
..................................... D1–101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM660–8121
..................................... SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM660–9002
2000 Celica . . . . . . . . . RM774–U1 . . . . . D1–280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM774–9063
..................................... SS–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM774–9078A
..................................... SS–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM774–U2 . . . . . SA–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM774–9078B
..................................... SA–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Celica 1998 Corolla . . . . . . . . RM591–U1 . . . . . D1–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM591–8121

..................................... D1–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM591–8063
..................................... D1–182 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–183 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–188 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
1999 Corolla . . . . . . . . RM655–U . . . . . . D1–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM655–8121
..................................... D1–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 2 of 5
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002–99 Revised December 24, 1999

Corolla 1999 Corolla . . . . . . . . RM665–U . . . . . . D1–91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM655–8121
(Continued)
Land Cruiser 1998 Land Cruiser . . . RM615–U . . . . . . PP–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... PP–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... PP–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... PP–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... SS–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
..................................... TR–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM615–U1 . . . . . D1–293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–8046
..................................... D1–299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–453 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–8117
..................................... SS–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–9017
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM615–U2 . . . . . EM–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–9038
..................................... BE–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–9022
..................................... BR–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–8031
..................................... SA–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–9017A
..................................... SA–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–9028
..................................... SR–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
1999 Land Cruiser . . . RM661–U1 . . . . . D1–122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–8121
..................................... D1–127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–8117
..................................... SS–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–9017
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM661–U2 . . . . . BE–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–9022
Page 3 of 5
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-99 REVISED December 24, 1999

Land Cruiser 1999 Land Cruiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EM–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–9038
(Continued) ..................................... SA–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–9017A
..................................... SA–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–9028
..................................... SR–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SR–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Sienna 1998 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM594–U . . . . . . BO–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–9023

..................................... BO–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BO–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–9065
..................................... D1–187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–8088
..................................... D1–224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–385 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–8066
..................................... D1–386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–9002
1999 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM657–U . . . . . . BE–84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–9011
..................................... BO–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–9021
..................................... BO–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... BO–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–9065
..................................... D1–220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–8088
..................................... D1–257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–9022
2000 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM701–U . . . . . . D1–217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM701–9065
..................................... D1–218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 4 of 5
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002–99 Revised December 24, 1999

Sienna 2000 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM701–U . . . . . . D1–221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM701–9065
(Continued) ..................................... D1–222 ................................ ↓
..................................... D1–223 ................................ ↓
..................................... D1–224 ................................ ↓
..................................... D1–225 ................................ ↓
..................................... D1–226 ................................ ↓
..................................... D1–227 ................................ ↓
Solara 1999 Solara . . . . . . . . RM649–U1 . . . . . D1–110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM649–8121

..................................... D1–115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... D1–306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
..................................... SA–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–9002
Supra 1999 Supra . . . . . . . . . RM408–U2 . . . . . SA–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM408–9007

..................................... SA–26 ................................. ↓
..................................... SA–28 ................................. ↓
1996 Supra . . . . . . . . . RM444 . . . . . . . . . SA–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM444–9007
..................................... SA–19 ................................. ↓
..................................... SA–24 ................................. ↓
1997 Supra . . . . . . . . . RM502 . . . . . . . . . SA–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM502–9007
..................................... SA–19 ................................. ↓
..................................... SA–24 ................................. ↓
1998 Supra . . . . . . . . . RM587–U1 . . . . . PP–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM587–9007A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM587–U2 . . . . . SA–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM587–9007B
..................................... SA–28 ................................. ↓
..................................... SA–31 ................................. ↓
Tacoma 1998 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM576–U1 . . . . . D1–351 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM576–8038
Tundra 2000 Tundra . . . . . . . . RM682–U1 . . . . . SS–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM682–9077A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM682–U2 . . . . . BR–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM682–9077B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BR–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 5 of 5
PG002-02
Title:
BULLETIN All Models

September 30, 2002
Introduction Corrections have been made in the repair manuals listed below. Corrections available
in the last quarter are marked in red, have already been mailed to all dealers, and are
updated in TIS.
NOTE:
When ordering a technical publication (i.e., Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring Diagram)
from the MDC, any Correction Page(s) associated with that particular Publication will
Information System) via the corresponding part numbers from the following table.
4Runner 2001 4Runner . . . . . . . . RM796–U1 . . . . DI–477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM796–2086

2002 4Runner . . . . . . . . EWD471–U . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD471–2050
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM887–U1 . . . . DI–487 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM887–2087
Avalon 2002 Avalon . . . . . . . . . . EWD45–3U . . . . 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD45–32038

...................................... 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM872–U1 . . . . DI–232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM872–2054
...................................... DI–530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM872–2052
Camry 1998 Camry . . . . . . . . . . RM589–U2 . . . . BE–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM589–2005B

...................................... BE–65 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–66 ............................... ↓
1999 Camry . . . . . . . . . . RM654–U2 . . . . BE–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM654–2005B
...................................... BE–66 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–67 ............................... ↓
2000 Camry . . . . . . . . . . RM742–U2 . . . . BE–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM742–2005B
...................................... BE–66 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–67 ............................... ↓
2001 Camry . . . . . . . . . . RM819–U2 . . . . BE–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM819–2005B
...................................... BE–67 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–68 ............................... ↓

REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-02 Revised September 30, 2002
Camry 2002 Camry . . . . . . . . . . EWD46–1U . . . . 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD46–12039

(Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM881–U1 . . . . 05–418 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM881–2054
...................................... 05–1230 . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM881–2077
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM881–U2 . . . . 73–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM881–2060B
...................................... 73–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 73–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Celica 2000 Celica . . . . . . . . . . . RM744–U1 . . . . DI–510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM744–2074

2001 Celica . . . . . . . . . . . RM818–U1 . . . . DI–511 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM818–2075
2002 Celica . . . . . . . . . . . RM902–U1 . . . . DI–514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM902–2076
Corolla 2003 Corolla . . . . . . . . . . RM938–U1 . . . . 05–169 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM938–2054
ECHO 2000 ECHO . . . . . . . . . . RM750–U . . . . . BE–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM750–2011

...................................... BE–66–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2001 ECHO . . . . . . . . . . RM816–U . . . . . BE–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM816–2011
...................................... BE–66–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 ECHO . . . . . . . . . . RM884–U . . . . . BE–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM884–2011
...................................... BE–66–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Highlander 2002 Highlander . . . . . . RM918–U1 . . . . 05–919 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM918–2053

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM918–U2 . . . . 82–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM918–2058B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Land Cruiser 1998 Land Cruiser . . . . . RM615–U2 . . . . BE–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM615–2006B

...................................... BE–81 ............................... ↓
1999 Land Cruiser . . . . . RM661–U2 . . . . BE–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–2006B
...................................... BE–83 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–83 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–92 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–93 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–92 ............................... ↓
...................................... BE–93 ............................... ↓
Prius 2001 Prius . . . . . . . . . . . . RM778–U1 . . . . DI–654 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–2072

2002 Prius . . . . . . . . . . . . RM883–U1 . . . . DI–669 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM883–2073
Page 2 of 3
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-02 Revised September 30, 2002
RAV4 2001 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . . . RM797–U1 . . . . DI–450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–2084

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM797–U2 . . . . BE–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–2012B
...................................... BO–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM797–2040B
...................................... BO–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BO–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BO–11–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . . . RM891–U1 . . . . DI–450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM891–2085
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM891–U2 . . . . BE–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM891–2012B
...................................... BO–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM891–2040B
...................................... BO–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BO–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... BO–11–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Sequoia 2002 Sequoia . . . . . . . . . RM886–U1 . . . . DI–253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM886–2054
Sienna 1998 Sienna . . . . . . . . . . RM594–U . . . . . BE–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM594–2013

1999 Sienna . . . . . . . . . . RM657–U . . . . . BE–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM657–2013
2000 Sienna . . . . . . . . . . RM701–U . . . . . BE–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM701–2013
Solara 2002 Solara . . . . . . . . . . RM882–U1 . . . . DI–446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM882–2054
Tacoma 2002 Tacoma . . . . . . . . . EWD478–U . . . . 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD–2051

...................................... 4 .................................... ↓
Tundra 2002 Tundra . . . . . . . . . . RM885–U1 . . . . DI–371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM885–2054
Page 3 of 3
PRODUCT GENERAL
INFORMATION
PG95-006
JULY 21, 1995
ALL MODELS
STANDARD BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Page 1 of 1
The following bolt mark and class identification information is currently not included in the Standard
Bolt Torque Specifications found in the Introduction section of each Toyota Repair Manual.
BOLT MARK CLASS
(Hexagon flange bolt or 4 Protruding Lines 9T

Hexagon bolt with washer)


SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS
SPECIFIED TORQUE
CLASS DIAMETER PITCH HEXAGON HEAD BOLT HEXAGON FLANGE BOLT
mm mm NSm kgfScm ftSlbf NSm kgfScm ftSlbf
8 1.25 34 340 25 37 380 27

9T 10 1.25 70 710 51 78 790 57
12 1.25 125 1300 94 140 1450 105
8 1.25 38 390 28 42 430 31

10T 10 1.25 78 800 58 88 890 64
12 1.25 140 1450 105 155 1600 116
8 1.25 42 430 31 47 480 35

11T 10 1.25 87 890 64 97 990 72
12 1.25 155 1600 116 175 1800 130

Title:
PG006–00
CA/50 STATE CERTIFIED EMISSION
Technical Service CONTROL UNDERHOOD LABEL
BULLETIN ORDERING
Models:
March 31, 2000 All Models
Introduction It is no longer necessary to fax the CA/50 State Emission Label Order Form to TMS.
California (CA) and 50 State Certified underhood emission control labels (emission
labels) may now be obtained through your dealership Parts Department utilizing standard
replacement parts ordering procedures via the TDN. Follow the guidelines outlined in
this TSB to ensure proper label application.
Applicable S All model year Toyota Vehicles.

Vehicles We have included tables reflecting 1997 – 2000 MY CA and 50 State Emission Label
part number information for your convenience. Please continue to consult the
Electronic Parts Catalog (EPC) or the parts microfiche for information regarding other
model years as well as Federal Emission label part numbers.
NOTE:
Although the California Smog Impact Fee has been discontinued, dealers are still
required by regulation to verify the correct emission label is installed on the correct
vehicle.
REGULATIONS:
The United States Clean Air Act, Title II, Sections 202, 203, 205, and 207 mandates that
the emission control label must correctly match the emissions equipment on the
vehicle. Any person violating this requirement is subject to applicable State penalties
and a Federal civil penalty of no more than $25,000 for each instance.
Personnel at franchised dealerships are authorized to affix such labels to vehicles and
are, therefore, subject to this regulation and the attendant penalties.
S Do not sell the labels over the counter. Always install the label on the vehicle.
S Never install a California and/or 50 State Label on a vehicle that is not a

California/50 State Emission Certified Vehicle.
S Do not install Federal Emission labels on vehicles that are not Federal
Emissions Certified.

Information

CA/50 STATE CERTIFIED EMISSION CONTROL UNDERHOOD LABEL ORDERING – PG006–00 March 31, 2000
Label To ensure that the emission control labels are affixed to the correct vehicle, it is
Ordering necessary to follow these procedures:
Procedure
1. Record the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) from the vehicle requiring a
replacement label.
2. A dealership associate (must be
assigned by Parts Manager), with
authorized TDN access, must confirm
the emissions equipment of the
vehicle by referring to the following
accessory codes:
S CA – California Certified
S FE – 50 State Certified
S RE – Federal Certified
S CN – California and New York
Certified
3. Once the emissions equipment information is verified, obtain the part number
information by referring to the attached table for 1998 – 2000 MY vehicles or
consulting the EPC/microfiche for other Toyota vehicles, including Federal
Specification Vehicles.
4. Order the label through your Parts Department, using normal parts ordering
procedures via the TDN.
5. When the part arrives, verify that the emission label matches the emissions
equipment on the vehicle. This will ensure the correct label is affixed to the vehicle.
Page 2 of 6
1997 MY CA/50 MODEL ENGINE NAME TRANSMISSION EMISSIONS* PART NUMBERS

State Certified
Emission Tercel 5E–FE All USA 11298–11452
Control Labels
Paseo 5E–FE All CA 11298–11452
4A–FE All CA 11298–1D060

Corolla
7A–FE All CA 11298–1D090
7A–FE All CA 11298–1D120

Celica
5S–FE All CA 11298–7A390
5S–FE M/TM CA 11298–7A330
Camry 5S–FE A/TM CA 11298–7A350
1MZ–FE All CA 11298–20110
2JZ–GE All USA 11298–46121

S pra
Supra
2JZ–GTE All USA 11298–46102
Avalon 1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20110
Previa 2TZ–FZE A/TM USA 11298–76083
RAV4 3S–FE All CA 11298–7A410
3RZ–FE (2WD) All USA 11298–75220
4Runner 3RZ–FE (4WD) All USA 11298–75260
5VZ–FE All CA 11298–62450
2RZ–FE (2WD) All CA 11298–75210
3RZ–FE (4WD) M/TM CA 11298–75200
3RZ–FE (4WD) All USA 11298–75220

Tacoma 5VZ–FE
All USA 11298–62430
(2WD XtraCab)
5VZ–FE
M/TM USA 11298–62430
(4WD RegCab)
5VZ–FE
All CA 11298–62450
(4WD XtraCab)
3RZ–FE (2WD) All USA 11298–75240
T 100
T–100 5VZ–FE
All CA 11298–62500
(2WD/4WD)
Land Cruiser 1FZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–66070
* CA = California Emission Specification, USA = 50 State Emission Specification
Page 3 of 6

State Certified
Emission Tercel 5E–FE All CA 11298–11453
Control Labels
Corolla 1ZZ–FE All CA 11298–22040
Celica 5S–FE All CA 11298–7A470
5S–FE All CA 11298–7A430
Camry 1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20160
1MZ–FE M/TM CA 11298–20190
Supra 2JZ–GE A/TM CA 11298–46122
Avalon 1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20160
Sienna 1MZ–FE All CA 11298–20140
RAV4 3S–FE All CA 11298–7A510
3RZ–FE (2WD) All CA 11298–75320
4Runner 3RZ–FE (4WD) All CA 11298–75380
5VZ–FE All CA 11298–62540
2RZ–FE (2WD) All CA 11298–75300
3RZ–FE (4WD) M/TM CA 11298–75310
Tacoma 3RZ–FE (4WD) A/TM CA 11298–75320
5VZ–FE (2WD) All CA 11298–62530

5VZ–FE
All CA 11298–62540
(4WD XtraCab)
3RZ–FE (2WD) All USA 11298–75360
T 100
T–100 5VZ–FE
All CA 11298–62580
(2WD/4WD)
Land Cruiser 2UZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–50200
Page 4 of 6

State Certified
Emission Corolla 1ZZ–FE All CA 11298–22041
Control Labels
Celica 5S–FE All CA 11298–7A560
5S–FE All CA 11298–7A521
Camry 1MZ–FE M/TM USA 11298–20240
1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20181
5S–FE All CA 11298–7A521
Camry Solara 1MZ–FE M/TM USA 11298–20240
1MZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–20181
Avalon 1MZ–FE All CA 11298–20181
Sienna 1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20270

3S–FE
RAV4 All CA 11298–7A541
(2WD/4WD)
3RZ–FE
All USA 11298–75400
(2WD/4WD)
4R nner
4Runner
5VZ–FE
All CA 11298–62660
(2WD/4WD)
2RZ–FE (2WD) All USA 11298–75460
3RZ–FE
A/TM USA 11298–75470
(PreRunner/4WD)
3RZ–FE (4WD) M/TM CA 11298–75480
Tacoma 3RZ–FE
A/TM USA 11298–75400
(2WD XtraCab)
5VZ–FE
All USA 11298–62590
(2WD XtraCab)
5VZ–FE
All USA 11298–62600
(PreRunner/4WD)
Land Cruiser 2UZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–50181
Page 5 of 6

State Certified
Emission ECHO 1NZ–FE All USA 11298–21010
Control Labels
Corolla 1ZZ–FE All USA 11298–22032
1ZZ–FE All USA 11298–22080

Celica
2ZZ–GE All USA 11298–22050
5S–FE All USA 11298–7A590
Camry 1MZ–FE M/TM USA 11298–20320
1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20310
5S–FE All USA 11298–7A590
Camry Solara 1MZ–FE M/TM USA 11298–20320
1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20310
5S–FE A/TM USA 11298–7A590

Camry Solara
Convertible 1MZ–FE A/TM CA 11298–20310
Camry (CNG) 5S–FNE A/TM USA 11298–7A640
Avalon 1MZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–20290
Sienna 1MZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–20340
RAV4 3S–FE (2WD/4WD) All USA 11298–7A620
3RZ–FE (2WD) All USA 11298–75550
4Runner 3RZ–FE (4WD) M/TM USA 11298–75550
5VZ–FE (2WD/4WD) All USA 11298–62690
2RZ–FE (2WD) All USA 11298–75510
3RZ–FE (2WD/4WD) A/TM USA 11298–75530

3RZ–FE
M/TM USA 11298–75530
(4WD XtraCab)
3RZ–FE
A/TM USA 11298–75550
Tacoma (4WD XtraCab)
3RZ–FE
A/TM USA 11298–75530
(PreRunner)
5VZ–FE
All USA 11298–62670
(2WD XtraCab)
5VZ–FE
All USA 11298–62690
(4WD & PreRunner)
5VZ–FE All CA 11298–62640
T ndra
Tundra
2UZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–50241
Land Cruiser 2UZ–FE A/TM USA 11298–50182
Page 6 of 6
PG006-01
Title:
REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABELS
BULLETIN All Models

May 4, 2001
Introduction Replacement Certification Labels (vinyl label affixed to driver’s door or door post)
may be available from Toyota providing the request meets one of the criteria
listed below.
Certification Label Location
Applicable S All Toyota vehicles.

Vehicles
Certification 1. The vehicle is in an accident and the label is damaged or is attached to a part that will
Label Criteria be replaced during the repair.
NOTE:
S Processing a new label will be delayed significantly if the old certification label is
not available.
S A replacement label MAY NOT be available if the vehicle is more than 5 years old
and the old label does not accompany this request.
2. The label is stolen.
Procurement To request a replacement label, complete a copy of the form on the back of this bulletin.
Procedure Your dealer parts account will be billed $10.00 for each replacement of a damaged or
stolen label.
NOTE:
All replacement labels for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval by
the Technical Compliance Department. If you have any specific questions, contact
(310) 468–3390.

Information

APPLICATION FOR REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABEL
REASON FOR REPLACEMENT

ACCIDENT DAMAGE
STOLEN
OTHER
REASON/EXPLANATION
PLEASE PROVIDE CORRECT VIN

ATTACH ORIGINAL LABEL HERE
NOTE:
Original label MUST accompany this application or order will be significantly delayed.
DEALER INFORMATION
DEALER CODE:
DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
STREET ADDRESS
CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE
TELEPHONE: ( )
AREA CODE, TELEPHONE NUMBER
CONTACT:
FIRST NAME, LAST NAME
MAIL (DO NOT FAX) THE COMPLETED REQUEST FORM WITH THE OLD LABEL TO:
TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A. INC.
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT, S207
19001 S. WESTERN AVENUE
TORRANCE, CA 90509–2991
PG006–03
Title:
WARRANTY PARTS
Technical Service MARKING PROCEDURE
BULLETIN Models:
September 26, 2003 All Models
Introduction Effective September 1, 2003, all warranty parts (as indicated on the next page) must be
marked in the area or location of the failure. The technician should complete this
procedure after the failed part has been removed from the vehicle and before the part is
placed in the 10–bin storage. (Exchanged parts and remanufactured parts are not
included in this procedure.)
Failed parts marking will be beneficial in detecting and resolving product and parts quality
issues. This will also offer additional opportunities to make future enhancements to our
parts and products.
Parts are subject to random inspection in the dealership by field representatives to
ensure compliance with this new policy.
Failure to comply with this policy may result in a debit of the corresponding
warranty claim(s).

Vehicles
Parts All technicians must follow these procedures to ensure proper parts marking:
Marking
Procedure S Wipe the part clean (no excess fluid should be present).
S Indicate area of defect or failure by marking the specific part(s) with a water
resistant permanent marker. Use a color that can be easily seen against the
background of the part being marked. For dark surfaces the color yellow is highly
recommended as well as the color black for light surfaces.
S Mark the area of failure or defect by drawing a circle, a square, pointing an arrow
or adhering tape with an indication of the failed or defect location.
S Attach a completed Warranty Parts Tag (M/N 00404–PRETN–TAGS) to the
marked part.
All other parts recovery/shipping policies and procedures apply.

Information

WARRANTY PARTS MARKING PROCEDURE – PG006-03 September 26, 2003
Parts Dealers are requested to mark the location of the failure of all warranty parts that are
Marking listed below. This list is not inclusive. There may be other components that can be
Requirement marked in the area of failure. All other parts that can be marked should be marked.
Parts
Marking
assist grip assy headlamps
List audio (blemish) headliner
back door garnish hoses
bumper covers instrument panel safety pad sub–assy
cargo cover (retractable) Interior light assemblies and covers
carpet knobs, levers, handles
clutch disc l/pulley pump assy
clutch flywheel mirrors (side and rearview)
combination meter glass navigation or VES screens
console and components pillar garnish
cowl assy rack and pinion/power steering gear assy
cowl side trim sub–assy radiator
cupholders room partition board
cylinder head cover sub–assy rotors (mark where min. runout is exceeded or warped)
dash panel insulator assy seat covers/cushions
dashboard and trim seat tracks
disc wheel soft trim
display panels spare tire cover
door handle assy steering column cover
door moulding steering wheel
door trim panel & molding tail lamps and covers
emblems transmission oil pan
engine oil pan visor
exhaust manifold washer jar
floor and cargo mats wheel cap
gear shift knob wheels
grills
Page 2 of 3
WARRANTY PARTS MARKING PROCEDURE – PG006-03 September 26, 2003
Parts
Marking NOTE:
List The following parts do not have to be marked unless the technician can determine
(Continued) failure and location.
air induction/ejection systems fuel injection systems

all computers fuel injectors
alternators fuel pump
audio (internal) ignition system
batteries internal engine components
bearings internal transmission components
belts oil cooler
catalytic converter power door lock switches
crankshaft remanufactured parts
cruise control starters
distributors suspension components
EGR systems valve covers
engine control systems window regulators
exchange parts wiper motors
exhaust systems
Page 3 of 3
PG007-01
Title:
REPLACEMENT VIN PLATES
BULLETIN All Models

May 4, 2001
Introduction Replacement VIN plates (metal plates riveted to dashboard) may be available from
Toyota providing the request meets the criteria listed below.
VIN Plate Location

Vehicles
Replacement S The vehicle is in an accident and the plate is damaged.
VIN Plate
Criteria NOTE:
The original plate to be replaced MUST accompany the request.
NOTE:
If a plate is stolen, be sure to contact the State Police or your State’s Department of
Motor Vehicles (DMV). In most cases the State DMV will issue a unique number so that
the original number can be included on stolen vehicle listings. If this is the case, a
replacement plate is NOT available from Toyota. However, the original VIN, NOT the
state issued VIN, must be used on all warranty claims.
Procurement To request a replacement plate, complete a copy of the form on the back of this page.
Procedure Note that the damaged VIN plate MUST accompany the request form. Your dealer parts
account will be billed $10.00 for each replacement of a damaged plate.
NOTE:
All replacement plates for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval by
(310) 468–3390.

Information

APPLICATION FOR REPLACEMENT VIN PLATE

ACCIDENT DAMAGE
OTHER
REASON/EXPLANATION
ATTACH DAMAGED PLATE HERE
DEALER INFORMATION
DEALER CODE:
DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
STREET ADDRESS
TELEPHONE: ( )
CONTACT:
MAIL (DO NOT FAX) THE COMPLETED REQUEST FORM WITH THE OLD PLATE TO:
TORRANCE, CA. 90509–2991
PG008-02
Title:
REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABELS
BULLETIN All Models

January 18, 2002
TSB UPDATE NOTICE:

The information contained in this TSB updates PG006–01 dated May 4, 2001.
Revised text is red and underlined. The changes will take place February 1, 2002.
Introduction Replacement Certification Labels (vinyl label affixed to driver’s door or door post)
may be available from Toyota providing the request meets one of the criteria
listed below.
Certification Label Location
MFD.BY:TOYOTA MOTOR MANUFACTURING
CANADA INC. 10/01
GVWR 3935LB GAWR FR 1970LB RR 1985LB
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND
THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON
THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
XT0XX00X0X000000 PASS.CAR
C/TR:3L5/FB14 MODEL:ZZE134L – DHPNKA

A/TM:–04A/U341F MADE IN CANADA
S26 AA01904759

Vehicles
Certification 1. The vehicle is in an accident and the label is damaged or is attached to a part that will
Label Criteria be replaced during the repair.
NOTE:
S Processing a new label will be delayed significantly if the original certification label
is not available.
S A replacement label MAY NOT be available if the vehicle is more than 5 years old
and the old label does not accompany this request.
2. The label is stolen.
Procurement To request a replacement label, complete a copy of the form on the back of this bulletin.
Procedure Your dealer parts account will be billed $25.00 for each replacement of a damaged or
stolen label.
NOTE:
All replacement labels for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval by
(310) 468–3390.

Information

APPLICATION FOR REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABEL

MFD.BY: TOYOTAMOTOR MANUFACTURING
CANADA INC. 10/01
GVWR3935LBGAWRFR1970LBRR1985LB
THISVEHICLECONFORMSTOALLAPPLICABLE
FEDERALMOTORVEHICLESAFETY, BUMPER, AND
THEFTPREVENTIONSTANDARDS IN EFFECT ON
THE DATEOFMANUFACTURESHOWNABOVE.
XT0XX00X0X000000 PASS.CAR
ACCIDENT DAMAGE C/TR:3L5/FB14MODEL:ZZE134L–DHPNKA

A/TM:–04A/U341FMADEINCANADA
S26AA01904759
STOLEN
OTHER
REASON/EXPLANATION

ATTACH ORIGINAL LABEL HERE
NOTE:
Original label MUST accompany this application or order will be significantly delayed.
DEALER INFORMATION
DEALER CODE:
DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
STREET ADDRESS
TELEPHONE: ( )
CONTACT:
MAIL (DO NOT FAX) THE COMPLETED REQUEST FORM WITH THE OLD LABEL TO:
TORRANCE, CA 90509–2991
PG009-02
Title:
REPLACEMENT VIN PLATES
BULLETIN All Models

January 18, 2002
TSB UPDATE NOTICE:

The information contained in this TSB updates PG007–01 dated May 4, 2001.
Revised text is red and underlined. The changes will take place February 1, 2002.
Introduction Replacement VIN plates (metal plates riveted to dashboard) may be available from
Toyota providing the request meets the criteria listed below.
VIN Plate Location

Vehicles
Replacement S The vehicle is in an accident and the plate is damaged.
VIN Plate
Criteria NOTE:
The original plate to be replaced MUST accompany the request.
NOTE:
If a plate is stolen, be sure to contact the State Police or your State’s Department of
Motor Vehicles (DMV). In most cases the State DMV will issue a unique number so that
the original number can be included on stolen vehicle listings. If this is the case, a
replacement plate is NOT available from Toyota. However, the original VIN, NOT the
state issued VIN, must be used on all warranty claims.
Procurement To request a replacement plate, complete a copy of the form on the back of this page.
Procedure Note that the damaged VIN plate MUST accompany the request form. Your dealer parts
account will be billed $25.00 for each replacement of a damaged plate.
NOTE:
All replacement plates for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval by
(310) 468–3390.

Information

APPLICATION FOR REPLACEMENT VIN PLATE

ACCIDENT DAMAGE
OTHER
REASON/EXPLANATION
ATTACH DAMAGED PLATE HERE
DEALER INFORMATION
DEALER CODE:
DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
STREET ADDRESS
TELEPHONE: ( )
CONTACT:
MAIL (DO NOT FAX) THE COMPLETED REQUEST FORM WITH THE OLD PLATE TO:
TORRANCE, CA. 90509–2991
PG027-02
Title:
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION
BULLETIN See Applicable Models

December 4, 2002
Introduction This bulletin describes the inspection method and free play specification figures for
suspension ball joints. The on–vehicle inspection methods have been standardized.
Applicable S 1989 – 1992 model year Cressida vehicles.

Vehicles
S 1989 – 1998 model year Supra vehicles.
S 2001 – 2003 model year Highlander vehicles.
S 1995 – 2003 model year Avalon vehicles.
S 1989 – 2003 model year Camry / Camry Solara vehicles.
S 1985 – 2003 model year MR2 vehicles.
S 1990 – 2003 model year Celica vehicles.
S 2001 – 2003 model year Prius vehicles.
S 1988 – 2003 model year Corolla / Corolla Matrix vehicles.
S 2000 – 2003 model year ECHO vehicles.
S 1991– 1999 model year Tercel vehicles.
S 1991 – 1999 model year Paseo vehicles.
S 1990 – 1997 model year Previa vehicles.
S 1996 – 2003 model year RAV4 / RAV4 EV vehicles.
S 1999 – 2003 model year Land Cruiser vehicles.
S 2001 – 2003 model year Sequoia vehicles.
S 1989 – 2003 model year 4Runner vehicles.
S 2000 – 2003 model year Tundra vehicles.
S 1995 – 2003 model year Tacoma vehicles.
S 1989 – 1995 model year Truck vehicles.
S 1993 – 1998 model year T–100 vehicles.

Information

SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION – PG027-02 December 4, 2002
Inspection LOWER BALL JOINT OR SUSPENSION

Information UPPER BALL JOINT
BALL JOINT
MODEL LOCATION
INSP. TURNING INSP. TURNING
MAX. PLAY MAX. PLAY
METHOD TORQUE METHOD TORQUE
40 in.Slbf
No Play
Front 1–(C) (4.5 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Cressida Felt
or Less
(MX8#)
1989 – 1992 31 in.Slbf 31 in.Slbf
No Play No Play
Rear 3 (3.5 NSm) 2–(A) (3.5 NSm)
Felt Felt
or Less or Less
4 in.Slbf
Front 1–(A) 0.4 mm (0.5 Nm)
or Less 31 in.Slbf
Su ra (MA70)
Supra No Play
2 (A)
2–(A) (3.5
(3 5 NSm)
1989 – 1994 31 in.Slbf Felt
No Play or Less
Rear 3 (3.5 NSm)
Felt
or Less
27 in.Slbf
Front 1–(A) 0.4 mm (3.0 NSm)
Supra or Less 31 in.Slbf
No Play
(JZA80) 2 (A)
2–(A) (3.5
(3 5 NSm)
31 in.Slbf Felt
1994 – 1998 No Play or Less
Rear 1–(A) (3.5 NSm)
Felt
or Less
Highlander
31 in.Slbf
(ACU2#, No Play
MCU2#) Felt
or Less
2001 – 2003
Avalon 31 in.Slbf
No Play
(MCX10, 20) Front 1–(C) (3.5 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
1995 – 2003 or Less
Camry,
Camry Solara
(SV2#,
VZV21,
31 in.Slbf
VCV10, No Play
MCV10, 20, Felt
or Less
30
ACV 20, 30
SVX 10, 20)
1989 – 2003
Page 2 of 8

BALL JOINT
(Continued) MODEL LOCATION
MAX. PLAY MAX. PLAY
27 in.Slbf
No Play
Front 1–(C) (3.0 NSm)
Felt
or Less
MR2 27 in.Slbf
(AW1#) (3.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
1985 – 1989 1–(C)*1 No Play or Less*1
Rear
3*2 Felt 31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less*2
22 in.Slbf
Front (2.5 NSm)
MR2 or Less
No Play
(SW2#) 1 (C)
1–(C) N/A N/A N/A
Felt 27 in.Slbf
1990 – 1996
Rear (3.0 NSm)
or Less
22 in.Slbf
MR2 or Less
No Play
(ZZW30) N/A N/A N/A
Felt 9 in.Slbf
2000 – 2003
Rear 3 (1.0 NSm)
or Less
Celica
35 in.Slbf
(AT180, No Play
ST18#) Felt
or Less
1990 – 1993
Celica
(AT200, 44 in.Slbf
No Play
ST20#, Front 1–(C) (5.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
ZZT23#) or Less
1994 – 2003
Prius 44 in.Slbf
No Play
(NHW11) Front 1–(C) (5.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
2001 – 2003 or Less
Corolla 27 in.Slbf
No Play
(AE9#, 10#) Front 1–(C) (3.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
1988 – 2003 or Less
Corolla/
Corolla Matrix 44 in.Slbf
No Play
(AE10#, Front 1–(C) (5.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
ZZE11#, 13#) or Less
1988 – 2003
ECHO 31 in.Slbf
No Play
(NCP1#) Front 1–(C) (3.5 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
2000 – 2003 or Less
Tercel, Paseo 27 in.Slbf
No Play
(EL4#, 5#) Front 1–(C) (3.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
1991 – 1999 or Less
Page 3 of 8

BALL JOINT
MAX. PLAY MAX. PLAY
Previa 35 in.Slbf
No Play
(TCR1#, 2#) Front 1–(C) (4.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
1990 – 1997 or Less
Sienna 31 in.Slbf
No Play
(MCL10) Front 1–(C) (3.5 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
1998 – 2003 or Less
40 in.Slbf
RAV4/ No Play
RAV4 EV Felt
or Less
(SXA1#
(SXA1#, N/A N/A N/A
BEA11) 31 in.Slbf
No Play
1996 – 2000 Rear 3 (3.5 NSm)
Felt
or Less
RAV4 44 in.Slbf
No Play
(ACA2#) Front 1–(C) (5.0 NSm) N/A N/A N/A
Felt
2001 – 2003 or Less
Land Cruiser
27 in.Slbf 40 in.Slbf
100 No Play No Play
Front 1–(A) (3.0 NSm) 2–(A) (4.5 NSm)
(UZJ100) Felt Felt
or Less or Less
1999 – 2003
Sequoia 22 in.Slbf 40 in.Slbf
No Play
(UCK35, 45) Front 1–(A) 0.5 mm (2.5 NSm) 2–(A) (4.5 NSm)
Felt
2001 – 2003 or Less or Less
4Runner
(VZN120, 53 in.Slbf
No Play Turns
13#, RN13#, Front 1–(C) 2.3 mm (6.0 NSm) 2–(B)
Felt Smoothly
12#) or Less
1989 – 1995
4Runner
(RZN18#, No Play
Front 1–(A) 0.5 mm (2.5 NSm) 2–(A) (4.5 NSm)
VZN18#) Felt
or Less or Less
1996 – 2003
Tundra
(VCK30, 40, No Play
UCK30, 40) Felt
or Less or Less
2000 – 2003
Page 4 of 8

BALL JOINT
MAX. PLAY MAX. PLAY
Tacoma*3
(RZN140, No Play
150, VZN150) Felt
or Less or Less
1995 – 2003
Tacoma*4
(RZN140, No Play
150, VZN150) Felt
or Less or Less
1995 – 2003
Tacoma
(RZN161,
171, 19#, No Play
VZN160, 170, Felt
or Less or Less
195)
1995 – 2003
Truck*5
(RN8#, 90
Front 1–(B) 2.3 mm (5.0 NSm) 2–(A) 2.3 mm (4.0 NSm)
VZN85, 9#)
or Less or Less
1989 – 1995
Truck*6
(RN8#, 90
Front 1–(B) 0.5 mm (5.0 NSm) 2–(A) 2.3 mm (4.0 NSm)
VZN85, 9#)
or Less or Less
1989 – 1995
Truck
53 in.Slbf
(RN10#, 11# Turns
Front 1–(C) 2.3 mm (6.0 NSm) 2–(B) 2.3 mm
VZN10#, 110) Smoothly
or Less
1989 – 1995
T–100
(RCK10,
Front 1–(A) 0.5 mm (7.0 NSm) 2–(A) 1.9 mm (4.0 NSm)
VCK1#)
or Less or Less
1993 – 1998
T–100 53 in.Slbf No Play
Turns
(VCK2#) Front 1–(C) 2.3 mm (6.0 NSm) 2–(B) Felt (from
Smoothly
1993 – 1998 or Less 1995 MY)
*1 Lower Ball Joint
*2 Suspension Arm Ball Joint
*3 With Serial Number Prior to Z718190
*4 With Serial Number After and including Z718190
*5 With Serial Number Prior to those listed in *6
*6 RN80–0087125, RN80–5130170, RN85–0004477, RN85–5046258, RN85–9010725, RN90–0014600,
RN90–5047105, RN90–9002376, VZN85–0003605, VZN85–5004547, VZN90–5025989, VZN95–0025290,
VZN90–0006119
Page 5 of 8
On–Vehicle
Inspection NOTE:
S Be sure to check the table for the
applicable inspection type based on
the vehicle model.
S Refer to the table for the standard
free play values.
1. Inspect Lower Ball Joint Free Play

A. Move the hub up and down by
hand (most models with wishbone
suspension):
a. Remove the tire.
b. Install the 2 lug nuts.
c. Inspect the free play while
moving the lug nuts up and
down at a force of 67 lbf
(294 N, 30 kgf).
B. Move the lower arm using a lever
(some models with double
wishbone type suspension):
a. Lift up the vehicle.
b. Place the tip of the lever to the
wheel and inspect the free
play while moving the lower
arm up and down.
C. Move the lower arm by hand (all
models with strut type suspension
and some models with wishbone
type suspension):
b. Inspect the free play while
moving the lower arm up and
(294 N, 30 kgf).
Page 6 of 8
On–Vehicle 2. Inspect Upper Ball Joint Free Play

Inspection
(Continued) A. Move the upper arm by hand
(models with the LOWER control
arm linked by a torsion bar, and
all models using a coil spring).
a. Remove the front tire.
b. Inspect the free play while
moving the upper arm up and
(294 N, 30 kgf).
B. Move the tire with a lever (models
with the UPPER control arm
linked by a torsion bar).
b. Place the lever under the tire,
and inspect the free play while
lifting the tire using a wooden
stick, etc., as a fulcrum.
3. Inspect the Suspension Arm Ball
Joint Free Play
A. Lift up the vehicle.
B. Inspect the free play while moving
the control arm by hand.
(Reference)
Free Play Inspection Method
(Gauge Installation)
S Position the dial gauge between the
arm (upper or lower) and the knuckle,
and measure free play.
(This illustration shows how to
measure free play for vehicles with
double wishbone type suspension
with coil spring.)
4. Inspect Ball Joint Dust Cover

Check for cracks and grease leaks on
the dust cover (boots).
Page 7 of 8
Turning Inspect Ball Joint Turning Torque

Torque Move the stud back and forth 5 times,
Inspection and then turn the stud continuously at
3–5 seconds per turn, and measure the
turning torque at the 5th turn.
HINT:
Refer to the table for standard values
for the turning torque.
Page 8 of 8
PG032–99
Title:
YEAR 2000 READINESS DISCLOSURE
BULLETIN All Models

December 24, 1999
Introduction Based upon information we have obtained from our suppliers,1 all factory–installed
systems in Toyota cars, sports utility vehicles and trucks distributed and/or sold by Toyota
(“Vehicles”)2 will not be affected by the change of date from 1999 to the year 2000.
Toyota anticipates no problems with past, current or future Toyota brand vehicles or
Genuine Toyota parts and accessories regarding year 2000 readiness. We hope the
following information is helpful to you.
Please contact our Customer Service Department at 1–800–331–4331 should you have
any other questions.
Applicable S All Models

Vehicles
Warranty WARRANTY STATEMENT WITH RESPECT TO TOYOTA BRAND VEHICLES
Toyota is pleased to confirm that the manufacturer’s limited express warranty and
Toyota’s powertrain warranty warrant that all factory–installed systems in new Vehicles
and Toyota Certified Used Vehicles shall be free of any defect arising solely due to a
change in date from the year 1999 to the year 2000.3
With respect to Vehicles no longer covered under such Toyota limited express warranty,
Toyota is not aware of any operational safety or functional impact the year 2000 date
change would have upon any factory–installed system in Toyota Vehicles. Should Toyota
become aware of any material impact to the operational safety or functionality of such
systems, Toyota shall publish such information promptly.
WARRANTY STATEMENT WITH RESPECT TO GENUINE TOYOTA PARTS AND

ACCESSORIES
Toyota is pleased to confirm that the manufacturer’s limited express warranty warrants
that all new Toyota Genuine Parts and Accessories shall be free of any defect arising
solely due to a change in date from the year 1999 to the year 2000. 3
With respect to products no longer covered under a Toyota limited express warranty,
Toyota is not aware of any operational safety or functional impact the year 2000 date
change would have upon such products. Should Toyota become aware of any material
impact to the operational safety or functionality of such a product, Toyota shall publish
such information promptly.
1 Toyota relies on the statements made by its suppliers and has not independently verified such information.
2 Vehicles includes alternative fuel vehicles.
3 Please refer to terms of limited express warranty for disclaimers, limitations and restrictions.

YEAR 2000 READINESS DISCLOSURE – PG032-99 December 24, 1999
Parts & GENUINE TOYOTA PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Accessories
Based upon information we have obtained from our suppliers,1 all new Genuine Toyota
Parts and Accessories will not be affected by the change of date from 1999 to the year
2000.
DEALER–INSTALLED AND OTHER THIRD PARTY–INSTALLED SYSTEMS/

PRODUCTS
Our dealers and distributors may sell and/or install products that are not Genuine Toyota
Parts and Accessories. Toyota can only determine the Year 2000 readiness status of
Genuine Toyota Parts and Accessories. Therefore, the above statements do not apply to
products that are not Genuine Toyota Parts and Accessories or were not installed by the
factory. We encourage you to contact your dealer or other relevant third party regarding
products installed on your Toyota vehicle(s) that are not Genuine Toyota Parts and
Accessories and/or were not installed by the factory to determine any Year 2000 issues
associated with those products.
1 Toyota relies on the statements made by its suppliers and has not independently verified such information.
Page 2 of 2
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Title:
SS001–99
SCANTOOL IMMOBILIZER KEY CODE
Technical Service UTILITY
Models:
BULLETIN ’98 & ’99 Avalon, Camry, Land Cruiser & Sienna
April 9, 1999 ’99 Solara & 4Runner
Introduction The Diagnostic Tester now incorporates a Key Code Utility Menu capable of performing
the following tasks for immobilizer functions:
S Key Code Registration
S Key Code Erasure
S Auto–Registration Closure
The information contained in this bulletin will provide you with a detailed outline for the
use of immobilizer functions with the Diagnostic Tester.
Affected S 1998 Avalon, Camry, Land Cruiser and Sienna.

Vehicles
S 1998 Avalon, Camry, Land Cruiser, Sienna, Solara and 4Runner.

Information
01001271 Toyota Diagnostic Tester Kit
01001895–005 6.0a Diagnostic Software Card
NOTE:
Replacement Diagnostic Tester Kits or Software Cards may be ordered by calling
OTC at 1–800–933–8335.
Function Key Registration

Description This function allows the registration of additional key codes for transponder keys
(Key Code (Master/Sub Keys) using a Registered Master Key.
Utility)
Key Code Erasure
This function allows the user to erase all the key codes for transponder keys except
the Registered Master Key used during this function.
Auto Registration Closure

This function allows the user to close “Auto Registration Mode“ when less than three
keys have been registered.
NOTE:
When a new ECU is installed, it is in the “Auto Registration Mode” from the factory.
This allows Transponder Keys to automatically register as they are inserted into the
Ignition Cylinder. After three Transponder Keys are registered, the ECU closes “Auto
Registration Mode”. See the Repair Manual for further details.

Information

SCANTOOL IMMOBILIZER KEY CODE UTILITY – SS001–99 April 9, 1999
Operation This section provides the procedures necessary to access the IMMOBILIZER KEY CODE
Procedures UTILITY functions. Refer to the instructions below.
Verify Before any IMMOBILIZER KEY CODE UTILITY function can be performed, the type of
Immobilizer Transponder Key must be verified. The following steps show how to verify the
Key Type Transponder Key type.
1. Connect the Diagnostic Tester to DLC3 and press the (ON) key.
2. Insert a Registered Master Key (Black Key Head) into the ignition key cylinder and
turn to the ON position.
HINT:
A Registered Master Key is required for KEY REGISTRATION, KEY CODE ERASURE,
and AUTO REGISTRATION CLOSURE. A Sub Key (Grey Key Head) will not perform
these functions.
3. “From the “FUNCTION SELECT” menu

(Screen A), select [1: OBD/MOBD].
4. From the “OBD/MOBD MENU“ (Screen

B), select [6: IMMOBILIZER].
5. From the “DIAGNOSTIC MENU

IMMOBILIZER” (Screen C), select [1:
CURRENT DATA]
Page 2 of 9
Verify 6. From the “CURRENT DATA MENU

Immobilizer IMMOBILIZER” (Screen D), select [1:
Key Type DATA LIST].
(Continued)
7. From the “SELECT DATA“ menu

(Screen E), select [ALL].
8. The Transponder Key Type in the ignition

cylinder will be displayed (Screen F).
[MASTER] = Registered Master Key

[SUB] = Registered Sub Key
[NO] = Not a Registered Key,
or Vehicle is not
equipped with
Immobilizer.
NOTE:
If the Transponder Key is a Master Key, proceed to [4: KEY CODE UTILITY] by
pressing the (EXIT) key back to the “DIAGNOSTIC MENU IMMOBILIZER“ (Screen C).
From the “DIAGNOSTIC MENU IMMOBILIZER“ (Screen C), select [4: KEY CODE
UTILITY]
Page 3 of 9
Verify 9. From the “KEY CODE UTILITY” menu

Immobilizer (Screen G), the functions listed are
Key Type outlined in the next sections.
(Continued)
Key This function allows the registration of additional Key Codes for Transponder Keys
Registration (Master/Sub Keys) using a Registered Master Key. The following screens show how to
perform Key Registration.
NOTE:
This function requires the use of one Registered Master Key. The use of a Sub Key
will NOT complete Key Registration.
1. From the “KEY CODE UTILITY“ menu

(Screen A), select [1: KEY
REGISTRATION].
2. Confirm the instruction on Screen B

and press the (ENTER) key.
Page 4 of 9
3. From the “KEY SELECTION” menu

(Screen C), select the Transponder
Key type to be registered and press
the (ENTER) key.
NOTE:
Do not register a SUB KEY as a
MASTER KEY. The SUB KEY is
typically left with an attendant when
the vehicle is parked. A Registered
Master Key allows the user to
add/erase transponder keys.
4. From “KEY SELECTION” (Screen D),

confirm the type of Transponder Key
to be registered and press the
(ENTER) key.
5. After pressing the (YES) key, remove

the Registered Master Key from the
Ignition Cylinder within 20 seconds.
After removing the key, press the
(ENTER) key.
6. Insert the New Transponder Key into

the Ignition Cylinder within 10
seconds and press the (ENTER) key.
HINT:
Look at the Security Indicator Light. It
will begin to flash as the New
Transponder Key is inserted.
Page 5 of 9
Key 7. The registration of the New

Registration Transponder Key will be completed in
(Continued) approximately 60 seconds.
HINT:
The Security Indicator continues to
flash during registration.
8. Screen H will be shown at completion

of registration. Confirm the Security
Indicator turns OFF and press the
(ENTER) key.
HINT:
The Security Indicator will stop
flashing when Key Registration is
complete.
9. Insert the New Registered Master Key

into the Ignition Cylinder and turn to
the ON position and press the
(ENTER) key.
Key Code This function allows the user to erase all the Key Codes for Transponder Keys except the
Erasure Registered Master Key used during this function. The following screens show how to
perform Key Code Erasure.
HINT:
will NOT complete Key Code Erasure.
Page 6 of 9
Key Code 1. From the “KEY CODE UTILITY“ menu

Erasure (Screen A), select [2: KEY CODE
(Continued) ERASURE].
2. Confirm the instruction on Screen B

and press the (ENTER) key.
3. Confirm the instruction on Screen C

and press the (YES) key.
NOTE:
By pressing the (YES) key, all
Transponder Key Codes will be erased
except the Registered Master Key in
the Ignition Cylinder.
HINT:
After pressing the (YES) key, the
Security Indicator will start to flash.
4. Pull out the Registered Master Key

from the Ignition Cylinder within 10
seconds (Screen D).
HINT:
Security Indicator continues to flash.
Page 7 of 9
Key Code 5. If Step 4 was completed correctly,

Erasure Screen E will confirm ERASURE was
(Continued) sucessful.
HINT:
If the Erasure completed, the security
indicator should still be blinking.
6. Insert the Registered Master Key into

the Ignition Cylinder and turn to the
ON position and press the (ENTER)
key.
HINT:
Look at the Security Indicator Light.
Inserting a Registered Master Key
causes the Security Indicator to
immediately stop blinking.
Auto This function allows the user to close Auto Registration Mode when less than three keys
Registration have been registered.
Closure
NOTE:
When a New ECU is installed, it is in the Auto Registration Mode. This mode allows
the Transponder Keys to automatically register as they are inserted into the Ignition
Cylinder. See the Repair Manual for further details.
CAUTION:
will NOT complete Auto Registration Closure. The use of a non–transponder key
during this function may damage the ECU.
1. From the “KEY CODE UTILITY“ menu

(Screen A), select [3: AUTO REG
CLOSURE].
Page 8 of 9
Auto 2. Confirm the instruction on Screen B

Registration and press the (ENTER) key.
Closure
(Continued)
3. At “AUTO REGIST. CLOSURE”

(Screen C), the Auto Registration
Closure Information will be displayed.
Press the (ENTER) key to finish.
Page 9 of 9
Title:
DIAGNOSTIC TESTER CONTROLLER
SS001-03
AREA NETWORK (CAN) INTERFACE
Technical Service
MODULE
BULLETIN Models:
September 8, 2003 All Models
Introduction Over the next four model years, all Toyota vehicles will begin using an all–new diagnostic
communication protocol, Controller Area Network (CAN). CAN will be introduced on the
2004 Prius this fall. A CAN Interface Module has been distributed to all dealers as an
essential Special Service Tool (SST) and will allow the Diagnostic Tester to communicate
with CAN–equipped vehicles. Please use the following instructions to install the new CAN
Interface Module as soon as it arrives at your dealership.
NOTE:
S Version 10.2a or later Diagnostic Tester Software must be used to enable
communication with CAN–equipped vehicles. Version 10.2a will be distributed to
dealers via TIS before CAN–equipped vehicles arrive at dealers.
S There is no need to remove the CAN Interface Module when working with non–CAN
systems or older software versions (Version 10.1a or earlier). The Diagnostic Tester
will communicate with all DLC3/J1962 based systems with the CAN Interface
Module installed.
Applicable S All Models

Vehicles
Required SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SSTs) PART NUMBER QUANTITY

SSTs
01001271 1
CAN Interface Module Kit*

01002744 1

* Essential SSTs.
NOTE:
Additional Diagnostic Tester Kits, CAN Interface Modules, Program Cards or SSTs may
be ordered by calling SPX/OTC at 1-800-933-8335.

Information

DIAGNOSTIC TESTER CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) INTERFACE – SS001-03 September 8, 2003
Installation
Procedure
Program Card With Version

10.2a (or Later) Software
DLC Cable
(P/N 02001637)
CAN Interface Module Kit

(P/N 01002744)
Vehicle Interface
Module (VIM)
Black Grey
DLC1 CAN Interface Module
(Check Connector) DLC2
Cable (TDCL)
Cable
The Original DLC3 (OBDII

Connector P/N 02001643)
CAN Interface Module Is Used for Cable Is No Longer Used.
ALL DLC3/J1962 Communication
1. Remove the original DLC3 Cable and store it in the Diagnostic Tester storage case.
2. Connect the CAN Interface Module to the DLC Cable.
3. Use the Diagnostic Tester with the CAN Module installed for all DLC3/J1962 based
vehicle communication.
4. If you experience problems with the Diagnostic Tester or CAN Interface Module,
please contact Toyota Special Service Tool Customer Support at 1–800–933–8335.
NOTE:
S There is no need to remove the CAN Interface Module when working with non–CAN
systems or older software versions (Version 10.1a or earlier). The Diagnostic Tester
will communicate with all DLC3/J1962 based systems with the CAN Interface
Module installed.
S For DLC1 and DLC2 communication you must continue to use the Vehicle Interface
Module (VIM).
Page 2 of 2
SPECIAL
SERVICE TOOLS
SS94-002
AUGUST 12, 1994
ALL MODELS
WIRE HARNESS REPAIR KIT “B” Page 1 of 2
The new Wire Harness Repair Kit “B” has been released as an essential Special Service Tool (SST)
to supplement the original Wire Harness Repair Kit. This kit holds an initial supply of 21 new type
electrical terminals and connectors as well as the necessary supplies and small tools for most elec-
trical repairs.
The Wire Harness Repair Kit manual has been updated and now contains an illustrated catalog of
all terminals and connectors available for Toyota vehicles. Connector Replacement Guidelines, a
Connector/Terminal Usage Guide, and a Connector Quick Reference Chart have been added as
additional reference. This manual is the only reference available which provides information on
properly identifying connectors and terminals.
When components/supplies need to be replaced, refer to page 21 in the manual or the reverse side
of this TSB. Note: The manual is no longer available through the Toyota Non-Parts System. It is
available separately under part number 410094 by calling OTC at 1-800-933-8335.

Page 2 of 2
WIRE HARNESS REPAIR KIT “B”

PARTS REPLACEMENT ORDERING INFORMATION:
The following parts can be ordered through Toyota Motor Sales on a normal parts order:
Part Number Description Part Number Description
82998-12010 Repair Splice 82998-12470 Repair Splice

216824 Silicon Tape 82998-12440 Repair Splice
00204-34130 18/22 Splice 82998-12460 Repair Splice
The following parts can be ordered from OTC Tool & Equipment Division, SPX Corporation, 655
Eisenhower Drive, Owatonna, Minnesota 55060:
Part Number Description Part Number Description
62164 Tool Box Kit A 310032 Wire Stripper
(Toyota) 310033 Terminal Pick
310044 Tool Box Kit B 216820 Terminal Gauge
(Toyota) 216822 Terminal Gauge
62166 Tool Box (Lexus) 00002-217681 Terminal Pick
310031 Crimper (Kit A) 00002-217958 Terminal Pick
AMP47100-1 Crimper (Kit B) 410094 Repair Manual
All remaining parts can be purchased from a local supplier.
TSB

Title:
SS002–97
BRAKE BOOSTER PUSH ROD GAUGE (SST)
Models:
All Models
September 26, 1997
Introduction When inspecting or making brake booster push rod adjustments with SST 09737–00010,
it is necessary to assure proper tool configuration prior to use. The SST has a reversible
center plunger that allows it to function on a wide range of Toyota vehicles. Prior to using,
verify that it is configured correctly for the application by checking the master cylinder
outer diameter at the point illustrated below. The dimensions for the SST, Part Number
09737–00010, are also shown in the illustrations below.

Information
09737–00010 Brake Booster Push Rod Gauge (SST)
Warranty
Information
Page 1 of 1
SS002–99
Title:
1999 SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
BULLETIN All ’98 & ’99 Models

July 9, 1999
Introduction This TSB contains information regarding Special Service Tools (SSTs) distributed or
added to the SST program during 1999 model year. Both the Essential and Available
SSTs are listed by tool number, tool name, and model application.
Special Service Tools can be ordered through the Toyota SST Program by calling
1–800–933–8335.
Applicable S All 1998 and 1999 MY Toyota Vehicles.

Vehicles
1999 Essential 1999 ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

Special Service TOOL NUMBER TOOL NAME APPLICATION
Tools
09521–25021–1 Rear Axle Shaft Puller Attachment Land Cruiser
09631–12090 Seal Ring Tool Land Cruiser
09710–28012–01 Front Suspension Bushing Tool Set Land Cruiser
02002–02XXX Haweka Flange Plate Land Cruiser
Note: XXX is Spindle Shaft Size
09950–60030–01 Replacer Set #3 Land Cruiser
09999–00310 Toyota Spare Tire Lock Kit Land Cruiser,

T100, Tacoma
09999–00305 Spare Tire Lock Adapter T100
Part of Kit # (Toyota/Lexus Dual Dealers)

09999–00310
09268–21010–01 Fuel Hose Puller Corolla (’99)

1999 SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS – SS002-99 July 9, 1999
1999 Essential 1999 ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

Tools (Cont’d)
01001895–U05 ScanTool Software All Models
(Annual Reprogramming &
Site License)
1999 Available 1999 ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

Tools
09710–01031 RAV4
Upper Arm Bushing Replacer (Part of Set)
Part of Kit #
09710–22021
09710–22021 Upper Arm Bushing Replacer Set Land Cruiser
TOY280341 Rivet Nut Tool All Models
TOY280087 Homelink Tester All Models
00002–MLR6872A Evap Tester ’99 MY with

EVAP
Service Port
Page 2 of 2
SS002-02
Title:
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER
Technical Service SOFTWARE UPDATE
BULLETIN Models:
June 7, 2002 All Models & Model Years Through Current
Introduction The internal software of the Midtronics Battery Tester can now be periodically updated to
support future models. New updates will include new battery warranty codes and testing
information.
The Technical Information System (TIS) will be the primary distribution method for battery
tester software updates. Utilizing the new Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) and the new
essential SST (Midtronics Battery Tester Adapter), you will be able to quickly and easily
update your Midtronics Battery Tester.
This bulletin will show you how to use and install the Midtronics Update Wizard to update
the Midtronics tester software.
Applicable S All models and model years through current.

Vehicles

Tools &
Material Midtronics Battery Tester* 00002–MP815–T 1
Midtronics Battery Tester Adapter* 00002–DMPUC 1
* Essential SSTs.

Information
Process The Midtronics Battery Tester Software Update is a 2-step process:

Overview
1. Installing the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).
The Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) is an application that only needs to be installed
on the PC one time. This bulletin will provide the steps to install the MUW.
2. Using the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).
The Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) will be used with each battery tester software
update. The Update Wizard will walk you through each step to connect the PC to the
tester and perform the update.

MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02 June 7, 2002
Operation Before Installation or Use of the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW):

Procedure:
Steps A and B are required to begin the update process. (Refer to Figure 1.)
Preparation
A. Open TIS (Technical Information System) and go to the “Diagnostics” section.
B. Click on the text “Midtronics Battery Tester Software.”
FIGURE 1.
Page 2 of 10
Operation 1. Installing the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).

Procedure
NOTE:
The Midtronics Update Wizard only needs to be installed once and must be installed
before the rest of the update process can take place. If this step is already complete,
continue on to step 2.
A. Click on the text “Install MUW.” (Figure 2.)

B. The file download window will appear. Click on “Run this program from it’s current
location.”
C. Click the “OK” button.
D. Allow the Update Wizard to perform its self–installation. This will take only a few
minutes.
FIGURE 2.
Page 3 of 10
Operation 2. Using the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).

Procedure
(Continued) A. Click on the latest version of production software. (Figure 3.) This will begin the
software update process.
B. The next screen to appear will be the first screen of the software update. Click
“Next” to continue.
FIGURE 3.
Page 4 of 10
Operation C. Enter the serial number of the battery tester then click “OK.” (Figure 4.)
Procedure
(Continued) FIGURE 4.
Page 5 of 10
Operation D. Connect the Midtronics Battery Tester to TIS as instructed (Figure 5), then click
Procedure “Next.”
(Continued)
NOTE:
Connecting the Midtronics Battery Tester to the TIS station will require the use of SST
00002–DMPUC. This is an adapter that allows the TIS RS–232 cable to plug into the
Battery Tester. (Figure 5.)
FIGURE 5.
Page 6 of 10
Operation E. Follow the instructions to put the Midtronics Battery Tester into the correct mode
Procedure (Figure 6), then click “Next.”
(Continued)
FIGURE 6.
Page 7 of 10
Operation F. Confirm the software version and click “Next.” (Figure 7.)
Procedure
(Continued) FIGURE 7.
Figures 7–1 and 7–2 are confirmation dialogs that will pop up over the Update
Information window (Figure 7) when:
S The update file is an older revision level than that found in the battery tester
(Figure 7–1) or
S The update file is the same revision level as that found in the tester
(Figure 7–2).
Click the “Yes” button to clear the pop–up dialog and continue with the update.
FIGURE 7–1. FIGURE 7–2.
Page 8 of 10
Operation G. The Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) will now update the Midtronics Battery
Procedure Tester software. (Figure 8.)
(Continued)
NOTE:
Do not interrupt this process (it will take approximately 5 minutes).
FIGURE 8.
Page 9 of 10
Operation H. Upon successful completion, the Update Results screen will display “No errors”
Procedure and the update is now complete. Click on the “Exit” button. (Figure 9.)
(Continued)
FIGURE 9.
Your Midtronics Battery Tester is now updated and ready for use.
NOTE:
BE SURE TO REGULARLY CHECK TIS FOR FUTURE UPDATES:
S The Midtronics Battery Tester OE Stock Number Card will no longer be printed and
shipped. It will be distributed through TIS from now on.
S Latest versions of Tester update software will be available on TIS.
Page 10 of 10
SS003–98
Title:
RIVET NUT TOOL
BULLETIN All Models

December 11, 1998
Introduction Toyota Motor Sales is making available a tool suitable for installing Rivet Nuts as required
by some DIO accessories, such as wind deflectors, roof Racks, and running boards. The
tool is available from Owatonna Tool Company, also known as OTC.
Affected S All models requiring Rivet Nuts for the installation of an accessory.
Vehicles
Part Number OTC PART NUMBER PART NAME NOTE

Information
00002–95161 Rivet Nut Tool Mandrels for 5, 6 and 8 mm Rivet Nuts included*
* Also includes a molded plastic carrying case, not shown
Ordering Rivet Nut Tool may be ordered by calling the OTC Order Desk at 1–800–933–8335. The
Procedure introductory price for this tool is $460.00.

Information

SPECIAL SERVICE
TOOLS
SS95–004
NOVEMBER 10, 1995
ALL MODELS
NEW OIL FILTER WRENCH Page 1 of 1
Beginning in 1996, Toyota will be standardizing the size of many of its oil filters to the three inch
industry standard. This new filter size is slightly larger than the existing 75mm diameter filter
presently used on many Toyota models. This larger filter will require a three inch oil filter wrench
for easy removal.
Three inch oil filter wrenches are readily available from parts stores and tool dealers, however, for
your convenience, OTC will make this new filter wrench available under P/N 00002–17001. Dealer
cost is $5.75. To order, please call OTC at 1–800–933–8335.

SS004-00
Title:
DIAGNOSTIC TESTER COMMUNICATION
Technical Service ERROR WITH T.I.S.
BULLETIN Models:
December 8, 2000 All Models
Introduction Certain Diagnostic Testers (SST P/N 02002019) may experience a communication
error with the Technical Information System (T.I.S.). To correct this condition, the tester
manufacturer, Vetronix Corporation, will recall and update affected units. The following
explains how to determine which Diagnostic Testers may exhibit this problem and
outlines the procedure to return the tester for repair.
Applicable Diagnostic Testers within the serial number range below are known to experience these
Diagnostic communication errors.
Testers
STARTING SERIAL NUMBER ENDING SERIAL NUMBER
31 000000 31 000100
Repair 1. Determine the Diagnostic Tester serial

Procedure Figure 1
number located on the back of the tester
Back View of Diagnostic Tester
(see Figure 1).
2. If the serial number is within the range
listed above, call Vetronix Toyota
Customer Service at 1-800-321-4889,
ext. 3123, to obtain a pre-paid shipping
package for the Diagnostic Tester.
3. The shipping package will arrive within S/N 31 000100
2 business days. Secure the tester in
the provided package following the
enclosed shipping instructions.
Diagnostic Testers are guaranteed to be
returned within 3 business days from
receipt at Vetronix (except over
holidays).
NOTE:
This update will be performed free
of charge.
Diagnostic Testers outside of the serial number range above are not affected and do not need
this repair. If a Diagnostic Tester outside this range experiences a similar problem, please call
Dealer Daily Support at 1-877-DL-DAILY or Vetronix Toyota Customer Service at
1-800-321-4889, ext. 3123.

Information

STEERING
Title:
ST001-01
STEERING WHEEL NUT SERVICE
Technical Service SPECIFICATION
BULLETIN Models:
February 16, 2001 All Applicable Models
Introduction To make the steering wheel installation procedure similar for all models, the steering
wheel nut tightening torque has been standardized.
Applicable MODEL MODEL YEARS

Vehicles
TERCEL EL42, 53 1991 – 1998
ECHO NCP12 2000
PASEO EL44, 54 1992 – 1997
COROLLA AE10#, ZZE110 1993 – 2001
AT180, ST18#, AT2#,
CELICA 1990 – 2000
ST2#, ZZT23#
MR2 SW2#, ZZW30 1991 – 1995; 2000
CAMRY SXV10, 20, MCV10, 20 1992 – 2000
CAMRY CNG SXV23 2000 – 2001
CAMRY SOLARA SXV20, MCV20 1999 – 2000
AVALON MCX10, 20 1995 – 2000
SUPRA JZA80 1993 1/2 – 1998
RAV4 SXA1# 1996 – 2000
RAV4 EV BEA11 1998 – 2000
PREVIA TRC10, 20 1991 – 1997
SIENNA MCL10 1998 – 2000
HIGHLANDER ACU20, 25, MCU20, 25 2001
RN12#, 13#, VZN12#, 13#,
4RUNNER 1990 – 2000
18#, RZN180, 185
LAND CRUISER FZ80, FZJ80, UZJ100 1991 – 2000
RN8#, 9#, 10#, 110,
TRUCK 1989 – 1995
VZN85, 9#, 10#, 110
RZN140, 150, 161, 171,
TACOMA 1995 1/2 – 2000
19#, VZN150, 160, 170, 195
T100 VCK10, 20 1993 – 1998
TUNDRA VCK30, 40, UCK30, 40 2000

Information

STEERING WHEEL NUT SERVICE SPECIFICATION – ST001-01 February 16, 2001
Service Steering Wheel

Information Installation Nut
35 NSm (360 kgfScm, 26 ftSlbf) Steering Wheel Pad
50 NSm (510 kgfScm, 37 ftSlbf)
Steering Wheel
Lower
No. 2 Cover
Steering Wheel
Steering Column
Steering Wheel
Lower
No. 3 Cover
Page 2 of 2
STEERING
ST002–98
Title:
STEERING GEAR REMOVAL/
Technical Service REPLACEMENT
BULLETIN Models:
May 22, 1998 All Models equipped with SRS Airbag
Introduction The following information is provided to supplement the Repair Manual procedure for
removing/installing the steering gearbox or rack and pinion on vehicles equipped with a
driver’s side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbag.
CAUTION:
When the intermediate shaft is disconnected and the steering wheel is turned freely,
the SRS spiral cable may be broken. Therefore, as a precaution, make sure to pass
the driver’s seat belt through the steering wheel to prevent it from turning freely, as
shown below.
After working on SRS/Steering components, always check the operation of the SRS
Warning Light. Refer to the appropriate repair manual if any diagnostic trouble codes
are recorded.
Affected Tercel, Paseo, Corolla, MR2, Celica, Camry, Avalon, Supra, Previa, Sienna, RAV4,
Vehicles 4Runner, Tacoma, T–100 & Land Cruiser equipped with a driver’s side SRS Airbag.
Repair 1. Position the front wheels facing

Procedure straight ahead.
2. Using the driver’s seat belt, set the
steering wheel so that it does not turn
(see Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
3. Paint match marks on the Match Marks

intermediate shaft and control valve
shaft (see Fig. 2).
4. Remove the intermediate shaft
retaining bolt and disconnect the
intermediate shaft (see Fig. 2).
Fig.2

Information

STEERING
ST002–00
Title:
STEERING WHEEL NUT

May 12, 2000
Introduction The steering wheel installation nut torque specification has been changed. Please update
the repair manuals for the applicable vehicles.
Applicable S 1994 – 2000 model year Camry

Vehicles
50 N m (510 kgf cm, 37 ft lbf)

Information

STEERING
ST004–00
Title:
STEERING RACK END NOISE
BULLETIN ’97 – ’00 Camry (NAP) & ’99 – ’00 Solara

June 16, 2000
Introduction Some 1997 – 2000 model year Camry (NAP) and 1999 – 2000 Solara vehicles may
experience a squeaking noise from the front suspension. To improve this condition,
production parts have been changed.
Applicable S 1997 – 2000 model year Camry (North American Produced)
Vehicles S 1999 – 2000 model year Solara
Change
4T1BG2*K*YU668756
Information
4T1BG2*K*YU986504
NAP Camry
4T1BF2*K*YU104860
4T1BF2*K*YU947590
Solara 2T1C*2*P*YC359722
Parts MODEL PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME
Information
45503–09030
Camry or
Steering Rack End
and 45503–39055 45503–39135
Sub–Assembly
Solara or
45503–39135
HINT: Previous Part (BLACK SHAFT)
A quick reference in differentiating

between the previous and new parts is
that the previous Rack End Shaft is
BLACK and the current part is GRAY.
Current Part (GRAY SHAFT)

Information
R & R Power Steering Rack End 45503–09030
444631 2.2 or
Sub–Assembly (One Side)
45503–39055
45503 39055 91 99
or
Combo Code A Other Side 0.5
45503–39135

STEERING
Title:
ST008-01
STEERING RACK END NOISE
BULLETIN ’97 – ’00 Camry (NAP) & ’99 – ’00 Solara

December 21, 2001
TSB Update Notice:

The information contained in this TSB updates ST004–00 dated June 16, 2000.
Introduction Some 1997 – 2000 model year Camry (NAP) and 1999 – 2000 Solara vehicles may
experience a squeaking noise from the front suspension. To improve this condition,
production parts have been changed.
Applicable S 1997 – 2000 model year Camry (North American Produced) vehicles.
Vehicles S 1999 – 2000 model year Solara vehicles.

Change
4T1BG2#K#YU668756
Information
4T1BG2#K#YU986504
NAP Camry
4T1BF2#K#YU104860
4T1BF2#K#YU947590
Solara 2T1C#2#P#YC359722
Parts MODEL PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME
Information
45503–09030
Camry or
Steering Rack End
and 45503–39055 45503–39135
Sub–Assembly
Solara or
45503–39135
NOTE:
Current service parts may be GRAY or BLACK in color.

Information
R & R Power Steering Rack End 45503–09030
444631 2.2 or
Sub–Assembly (One Side)
45503–39055
45503 39055 91 99
or
Combo Code A Other Side 0.5
45503–39135

SUSPENSION
SU001–00
Title:
FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT NOISE
BULLETIN ’97 – ’99 Avalon & ’97 – ’00 Camry

January 21, 2000
TSB Update Notice:

The information contained in this TSB updates SU002–99 dated September 3, 1999.
Introduction To eliminate a noise occurrence from the front suspension on washboard type road
surfaces, the suspension support has been changed.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 Model Year Avalon and 1997 – 2000 Camry vehicles.
Vehicles
Production The rubber bushing shape of the
Change Suspension
suspension support has been changed. Support
Information
MODEL STARTING VIN
Avalon 4T1BF1*B*XU353593
Coil Spring
JPP JT2BF2*K*Y0237757
Camry JT2BG2*K*Y0386559
4T1BF2*K*YU092142
NAP 4T1BF2*K*YU934448 Strut
Camry 4T1BG2*K*YU623567
4T1BG2*K*YU925151
Parts PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME QUANTITY
Information
Avalon
Support Sub–Assembly,
48603–33020 48603–33010 1
Front Suspension RH
48609–33120 48609–33110 1
Front Suspension LH
Camry
48603–33020 48603–33021 1
Front Suspension RH
48609–33120 48609–33121 1
Front Suspension LH

Information
A R & R Suspension Support (RH and LH)
431451 B Adjust Toe–In 2.1 48603–33020 91 99
C Adjust Camber

SUSPENSION
SU001-02
Title:
REAR BEARING O-RING SERVICE TIP
BULLETIN ’97 – ’01 Camry, ’00 – ’02 Avalon &

March 1, 2002 ’99 – ’02 Solara
Introduction When replacing the rear hub bearing assemblies on 1997 – 2001 model year Camry,
2000 – 2002 Avalon and 1999 – 2002 Solara vehicles, replace the O–ring.
Applicable S 1997 – 2001 model year Camry vehicles.

Vehicles
S 2000 – 2002 model year Avalon vehicles produced before the VIN shown below.
S 1999 – 2002 model year Solara vehicles produced before the VIN shown below.

Change
Information Avalon 4T1BF28B#2U223623
Solara 2T1##2#P#2C005335

Information
90301–63006 O–Ring

Information
Repair REMOVAL
Procedure
1. Remove Rear Wheel.
Torque: 103 NSm (1,050 kgfScm, 76 ftSlbf)
2. With Disc Brake:

Remove Brake Caliper and Disc.
A. Remove the brake caliper and disc.
Torque: 47 NSm (475 kgfScm, 34 ftSlbf)
B. Support the brake caliper securely.
3. With Drum Brake:

Remove Brake Drum.

REAR BEARING O–RING SERVICE TIP – SU001-02 March 1, 2002
4. Remove Rear Axle Hub.

A. Remove the 4 bolts and rear
axle hub.
Bolt
Bolt
B. Remove the O–ring.
HINT:
At the time of installation, coat the new
O–ring with MP grease.
Bolt
Bolt
NOTE:
Please ensure that the O–ring is
replaced with a new service part when
installing the bearing assembly.
C. With Drum Brake:

Remove the bolt, and disconnect
the flexible hose from the shock
absorber.
D. Support the backing plate

securely.
5. With ABS:
Remove ABS Speed Sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of
removal.
Page 2 of 2
SUSPENSION
SU002–99
Title:
FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT NOISE
BULLETIN ’97 – ’99 Avalon & Camry

September 3, 1999
Introduction To eliminate a noise occurrence from the front suspension on washboard type road
surfaces, the suspension support has been changed.
Applicable S 1997 – 1999 Model Year Avalon and Camry vehicles

Vehicles
Modification The rubber bushing shape of the

Information suspension support has been changed.
Suspension Support
Coil spring
Strut
Parts PREVIOUS PART

CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME QUANTITY
Information NUMBER
48603–33020 48603–33010 1
Front Suspension RH
48609–33120 48609–33110 1
Front Suspension LH
Warranty OP CODE GROUP DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Information
R & R Suspension Support
A
(RH and LH)
431451 B Adjust Toe–In 2.1 48603–33020 91 99
C Adjust Camber

SUSPENSION
SU002–00
Title:
REAR ABS SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL
BULLETIN ’97 – ’00 Camry & Avalon, ’99 – ’00 Solara

May 5, 2000
Introduction This bulletin provides service information regarding the removal of the ABS speed sensor
prior to removal of the rear axle and rear suspension.
REMINDER:
Failure to remove the ABS speed sensor prior to removal of the rear axle or
suspension may cause the ABS warning light to illuminate or damage the ABS speed
sensor wire harness.
Applicable S 1997 – 2000 model year Camry and Avalon

Vehicles
S 1999 – 2000 model year Solara
Repair
Procedure
POTENTIAL AREA FOR DAMAGE
5.4 NSm (55 kgfScm, 48 inSlbf)
REAR ABS SPEED SENSOR

7.8 NSm (80 kfgScm, 69 inSlbf)
NOTE:
Prior to removal/replacement of the rear axle, rear coil spring and rear shock absorber,
be sure to remove the rear ABS speed sensor from the rear axle by removing the 3
bolts shown above. Check the speed sensor signal after installation.

Information
N/A Not Applicable – – – –

TRANSMISSION & CLUTCH
TC001-02
Title:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
Technical Service REQUIREMENTS
BULLETIN Models:
May 24, 2002 All ’00 – ’02 Models & ’03 Corolla & Matrix
Introduction Please refer to the following table for correct application of DexronR III (DexronR II) and
Toyota Type T–IV Automatic Transmission Fluids or equivalent.
MODEL 2000 2001 2002 2003
Avalon A541E A541E A541E N/A

Camry A140E, A541E A140E, A541E U140E, U241E N/A
Celica U240E, U341E U240E, U341E U240E, U341E N/A
Corolla A131L, A245E A131L, A245E A131L, A245E A245E
ECHO U340E U340E U340E N/A
U140E, U140F, U140E, U140F,
Highlander N/A N/A
U241E U241E
Land Cruiser A343F A343F A343F N/A
RAV4 A247E A540H U140F, U241E U140F, U241E N/A
Sequoia N/A A340E, A340F A340E, A340F N/A
Sienna A540E A541E A541E N/A
Solara A140E, A541E A140E, A541E A140E U241E N/A
Tacoma A340E, A340F, A43D A340E, A340F, A44D A340E, A340F, A44D N/A
Tundra A340E, A340F A340E, A340F A340E, A340F N/A
4Runner A340E, A340F A340E, A340F A340E, A340F N/A
Matrix N/A N/A N/A A246E
Matrix N/A N/A N/A U240E
Matrix N/A N/A N/A U341F
Prius N/A P111 P111 N/A
LEGEND
Type T–IV Fluid

DexronR III (DexronR II)

Information
08886–81015 ATF Type T–IV
00718–ATF00 DexronR III (DexronR II)

Information

TC002–99
Title:
REVISED DRIVE SHAFT GREASE
BULLETIN RAV4, Tercel, Corolla, Celica, Camry & Supra

April 9, 1999
Introduction The greases supplied in replacement Inboard and Outboard Drive Shaft Boot Kits for the
following models has been revised.
With this revision, the grease compositions have been changed and are now both the
same color. To correctly lubricate each joint, consult the Service Repair Manual as to
which size packet of grease is designated for each Drive Shaft Joint Assembly.
NOTE:
Although Inboard and Outboard greases are now the same color, their compositions
are different.
Affected S All RAV4, Tercel, Corolla, Celica, Camry and Supra Models.
Vehicles
Required As outlined in the Service Repair Manual.

Tools and
Material
Repair Refer to the appropriate Repair Manual for installation and lubrication information for
Procedure Drive Shaft Joint Assemblies.

Information

TSB

Title:
TC003–97
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION
Models:
’97 CAMRY WITH A541E ATM

October 17, 1997
Introduction To prevent overheating of the transmission when towing a weight of more than 1,000
pounds, a transmission oil cooler should be installed. The transmission oil cooler and
required hardware for installation are available through normal parts supply.
Towing D Up to 2,000 pounds (with transmission cooler installed).

Capacity
Oil Cooler Tube No. 1 Oil Cooler Tube No. 2
Side Member
Clip
Front Suspension Member
Hose
Clamp
Fig. 1 Oil Cooler Assembly
Affected D 1997 Camrys with A541E Automatic Transmissions.

Vehicles
Parts PART NUMBER PART NAME QTY

Information
32910–33040 Oil Cooler Assembly 1
32907–33050 Oil Cooler Tube No. 2 1
32907–33090 Oil Cooler Tube No. 1 1
90445–17101 180 mm (7.09”) Oil Cooler Hose 1
90119–06518 Bolt 3
91611–60816 Bolt 2
90467–16013 Hose Clamp with installation clip 12
90179–06058 Nut 1

Information
Toyota Supports ASE Certification

Page 1 of 6
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION – TC003–97 October 17, 1997
Procedure 1. Parts removal in preparation for cooler

installation:
A. Remove the 9 bolts, 2 screws and

the center engine under cover.
Fig. 2 Center Engine Under Cover
B. Remove the engine coolant

temperature switch connector and
the wire clamp.
Fig. 3 Clamp Switch
C. Remove battery and tray.

D. Disconnect the cooling fan
connector.
E. Disconnect the No.1 engine coolant
temperature switch wire connector.
F. Remove the 2 bolts and then the
cooling fan.
Fig. 4
Page 2 of 6
Oil Cooler Tube No. 1

Procedure 2. Cooler Installation:
(Continued)
A. Install the 140 mm (5.51”) hose to
the oil cooler tube No. 1 as shown.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamp with the hose
clamp clip at the position shown, and 140 mm Hose
use pliers to pull off the clip in the
5 mm (0.20”)
direction indicated by the arrow.
Fig. 5
B. Install the tube bracket onto the left

side of the front suspension
member with the 2 bolts as shown.
Torque: 62 in–lbf
(7 N–m / 71 kgf–cm)
Fig. 6
C. Install the 130 mm (5.12”) hoses Oil Cooler Tube No. 2

and the 180 mm (7.09”) hose to the
oil cooler tube No. 2 as shown.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamps with the hose 180 mm Hose
clamp clips at the positions shown,
and use pliers to pull off the clips in
the direction indicated by the arrows.
130 mm Hose
5 mm (0.20”)
Fig. 7
Page 3 of 6
Procedure D. Remove the lower side clip of the

(Continued) radiator side LH deflector.
E. Install the tube bracket with the bolt

on the side member.
Torque: 62 in–lbf
(7 N–m / 71 kgf–cm)
F. Reinstall the lower side clip

of the radiator LH deflector.
Fig. 8
G. Connect the hoses from the oil Oil Cooler Tube No. 1
cooler tube No. 2 to the oil cooler
tube No.1.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamps with the hose
clamp clips at the positions shown, and
use pliers to pull off the clips in the
direction indicated by the arrows.
Front Suspension Member
5 mm (0.20”)
Fig. 9
H. Disconnect the hose from the oil

cooler pipe of the radiator LH side.
NOTE:
Place a container below vehicle to catch
any leaking ATF. Remove the other end
of this hose from transaxle and discard.
I. Connect the hose from oil cooler

tube No.1 to the oil cooler pipe of
the radiator LH side.
5 mm (0.20”)
NOTE:
direction indicated by the arrows. Fig. 10
Page 4 of 6
Procedure J. Install the 190 mm (7.48”) hose

(Continued) between the oil cooler tube No.1
and transaxle oil cooler tube.
NOTE:
190 mm Hose Oil Cooler Tube No. 1
5 mm (0.20”)
Fig. 11
K. Install the oil cooler onto the center

brace and front cross member
using the two bolts and nut as
illustrated in figure 12.
Torque: 65.5 in–lbf

(7.4 N–m/75.5 kgf–cm)
L. Connect the hoses to the pipes.
NOTE:
5 mm (0.20”)
Fig. 13
Page 5 of 6
Procedure 3. Final Assembly:

(Continued)
A. Reconnect the coolant temperature
switch connector and wire clamp as
illustrated in figure 14.
B. Install the cooling fan with 2 bolts.

C. Reconnect the cooling fan
connector and the No.1 engine
temperature switch wire connector
as shown in figure 15.
D. Reinstall battery and tray.
E. Start the engine.
Fig. 15
F. With the engine at idle and the

brake pedal depressed, shift the
selector into all positions from “P” to
“L”, and return it to the “P” position.
G. Check for leaks from the hose joints.
H. Add new fluid type ATF D·II or Fig. 16
DEXRON·III (DEXRON·II).
NOTE:
Additional capacity with cooler will be
0.38 US quarts (0.36 liters).
I. Shift the selector into all positions

from “P” to “L”, and return to “P”.
J. Check fluid level with engine idling
at normal operating temperature of
Fig. 17
158 to 176F (70 to 80C) and add
more fluid if required.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
K. Shut off the engine and reinstall the

center engine under cover with 9
bolts and 2 screws as shown in
figure 18.
Fig. 18
Page 6 of 6
TC003–98
Title:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
Technical Service TYPE T-IV
BULLETIN Models:
June 19, 1998 All Models
Introduction The introduction of Automatic Transmission Fluid type T–IV makes type T–II obsolete.
Use type T–IV for all applications that specify ATF type T–II.
Applicable S All vehicles with Automatic Transmissions specified to use ATF Types T–II or T–IV.
Vehicles
TYPE OF ATF
SPECIFIED ATF Dextron®–III TYPE T TYPE T–II TYPE T–IV
Dextron®–II or III OK X X X
TYPE T X OK X X
TYPE T–II X X OK OK
TYPE T–IV X X X OK
X = NOT USABLE
Parts SIZE NEW PART NUMBER PART NAME

Information
4 Liter 08886–01705 ATF type T–IV

Information

TC003–99
Title:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS
BULLETIN All Models

May 21, 1999
REVISION NOTICE:
The information contained in this TSB updates TC003–98 dated June 19, 1998.
Introduction Automatic Transmission Fluid Type T–IV now replaces Type T–II fluid. Use Type T–IV for
all applications that specify ATF Type T–II.
Please refer to the following table for the interchangeability between each ATF.
Affected S All vehicles produced after 1993 with Automatic Transmissions specified to use
Vehicles ATF Type T, T–II and T–IV.
TYPE OF ATF
SPECIFIED ATF
DEXTRON II OR III TYPE T TYPE T–II TYPE T–IV
DEXTRON II OR III OK X X X
TYPE T X OK X OK
TYPE T–II X X OK OK
TYPE T–IV X X X OK
X = NOT USABLE
NOTICE:
With the exception of mixing ATF Type T with Type T–IV fluids, different types of fluids
must not be mixed.
Parts SIZE NEW PART NUMBER PART NAME

Information
4 Liter 08886–01705 ATF Type T–IV

Information

TRANSMISSION &
CLUTCH
TC004-96
DECEMBER 20, 1996
ALL MODELS
Title: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBERS Page 1 of 3
Use the following tables to locate and read the original automatic transmission serial number.
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION
LOCATION
MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
A4#D#
96 A E 00001
5-Digit Serial No.
*Model Code
Manufacturing Month:
A thru M (“I” not used)
Last 2 Digits of
Manufacturing Year:
A34## 1996
96 A Y 00001
5-Digit Serial No.
*Model Code
A131L Manufacturing Month:
(AW Product) A thru M (“I” not used)
Last 2 Digits of
Manufacturing Year:
1996
96 A ZT 00001
5-Digit Serial No.
*Model Code
A24## A thru M (“I” not used)
Last 2 Digits of
Manufacturing Year:
1996
*See Model Code chart on Page 3.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBERS Page 2 of 3
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION
LOCATION
MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
6 A 00001
50001
5-Digit Serial No.
Last Digit of
Manufacturing Year:
1996
A140#
A130L
6 01 00001
5-Digit Serial No.
Last 2 Digits of
Manufacturing Year:
1996
F A 50001
5-Digit Serial No.
A131L
(TMC Product)
A132# A thru M (“I” not used)
*Manufacturing Year:
‘93-C, ‘94-D, ‘95-E
D 01 00001
5-Digit Serial No.
A54#E Manufacturing Year:
A540H A541E:
‘93-A, ‘94-B, ‘95-C
A540E, A540H:
‘90-A, ‘91-B, ‘92-C
6 A 00001
5-Digit Serial No.
A44## Last Digit of
Manufacturing Year:
1996
* Exception: 1991 – K, 1992 (January–March) – M, 1992 (April–December) – B

NOTE: Remanufactured transmissions also have an additional serial number.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBERS Page 3 of 3
MODEL CODE CHART:
CODE MODEL CODE MODEL
A A40 N A45DF, A44D, A45D

w/o Lock-up
B A40D, A40DF P A44DL, A45DF, A45DL

w/Lock-up
C A42D Q A44DE, A45DF, A45DE

ECT, w/Lock-up
D A41 R A340E, A340F

w/lock-up
E A343F S A340H
w/Lock-up
F A43D T A340E
w/o Lock-up
H A43DL U A341H
K A42DL Y A131, A131L
Z A240L, A241L, A242L,

L A43DE, A46DE, A46DF A243L, A2444L, A240E,
A241E, A242E, A244E,
A244F, A241H
M A42DE ZT A245E, A246E

TOYOTA
VOLUME TRANSMISSION &
10
REFERENCE CLUTCH
NUMBER 008 (REVISED)
03–22–02
SERVICE BULLETIN
DATE
MODELAE, ST, SV, VV
TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC. (A131L) BR12E or BR18E
(A140E) BG, EG, CG, FG, DG
(A540e) ZF, GF19C
Page 1 of 2
A/TM NUMBER AND LOCATION INFORMATION

The purpose of this Service Bulletin is to provide information regarding the location of the A/TM
numbers.
NOTE:
The transmission numbers must be included on the AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CORE
INFORMATION/CREDIT REQUEST FORM when using the automatic transmission reman.
program.
TECHNICAL ASSURANCE DEPARTMENT

TC008–89
Page 2 of 2
A/TM NUMBER AND LOCATION INFORMATION (CONT’D)
TECHNICAL ASSURANCE DEPARTMENT
TC008–89
SS002-03
Title:
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05)
Models:
Technical Service All ’96 – ’03, ’04 Corolla, ECHO, Matrix, Sienna
BULLETIN & Scion xA & xB
December 17, 2003
Introduction This Service Bulletin contains Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Monitor threshold values for all
models from 1996 to 2003 and some 2004 models. Starting in 2004, the O2S Monitor
threshold values can be found in the repair manual. These values are used when
analyzing the O2S test results to determine the O2S condition.

Vehicles
S 2004 model year Corolla, ECHO, Matrix and Sienna vehicles.
S 2004 model year Scion xA and xB vehicles.
Function Checking O2S Test Results

Description
To view O2S test results, the O2S Monitor must be completed and the test results must
be checked within the same key cycle. If the ignition key is cycled OFF, the O2S test
results will be set to the minimum or maximum limits, and all test results will be erased.
The O2S test results are stored in the ECU (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM)
when the monitor is completed. The test results are static and will not change once the
monitor is complete.
The process for checking O2S test results is described in the following three basic steps:
1. Completing the O2S Readiness Monitor (page 2).
2. Accessing O2S Test Results (page 3).
3. Comparing O2S Test Results to Failure Thresholds (page 4).

SSTs
(or any OBDII Scantool)
01001271 1

* Essential SSTs.
NOTE:
Additional Diagnostic Tester Kits, Program Cards or other SSTs may be ordered by
calling SPX/OTC at 1-800-933-8335.

Information

O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03 December 17, 2003
Completing 1. Clear any stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) using the Toyota
O2S Diagnostic Tester.
Readiness
2. Start the engine.
Monitor
3. Perform the drive pattern below to run and complete the Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Monitor.
O2S Monitor Drive Pattern

ECT: 167F (75C) or more Accelerator Pedal Accelerator Pedal
Depressing Releasing (Fuel–Cut)
Vehicle Speed At Least 8 Times At Least Twice
48 km/h (30 mph)
6 mph
(10 km/h)
Idling
Time
2 min. 40 sec 20 sec 10 sec 10 sec
or more or more or more or more or more
HINT:
The O2S Monitor is completed when the following conditions are met:
S Two (2) minutes or more passed after the engine start.
S The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is 167F (75C) or more.
S Cumulative running time at 30 mph (48 km/h) or more exceeds 6 minutes.
S Vehicle is in closed loop.
S The fuel–cut is operated for 8 seconds or more (for Rear O2S Monitor).
A. Allow the engine to idle for two minutes.

B. Warm up the engine until the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) reaches 167F
(75C).
C. Drive the vehicle over 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 40 seconds.
D. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for more than 20 seconds.
E. Repeat steps C and D at least 8 times in one driving cycle.
(Do not cycle the ignition key.)
In addition, perform the following steps for the Rear O2S Readiness Monitor:
A. Select second gear.
B. Allow the vehicle to run at 30 mph (48 km/h) or more.
C. Keep the accelerator pedal “off–idle” for more than 10 seconds.
D. Immediately after step C, release the accelerator pedal for at least 10 seconds
without depressing the brake pedal (to execute the fuel–cut).
E. Decelerate the vehicle until the vehicle speed reaches less than 6 mph (10 km/h).
F. Repeat steps B – E at least twice in one driving cycle.
Page 2 of 43
Accessing 1. On the Diagnostic Tester* screen, O2S TEST RESULT Screen

O2S Test select the following menus:
Results
S DIAGNOSTICS
S CARB OBD II 01 BANK 1 – SENSOR 1
S O2S TEST RESULTS 01 BANK 1 – SENSOR 2
A list of the available oxygen sensors 01 BANK 2 – SENSOR 1
will be displayed. 01 BANK 2 – SENSOR 2
2. Select the desired oxygen sensor and

press Enter.
NOTE:
The monitor result of the A/F sensor will
not be displayed. If you select
“Bank 1–Sensor 1” or Bank 2–Sensor 1”
for a vehicle equipped with an A/F
sensor, the Diagnostic Tester will
display “No parameter to display.”
3. Compare the test results with the TEST DATA Screen

values listed in the Failure
Threshold Chart.
LOW SW V S S S S 0.400 V
HIGH SW V S S S S 0.550 V
MIN O2S V S S S S 0.100 V
MAX O2S V S S S S 0.900 V
TIME $81 S S S S S 17
* Although this procedure references the Toyota

Diagnostic Tester, the O2S test results can be
checked using a generic OBDII scantool.
Refer to your OBDII scantool operator’s manual
for specific procedures.
Page 3 of 43
Comparing 1. Determine the correct O2S Failure Threshold Chart for your vehicle by looking in the
O2S Test “O2S Application Table,” pages 5 – 9 in this bulletin.
Results to
Failure 2. Select appropriate year, model, and engine for specified O2S Failure
Thresholds Threshold Chart.
3. Compare O2S test results with the specified O2S Failure Threshold Chart. It may be
necessary to convert O2S test results to a specific measurement unit using the
conversion factor that is supplied in the specified table. See example below:
Example: Example
A. The Diagnostic Tester displays
“17” as a value of the “Time $81”
LOW SW V S S S S 0.400 V
(see illustration).
HIGH SW V S S S S 0.550 V
B. Find the Conversion Factor value MIN O2S V S S S S 0.035 V
of “Time $81” in the O2S Failure MAX O2S V S S S S 0.835 V
Threshold chart below. Time $81 17
0.3906 is specified for Time $81 Time $84 84
in this chart.
Time $85 79
C. Multiply “17” in step “A” by 0.3906
(Conversion Factor) in step “B.”
17 x 0.3906 = 6.6 %
NOTE:
D. If the answer is within the S “LOW SW V” indicates the O2S
Standard Value of TEST LIMIT, voltage when the O2S status changes
the “Time $81” can be confirmed from rich to lean.
to be normal. S “HIGH SW V” indicates the O2S
voltage when the O2S status changes
from lean to rich.
S If the O2S voltage is lower than
“LOW SW V,” the O2S status is lean.
S If the O2S voltage is higher than
“HIGH SW V,” the O2S status is rich.
Example of O2S Failure Threshold Chart:
CONVERSION STANDARD VALUE

TEST ID DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA UNIT
FACTOR OF TEST LIMIT
Percentage of monitoring time

Time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is Multiply 0.3906 % Within 60%
$81
less than 0.05V
NOTE:
Before the O2S Monitor completes or after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the
Diagnostic Tester displays the viewable upper limit or a lower limit of the test value
(example: 0 V, 1.275 V, 0 s [seconds], 10.2 s, 0 and 255).
Page 4 of 43
O2S SEE CHART NO.

Application MODEL YEAR MODEL ENGINE DRIVE TRAIN CERTIFICATION (TSB PAGE)
Table Avalon 1MZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
All California 2 (p. 11)
5S FE
5S–FE
Camry
y All Federal
1 (p
(p. 10)
1MZ–FE All 50–State
7A–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Celica All California 2 (p. 11)
5S FE
5S–FE
All Federal 1 (p. 10)
Corolla ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
1996 Land Cruiser 1FZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Paseo 5E–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Previa 2TZ–FZE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
RAV4 3S–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
Supra ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Tacoma ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Tercel 5E–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
T100 ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
4Runner ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Avalon 1MZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
5S FE
5S–FE
Camry
y All Federal
1 (p
(p. 10)
1MZ–FE All 50–State
7A–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Celica All California 2 (p. 11)
5S FE
5S–FE
Corolla ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Land Cruiser 1FZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Previa 2TZ–FZE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
1997 RAV4 3S–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
Supra ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
2RZ–FE All 50–State
A/T 50–State 1 ((p. 10))
Tacoma 3RZ–FE M/T, 2WD 50–State
M/T, 4WD 50–State
2 (p
(p. 11)
5VZ–FE All 50–State
3RZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
T100
5VZ–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
4Runner
Page 5 of 43
O2S SEE CHART NO.

Table All California 4 (p. 12)
(Continued) Avalon 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
5S FE
5S–FE
Camry
y California 4 (p. 12)
A/T
1MZ–FE Federal
1 (p.
(p 10)
M/T 50–State
Celica 5S FE
5S–FE
Corolla 1ZZ–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
1998 Land Cruiser 2UZ–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
RAV4 3S FE
3S–FE
Sienna 1MZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
2JZ–GE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
Supra
2JZ–GTE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
T100 ALL All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
Avalon 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
Camry CNG 5S–FNE All 50–State 6 (p. 13)
Celica 5S–FE All 50–State 5 (p. 13)
Land Cruiser 2UZ–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
RAV4 3S FE
3S–FE
Sienna 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
1999 All Federal 5 (p. 13)
5S FE
5S–FE
Solara California 4 (p. 12)
A/T
1MZ–FE Federal
5 (p.
(p 13)
M/T 50–State
4Runner All California 4 (p. 12)
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
Page 6 of 43
O2S SEE CHART NO.

(Continued)
Celica ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
ECHO 1NZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
MR2 1ZZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
RAV4 3S FE
3S–FE
Sienna 1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
5S FE
5S–FE
Solara California 4 (p. 12)
A/T
2000 1MZ–FE Federal
5 (p
(p. 13)
M/T 50–State
2RZ FE
2RZ–FE
Tacoma 3RZ FE
3RZ–FE
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
2UZ–FE All 50–State 2 (p. 11)
Tundra All California 8 (p. 15)
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
3RZ FE
3RZ–FE
4Runner
5VZ FE
5VZ–FE
Page 7 of 43
O2S SEE CHART NO.

(Continued)
Celica ALL All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
1MZ–FE All 50–State 9 (p. 15)
Highlander
2AZ–FE All 50–State 3 (p. 12)
Prius 1NZ–FXE All 50–State 11 (p. 17)
2001
RAV4 1AZ–FE All 50–State 4 (p. 12)
Sequoia 2UZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
5S–FE All 50–State 3 (p. 12)
Solara A/T 50–State 9 (p. 15)
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
M/T 50–State 10 (p. 16)
Tundra
Avalon 1MZ–FE All 50–State 4 (p. 12)
1ZZ–FE All 50–State 1 (p. 10)
Celica
2ZZ–GE All 50–State 13 (p. 19)
Highlander
2002
Sequoia 2UZ–FE All 50–State 14 (p. 20)
Solara A/T 50–State 9 (p. 15)
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
M/T 50–State 5 (p. 13)
Tundra
Page 8 of 43
O2S SEE CHART NO.

(Continued)
All Federal
17 (p.
(p 23)
2AZ–FE M/T California
Camry
y A/T California 18 (p. 24)
All With VVT 19 (p. 25)
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
All Without VVT 20 (p. 26)
1ZZ–FE All 50–State 13 (p. 19)
Celica
2ZZ–GE All 50–State 21 (p. 27–28)
ECHO 1NZ–FE All 50–State 23 (p. 30–31)
Highlander
Land Cruiser 2UZ–FE All 50–State 24 (p. 32–33)
2003 1ZZ–FE All 50–State 22 (p. 29)
Matrix
2ZZ–GE All 50–State 21 (p. 27–28)
Sequoia 2UZ–FE All 50–State 24 (p. 32–33)
Solara
2UZ–FE All 50–State 24 (p. 32–33)
Tundra
1GR–FE All 50–State 12 (p. 18)
4Runner
2UZ–FE All 50–State 26 (p. 35–36)
Corolla 1ZZ–FE All 50–State 27 (p. 37–38)
ECHO 1NZ–FE All 50–State 23 (p. 30–31)
2WD 50–State 27 (p. 37–38)
1ZZ FE
1ZZ–FE
Matrix 4WD 50–State 28 (p. 39–40)
2004
2ZZ–GE All 50–State 29 (41–42)
Scion xA 1NZ–FE All 50–State 23 (p. 30–31)
Scion xB 1NZ–FE All 50–State 23 (p. 30–31)
Page 9 of 43
O2S CHART 1:
Failure
Threshold
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Charts
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
Time The minimum voltage during O2S

N/A V Between 0 and 0.4 V
$07 monitoring
Time The maximum voltage during Between 0.55 and
N/A V
$08 O2S monitoring 1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor

Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
Time Time to change from Lean Between 0 and

N/A Second
$31 (≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V) 1 second
Time Time to change from Rich Between 0 and
N/A Second
$32 (≥0.55 V) to Lean (≥0.4 V) 1 second
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor

Time The minimum voltage during O2S

$07 monitoring
N/A V
Page 10 of 43
O2S CHART 2:
Failure
Threshold
Charts
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
(Continued)
The minimum voltage during Between 0 and

$07 N/A V
O2S monitoring 0.35 V
N/A V


N/A Second
$31 (≤0.35 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V) 1.1 seconds
N/A Second
$32 (≥0.55 V) to Lean (≥0.35 V) 1.1 seconds

Time The minimum voltage during

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
Page 11 of 43
O2S CHART 3:
Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
Time The minimum voltage during Between 0 and

N/A V
N/A V
CHART 4:


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
Page 12 of 43
O2S CHART 5:
Failure
Threshold Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Charts Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
(Continued)

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
$32 (≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V) 1.1 seconds


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
CHART 6:


N/A V
Time The maximum voltage during Between 1 and
N/A V
Page 13 of 43
O2S CHART 7:
Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued) Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
Page 14 of 43
O2S CHART 8:
Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


N/A Second
$31 (≤0.35 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V) 1 second
N/A Second
$32 (≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.35 V) 1 second


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
CHART 9:


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
Page 15 of 43
O2S CHART 10:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
Page 16 of 43
O2S CHART 11:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second


N/A V
N/A V
Page 17 of 43
O2S CHART 12:

Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued) Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156

N/A V
N/A V
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor


Time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is Multiply 0.3906 % Between 0 and 60%
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is Multiply 0.3906 %
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time Multiply 0.2621 Second
$85 66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 18 of 43
O2S CHART 13:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
$31 (≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V) 1 seconds
N/A Second
$32 (≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V) 1 seconds


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.5 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
Maximum Rich (≥0.45 V) time Multiply 0.2621 Second
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 19 of 43
O2S CHART 14:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.5 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 20 of 43
O2S CHART 15:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second


N/A V
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.5 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 10 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 21 of 43
O2S CHART 16:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.5 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 22 of 43
O2S CHART 17:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 23 of 43
O2S CHART 18:

Failure
Threshold
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Charts
(Continued) Related DTCs: P0136

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 3) Deterioration Monitor

Related DTCs: P0142
Average of the second

Time
impedance ratio between high– Multiply 0.0312 % Between 0.7 and 1.35
$86
frequency and low–frequency
If the average of the sensor impedance ratio is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this
as a malfunction.
Page 24 of 43
O2S CHART 19:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 25 of 43
O2S CHART 20:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 26 of 43
O2S CHART 21:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Engine Idling
Time Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of Between 0 and

N/A Second
$33 one waveform cycle 3.05 seconds
Time Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of Between 0 and
N/A Second
If the sum of Time $33 and Time $34 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Page 27 of 43
O2S CHART 21 (Continued):

Failure
Threshold
Charts Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
(Continued) Vehicle Running
Between 0 and
0.95 seconds
Time Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
N/A Second (varies depending
$35 one waveform cycle
on feedback
compensation factor)
Between 0 and 0.95
seconds
Time Average Rich (≤0.55 V) time of
on feedback
malfunction.


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 28 of 43
O2S CHART 22:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.5 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 29 of 43
O2S CHART 23:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
Engine Idling

N/A Second
Time Average Rich (≤0.55 V) time of Between 0 and
N/A Second
malfunction.
Page 30 of 43

Failure
Threshold
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
on feedback
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
on feedback
malfunction.


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 31 of 43
O2S CHART 24:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
Engine Idling

N/A Second
N/A Second
malfunction.
Page 32 of 43

Failure
Threshold
Between 0 and 0.75

seconds
on feedback
Between 0 and 0.75
seconds
on feedback
malfunction.


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 33 of 43
O2S CHART 25:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 34 of 43
O2S CHART 26:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
Engine Idling

N/A Second
N/A Second
malfunction.
Page 35 of 43

Failure
Threshold
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
on feedback
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
on feedback
malfunction.


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 36 of 43
O2S CHART 27:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
Engine Idling

N/A Second
$33 one waveform cycle 3 seconds
N/A Second
malfunction.
Page 37 of 43

Failure
Threshold
Between 0 and 0.55

seconds
on feedback
Between 0 and 0.55
seconds
on feedback
malfunction.


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 38 of 43
O2S CHART 28:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


N/A Second
N/A Second
Engine Idling

N/A Second
N/A Second
malfunction.
Page 39 of 43

Failure
Threshold
Between 0 and 0.5

seconds
on feedback
Between 0 and 0.5
seconds
on feedback
malfunction.


$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 40 of 43
O2S CHART 29:

Failure
Threshold
Charts
Engine Idling
(Continued)

N/A Second
N/A Second
malfunction.
Vehicle Running
Between 0 and 1.08

seconds
on feedback
Between 0 and 1.08
seconds
Time Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
on feedback
malfunction.
Page 41 of 43

Failure
Threshold
Charts

$07 O2S monitoring
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 42 of 43
O2S CHART 30:

Failure
Threshold
Charts

N/A V
N/A V


Time
$81
less than 0.05 V
Time Between 20 and
$84 100%
0.70 V or more
Time Between 20 and
$85 66.8 seconds
Page 43 of 43
HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING
AC003-04
Title:
A/C COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION
Technical Service PROCEDURE
BULLETIN Models:
March 1, 2004 Applicable Models
Introduction Use the following tip when installing an A/C compressor on the AZ or ZZ series engine
to ensure proper belt alignment. Improper installation of the A/C compressor may result
in abnormal belt noise or wear.
Applicable S 1998 – Current model year Corolla vehicles.

Vehicles
S 2000 – Current model year Celica vehicles.
S 2000 – Current model year MR2 Spyder vehicles.
S 2001 – Current model year Highlander vehicles equipped with 4 cylinder engine.
S 2001 – Current model year RAV4 vehicles.
S 2002 – Current model year Camry vehicles equipped with 4 cylinder engine.
S 2002 – Current model year Solara vehicles equipped with 4 cylinder engine.
S 2003 – Current model year Matrix vehicles.

Information
Installation
Procedure Proper Installation Improper Installation
Belt
Bolt
OK NG
Clearance
A/C Compressor

A/C COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION PROCEDURE – AC003-04 March 1, 2004
Installation 1. AZ Series Engine:

Procedure Install A/C Compressor 4 Bolt 3 Bolt Push
(Continued)
A. Loosely install the compressor
(with the 3 bolts and nut or
4 bolts.)
Push down on the rear side of the

compressor and tighten the
bolts/nut in the order shown.
Torque: 24.5 NSm (250 kgfScm, 18 ftSlbf)
2 Nut or Bolt 1 Bolt
2. ZZ Series Engine:
Install A/C Compressor 3 Bolt Push
A. Loosely install the compressor

(with the 2 bolts and nut or
3 bolts).
Push down on the rear side of

the compressor and tighten the
bolts/nut in the order shown.
2 Nut or Bolt 1 Bolt
Page 2 of 2
ENGINE
Title:
EG008-04
M.I.L. ON" 1MZ-FE ENGINE MISFIRE
Technical Service DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303,
P0304, P0305 OR P0306
BULLETIN Models:
April 28, 2004 Applicable Avalon, Camry, Sienna & Solara
Introduction Some vehicles equipped with 1MZ–FE (V6) engines without VVTi may exhibit a rough
idle and/or a M.I.L. “ON” condition with a diagnostic trouble code or codes for misfire
caused by an improperly operating ignition coil assembly. Production changes have been
implemented to prevent this condition from occuring.
Applicable S 2001 model year Japan built Camry vehicles equipped with 1MZ–FE engines (V6).
Vehicles
S 1998–2001 model year North American built Camry vehicles equipped with
1MZ–FE engines (V6)
S 1998 – 1999 model year Avalon vehicles.
S 1999 – 2002 model year Solara vehicles equipped with 1MZ–FE engines produced
BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown below.
Production MODEL ENGINE PRODUCTION CHANGE EFFECTIVE VIN

Change
Information Solara 1MZ–FE 2T1CF2#P*2C578710
Warranty OP CODE MODEL DESCRIPTION TIME OFP T1 T2

Information
191011 Avalon R & R Ignition Coil (one coil) 0.2 90080–19012 02 73
Camry
191011 Solara R & R Ignition Coil (one coil) 03
0.3 90080 19012
90080–19012 02 73
Sienna
This repair is covered under the Toyota Federal Emissions Warranty. This warranty is
in-service date.
For California specification vehicles registered and operated in California, Maine,
Massachusetts or Vermont, this repair is covered under the California Emissions
Warranty, which is in effect for 36 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from
the vehicle’s in-service date.

M.I.L. “ON” 1MZ–FE ENGINE MISFIRE DTC P0300 – P0306 – EG008-04 April 28, 2004
Parts PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME QTY
Information
90080–19012 Same Ignition Coil Assembly 1

SSTs
01001271 1

* Essential SSTs.
NOTE:
Additional Diagnostic Tester Kits, Program Cards or other SSTs may be ordered by
calling SPX/OTC at 1-800-933-8335.
Required TOOLS & MATERIAL QUANTITY

Tools &
Material Digital Volt Ohmmeter (DVOM) 1
Repair 1. Confirm if vehicle is currently misfiring, running rough or hesitating.

Procedure
If YES – Go to Step 2.
If NO – Review Freeze Frame Data and attempt to operate vehicle under similar
driving conditions – see notes below for information that makes it more likely to
duplicate misfire.
NOTE:
The following activities will turn off misfire detection:
S Changing engine RPM greater than 150 RPM.
S Changing throttle position quickly.
Misfire duplication can be duplicated most readily when the engine speed and throttle
angle are held nearly constant for at least 2 minutes.
NOTE:
When misfire monitor is active, ignition value will change on Data List.
When pending misfire DTC is set, “MISFIRE RPM” and “MISFIRE LOAD” will show values.
A B
IGNITION 41 IGNITION 205
CYL #1 0% CYL #1 0%
CYL #2 0% CYL #2 0%
CYL #3 0% CYL #3 0%
CYL #4 Above 50% CYL #4 Above 50%
CYL #5 0% CYL #5 0%
CYL #6 0% CYL #6 0% Values Will Change
MISFIRE RPM 0rpm MISFIRE RPM 0rpm
From Zero
MISFIRE LOAD 0.00g/rev MISFIRE LOAD 0.00g/rev
# CODES 1 # CODES 1
CHECK MODE OFF CHECK MODE OFF
MISFIRE TEST COMPL MISFIRE TEST COMPL
Page 2 of 3
M.I.L. “ON” 1MZ–FE ENGINE MISFIRE DTC P0300 – P0306 – EG008-04 April 28, 2004
Repair 2. Confirm if misfire is currently occurring on cylinder(s) identified by DTC(s) using the
Procedure Diagnostic Tester while engine is idling (see below).
(Continued)
Examining Data List For Misfire Percent
A B C
FUNCTION SELECT FOR
NORTH AMERICA NOTICE DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ENHANCED OBDII ENGINE
1: OBD/MOBD COVERS VEHICLES
2: ENHANCED OBD 1: DATA LIST
THROUGH 2004MY. 2: DTC INFO
3: CARB OBD II EXCEPT SEQUOIA,
4: BREAK–OUT BOX 3: ACTIVE TEST
TUNDRA, TACOMA. 4: SNAPSHOT
5: NVH FOR OTHER VEHICLES
6: AUTOPROBE 5: SYSTEM CHECK
SELECT 2004 NEW 6: RESET MEMORY
7: 02 RPM CHECK MODEL OR USE CARB
8: SNAPSHOT REVIEW 7: MONITOR STATUS
OBDII 8: CHECK MODE
9: SETUP PRESS [ENTER]
0: GAS ANALYSIS
D E
SELECT DATA IGNITION 41
CYL #1 0%
ALL CYL #2 0%
USER DATA CYL #3 0%
EXTEND DATA CYL #4 Above 50% Misfire on #4 Cylinder
MISFIRE
CYL #5 0%
ATM CYL #6 0%
02 SENSOR MISFIRE RPM 0rpm
FUEL SYS MISFIRE LOAD 0.00g/rev
CATALYTIC # CODES 1
EVAP CHECK MODE OFF
MISFIRE TEST COMPL
Is the cylinder(s) identified by the DTC(s) misfiring?

If YES – Go to Step 3.
If NO – Follow normal diagnostics for applicable DTC in Technical Information System
(TIS) in applicable Repair Manual: Diagnostics: SFI: P030#.
3. Swap suspect ignition coil(s) from cylinder that is misfiring to cylinder that is
not misfiring.
4. Using Diagnostic Tester, confirm that misfire is now occurring in cylinder that has
suspect ignition coil(s). Has misfire followed swapped ignition coil(s)?
If YES – Replace ignition coil(s) and go to Step 5.
If NO – Follow normal diagnostics in Technical Information System (TIS) for
applicable Repair Manual: Diagnostics: SFI: P030#.
5. Confirm misfire has been eliminated (0% at all times) using Diagnostic Tester while
engine is idling.
NOTE:
If misfire percent is any value other than 0% at any time, then that cylinder is misfiring.
Page 3 of 3
PG003-04
Title:
Models:
Technical Service
BULLETIN All Models
May 18, 2004
Introduction Correction pages are available for the service publications listed below. This bulletin
summarizes service publication content changes that have been released between
February 2003 and March 2004. These changes have already been implemented in the
Toyota Technical Information System (TIS). For the most accurate service information
content, technicians are strongly encouraged to refer to TIS (http://tis.toyota.com ).
Internet access is also available to Toyota service information content by subscription
(http://techinfo.toyota.com ).
NOTE:
Inventory quantities of printed correction pages are limited, and part numbers are
obsolete when supplies are exhausted. When ordering a technical publication
(i.e., Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring Diagram) from the MDC, any correction page(s)
associated with that particular publication which were published at the time of
purchase will automatically be included with your order.
Parts Correction pages may be ordered from the Materials Distribution Center (MDC) through
Information Dealer Daily or by calling the MDC at 1–800–622–2033 using the corresponding part
numbers from the following table.
4Runner 2002 4Runner . . . . . . RM887–U2 . . . BE–18, BE–19 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM887–3043B

2003 4Runner . . . . . . RM1034–U . . . 14–31, 14–70, 14–85 . . . . 00400–RM103–2174
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1001–U1 . . 02–32 to 02–34 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3110
................................... 05–816, 05–817, . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3162
................................... 05–817–1, 05–817–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 03–46, 05–449 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3194
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1001–U2 . . 11–21–1 to 11–21–4 . . . 00400–RM100–2172B
................................... 27–15, 27–16 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3025B
................................... 73–23, 73–26 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3103B
................................... 30–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3110B
................................... 27–7, 27–30, 27–35 . . . 00400–RM100–3239B
Avalon 2002 Avalon . . . . . . . . RM872–U2 . . . BE–23, BE–24 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM872–3080B

2003 Avalon . . . . . . . . EWD487–U . . . 209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD48–3183
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM953–U2 . . . BE–4 to BE–6 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM953–2164B
................................... BE–102 to BE–105 . . . . 00400–RM953–2196B
................................... BE–23, BE–24 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM953–3088B

REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG003-04 May 18, 2004
Camry 1997 Camry . . . . . . . . RM503–U2 . . . BE–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM503–2218B

2000 Camry . . . . . . . . RM742–U2 . . . BE–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM742–2221B
2002 Camry . . . . . . . . EWD461–U . . . 38, 78, 289, . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD46–2181
................................... Overall M:5 (cont’d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM881–U1 . . . 05–894, 05–895, . . . . . . 00400–RM881–3158
................................... 05–895–1, 05–895–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM881–U2 . . . 12–10, 12–20 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM881–3086B
................................... 14–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM881–3142B
................................... 33–3, 33–7, 33–14 . . . . 00400–RM881–3245B
2003 Camry . . . . . . . . RM972–U1 . . . 05–1008, 05–1009, . . . . 00400–RM972–3160
................................... 05–1009–1, 05–1009–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM972–U2 . . . 73–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM972–2183B
................................... 12–9, 12–19 . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM972–3087B
................................... 14–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM972–3141B
................................... 33–3, 33–7, 33–14 . . . . 00400–RM972–3246B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1026–U . . . 73–1, 73–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM102–3101
Celica 2004 Celica . . . . . . . . . RM1066–U1 . . DI–380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM106–3307
Corolla 2003 Corolla . . . . . . . . RM938–U1 . . . 05–484 to 05–487 . . . . . . 00400–RM938–2160

................................... 05–421, 05–422, . . . . . . 00400–RM938–3155
................................... 05–422–1, 05–422–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 05–40 to 05–42, . . . . . . . 00400–RM938–3236
................................... 05–112, 05–113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
ECHO 2002 ECHO . . . . . . . . RM884–U . . . . DI–108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM884–3203

2003 ECHO . . . . . . . . RM984–U . . . . DI–154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM984–3204
Highlander 2002 Highlander . . . . RM918–U1 . . . 05–943, 05–962–1 . . . . 00400–RM918–3108B

................................... 05–710, 05–711, . . . . . . 00400–RM918–3156
................................... 05–711–1, 05–711–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 03–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM918–3232
................................... 32–24, 32–28 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM918–3232B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM918–U2 . . . 14–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM918–3144B
2003 Highlander . . . . RM987–U1 . . . 05–1028, 05–1047–1 . . . 00400–RM100–3109
................................... 05–788, 05–789, . . . . . . 00400–RM987–3153
................................... 05–789–1, 05–789–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 03–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM987–3233
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM987–U2 . . . 73–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM987–2184B
................................... 14–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM881–3143B
Land Cruiser 1999 Land Cruiser . . . RM661–U2 . . . BE–28, BE–29 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM661–3057B

2002 Land Cruiser . . . RM893–U2 . . . BE–28, BE–29 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM722–3060B
Page 2 of 5
Land Cruiser 2003 Land Cruiser . . . EWD510–U . . . 71, 84, 85, 96, 97, . . . . . 00400–EWD51–2195
(Continued) ................................... 244, 245, 383, 387, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 388, 396, Overall M:24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM966–U1 . . . SS–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM966–3195
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM966–U2 . . . BE–95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM966–2185B
................................... BE–34, BE–35 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM966–3061B
Matrix 2003 Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . RM940–U1 . . . . 05–710, 05–711, . . . 00400–RM940–3154

...................................... 05–711–1, 05–711–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
...................................... 05–89, 05–95, . . . . . . 00400–RM940–3275
...................................... 05–241, 05–247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM940–U2 . . . . 65–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM940–2205B
MR2 Spyder 2001 MR2 Spyder . . . EWD424–U . . . 61, Overall M:2 . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD42–2214
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM801–U . . . . DI–180 to DI–188, . . . . . . 00400–RM801–2192
................................... DI–188–1, DI–188–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
2002 MR2 Spyder . . . RM900–U . . . . BR–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM900–1143
................................... DI–189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM900–2190
2003 MR2 Spyder . . . RM967–U1 . . . DI–245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM967–2189
................................... SS–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM967–3006
................................... DI–121, DI–128, . . . . . . . 00400–RM967–3278
................................... DI–134, DI–156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM967–U2 . . . SA–3, SA–5, SA–7 . . . . 00400–RM967–3006B
Prius 2001 Prius . . . . . . . . . . RM778–U1 . . . DI–671 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM778–2095R

2002 Prius . . . . . . . . . . RM883–U1 . . . DI–762, 766 to 769, . . . 00400–RM883–2224
................................... 774, 777 to 780, 782, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 785 to 792, 794, 796 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... DI–337 to DI–344 . . . . . . 00400–RM883–3241
2003 Prius . . . . . . . . . . RM957–U1 . . . DI–762, 766 to 769, . . . . 00400–RM957–2223
................................... 774, 777 to 780, 782, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 785 to 792, 794, 796 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... DI–337 to DI–344 . . . . . . 00400–RM957–3242
2004 Prius . . . . . . . . . . EWD555–U . . . 20, 22, 23, 194, . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD55–3296
................................... 293, 297, 306, 343, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... Overall 4–1, 11–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
RAV4 2002 RAV4 . . . . . . . . . RM891–U1 . . . DI–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM891–3091

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM891–U2 . . . BR–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM891–1142B
Sequoia 2002 Sequoia . . . . . . . RM886–U1 . . . IN–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM886–3309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM886–U2 . . . BE–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM886–3096B
2003 Sequoia . . . . . . . EWD495–U . . . 37, 246, Overall M:24 . . . 00400–EWD49–2213
................................... 199, Overall M:15–4 . . . . . . 00400–EWD49–5U
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM959–U1 . . . PP–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–2125
................................... DI–605 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–2179
Page 3 of 5
Sequoia 2003 Sequoia . . . . . . . RM959–U1 . . . DI–600, DI–602 to . . . . . 00400–RM959–2204

(Continued) ................................... DI–605, DI–608 to DI–610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... DI–308, DI–328 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–2206
................................... PP–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3137
................................... DI–329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3179
................................... DI–128, DI–129, . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3271
................................... DI–135, DI–136, DI–142, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... DI–143, DI–163, DI–164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... PP–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3228
................................... SS–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3260
................................... IN–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3310
................................... DI–300, DI–304, . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3311
................................... DI–404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM959–U2 . . . SA–98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–2125B
................................... BE–140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–2179B
................................... SR–12, BE–24 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–2206B
................................... BE–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3094B
................................... SA–90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM959–3137B
2004 Sequoia . . . . . . . EWD541–U . . . 199, Overall M:15–4 . . . . 00400–EWD54–3214
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1089–U1 . . IN–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM108–3312
................................... DI–446, DI–450, . . . . . . . 00400–RM108–3313
................................... DI–550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Sienna 2002 Sienna . . . . . . . . RM871–U2 . . . BE–23, BE–24 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM871–3081B

................................... SR–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM871–3132B
2003 Sienna . . . . . . . . EWD490–U . . . 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD49–3208
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM954–U2 . . . SR–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM954–3133B
................................... BE–23, BE–24 . . . . . . . . 00400–RM954–3082B
2004 Sienna . . . . . . . . EWD524–U . . . 96, 97, 126, . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD52–3184
................................... 127, Overall M:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1025–U1 . . 05–304, 05–355, . . . . . . 00400–RM102–3126
................................... 05–359 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 05–865, 05–866, . . . . . . 00400–RM102–3163
................................... 05–866–1, 05–866–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM1025–U2 . . 73–23, 73–26 . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM102–3102B
................................... 14–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM102–3134B
................................... 28–2, 28–3, 28–4 . . . . . 00400–RM102–3135B
................................... 82–3 to 82–6, . . . . . . . . 00400–RM102–3186B
................................... 82–6–1, 82–6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Solara 2003 Solara . . . . . . . . RM955–U1 . . . DI–287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM955–3219

2004 Solara . . . . . . . . EWD554–U . . . 168 to 170, . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD554–3294
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overall M:15–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 4 of 5
Tacoma 2002 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM921–U2 . . . BE–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM921–3084B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM921–U1 . . . DI–323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM921–3218
2003 Tacoma . . . . . . . RM1002–U2 . . BE–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM100–3085B
Tundra 2002 Tundra . . . . . . . . RM885–U2 . . . BE–52 to BE–56 . . . . . . 00400–RM885–3105B

2003 Tundra . . . . . . . . EWD491–U . . . 139, 240, . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD49–12136
................................... Overall M:30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 31, 33, 235, 261, . . . . . . 00400–EWD49–2216
................................... Overall M:29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 176, Overall M:18–5 . . . . 00400–EWD49–3210
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM956–U1 . . . SS–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–RM956–3258
................................... DI–115, DI–117, . . . . . . . 00400–RM956–3282
................................... DI–316, DI–318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM956–U2 . . . BE–57 to BE–60 . . . . . . 00400–RM956–3106B
2004 Tundra . . . . . . . . EWD567–U . . . 230, 446, . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00400–EWD56–3209
................................... Overall M:19–5, M:49–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
................................... 21, 94, 210, 515 . . . . . . . 00400–EWD56–3298
Page 5 of 5

Techenical Service Bulletin

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Techenical Service Bulletin

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Techenical Service Bulletin

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING

July 21, 2000 All Models

Maintenance Recommended Maintenance Procedure For A/C Compressor Lubrication:

4. Keep A/C on with engine idling for at least 30 seconds.

5. Turn off A/C system and stop engine.

Warranty OP CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 1

May 16, 1997 All Models

TOOLS & MATERIALS MATERIAL NUMBER DESCRIPTION

Allsop 3 Cassette Recorder Cleaner 00113–AS710–00 Cleaning Cassette and Cleaning

2. Store the cassette in its case.

6. Avoid inserting a cassette into the player if Peeling Label

7. Use cassettes that are 90 minutes or

OCTOBER 25, 1996

AM STATIC NOISE ON VEHICLES WITH POWER ANTENNAS Page 1 of 2

NOTE: Do not touch the antenna mast with

REPAIR PROCEDURE (Cont’d):

4. Remove the antenna spacer grommet at the

5. Reinstall the antenna assembly. Be sure to

6. Check to make sure that the teeth on the

7. Inspect the antenna cable connection and

OPCODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

AU6001 Listed repair procedure 1.0 86300–XXXXX 76 73

BULLETIN All Models

Warranty OP CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 2

Affected S All Models

DINGHY TOWABLE SPEED/DISTANCE

1995 – 2000 Avalon Not Towable –

Applicable MODEL MODEL CODE MODEL YEAR # CLAMPS

Parts PREVIOUS PART NUMBER CURRENT PART NUMBER PART NAME

Warranty OP CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 1

March 31, 2000 ’99 Camry

S The location was changed to improve the installation process.

Remote Control Status Monitor

Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 2

Locating New Location:

5. Disconnect the Blue 10P connector

BULLETIN All Models

Affected S All Models

Warranty OP CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 1

Affected 1997 Model Year Camry.

Procedure 1. Reinstall the carpet trim panel on the

2. The trunk lid must remain open and

3. If the trunk lid does not hold its open

a. Move the end of one of the torsion

b. Verify that the trunk lid functions

c. If the condition is not corrected,

4. If the trunk lid does not hold its open

a. Move the end of one of the torsion

b. Verify that the trunk lid functions NOTE:

BULLETIN All Models

Remote Control Status Monitor

Warranty CODE DESCRIPTION TIME OPN T1 T2

Toyota Supports ASE Certification Page 1 of 4

I. To program (add) a REMOTE CONTROL to the system:

Press and Hold

The STATUS MONITOR LED